CK-12F

CK-12 FOUNDATION

BMET Geometry

Say Thanks to the Authors

Click http://www.ck12.org/saythanks

(No sign in required)

Cifarelli Fiori Gloag Greenberg Jordan Sconyers

To access a customizable version of this book, as well as other interactive content, visit www.ck12.org

CK-12 Foundation is a non-profit organization with a mission to reduce the cost of textbook mate-

rials for the K-12 market both in the U.S. and worldwide. Using an open-content, web-based collaborative

model termed the FlexBook®, CK-12 intends to pioneer the generation and distribution of high-quality

educational content that will serve both as core text as well as provide an adaptive environment for

learning, powered through the FlexBook Platform®.

Copyright © 2011 CK-12 Foundation, www.ck12.org

The names “CK-12” and “CK12” and associated logos and the terms “FlexBook®”, and “FlexBook

Platform®”, (collectively “CK-12 Marks”) are trademarks and service marks of CK-12 Foundation and

are protected by federal, state and international laws.

Any form of reproduction of this book in any format or medium, in whole or in sections must include the

referral attribution link http://www.ck12.org/saythanks (placed in a visible location) in addition to

the following terms.

Except as otherwise noted, all CK-12 Content (including CK-12 Curriculum Material) is made available

to Users in accordance with the Creative Commons Attribution/Non-Commercial/Share Alike 3.0 Un-

ported (CC-by-NC-SA) License (http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-sa/3.0/), as amended

and updated by Creative Commons from time to time (the “CC License”), which is incorporated herein

by this reference.

Complete terms can be found at http://www.ck12.org/terms.

Printed: September 1, 2011

Authors

Victor Cifarelli, Nick Fiori, Andrew Gloag, Dan Greenberg, Lori Jordan, Jim Sconyers, Bill Zahner

Editor

Annamaria Farbizio

i www.ck12.org

Contents

1 Basics of Geometry 1

1.1 Points, Lines, and Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1.2 Segments and Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

1.3 Angles and Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

1.4 Midpoints and Bisectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

1.5 Angle Pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

1.6 Classifying Polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

1.7 Chapter 1 Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

1.8 Study Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

2 Coordinate Geometry 61

2.1 Vocabulary Self-Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

2.2 Distance and Midpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

2.3 Parallel and Perpendicular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

2.4 Equation of a Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

2.5 Translating and Reflecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

2.6 Rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

3 Triangles and Congruence 99

3.1 Triangle Sums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

3.2 Congruent Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

3.3 Triangle Congruence using SSS and SAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

3.4 Triangle Congruence using ASA, AAS, and HL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

3.5 Isosceles and Equilateral Triangles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

3.6 Chapter 4 Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

3.7 Study Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

4 Right Triangle Trigonometry 162

4.1 The Pythagorean Theorem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

www.ck12.org ii

4.2 Converse of the Pythagorean Theorem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

4.3 Using Similar Right Triangles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

4.4 Special Right Triangles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

4.5 Tangent, Sine and Cosine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

4.6 Inverse Trigonometric Ratios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

4.7 Chapter 8 Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

4.8 Study Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

5 Circles 217

5.1 Parts of Circles & Tangent Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

5.2 Properties of Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

5.3 Properties of Chords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

5.4 Inscribed Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

5.5 Angles of Chords, Secants, and Tangents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

5.6 Segments of Chords, Secants, and Tangents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

5.7 Extension: Writing and Graphing the Equations of Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

5.8 Chapter 9 Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

5.9 Study Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

6 Perimeter and Area 293

6.1 Triangles and Parallelograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

6.2 Trapezoids, Rhombi, and Kites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

6.3 Areas of Similar Polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

6.4 Circumference and Arc Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

6.5 Areas of Circles and Sectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

6.6 Chapter 10 Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

6.7 Study Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

7 Surface Area and Volume 337

7.1 Exploring Solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

7.2 Surface Area of Prisms and Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

7.3 Surface Area of Pyramids and Cones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

7.4 Volume of Prisms and Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

7.5 Volume of Pyramids and Cones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

7.6 Surface Area and Volume of Spheres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

7.7 Extension: Exploring Similar Solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

7.8 Chapter 11 Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

7.9 Study Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

iii www.ck12.org

8 Analyzing Conic Sections 398

8.1 Introduction to Conic Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

8.2 Circles and Ellipses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

8.3 Parabolas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

8.4 Hyperbolas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

8.5 General Algebraic Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454

www.ck12.org iv

Chapter 1

Basics of Geometry

In this chapter, students will learn about the building blocks of geometry. We will start with what the basic

terms: point, line and plane. From here, students will learn about segments, midpoints, angles, bisectors,

angle relationships, and how to classify polygons.

1.1 Points, Lines, and Planes

Learning Objectives

• Understand the terms point, line, and plane.

• Draw and label terms in a diagram.

Review Queue

1. List and draw pictures of five geometric figures you are familiar with.

2. What shape is a yield sign?

3. Solve the algebraic equations.

(a) 4x − 7 = 29

(b) −3x + 5 = 17

Know What? Geometry is everywhere. Remember these wooden blocks that you played with as a kid?

If you played with these blocks, then you have been “studying” geometry since you were a child.

How many sides does the octagon have? What is something in-real life that is an octagon?

Geometry: The study of shapes and their spatial properties.

1 www.ck12.org

Building Blocks

Point: An exact location in space.

A point describes a location, but has no size. Examples:

Table 1.1:

Label It Say It

A point A

Line: Infinitely many points that extend forever in both directions.

A line has direction and location is always straight.

Table 1.2:

Label It Say It

line g line g

←→PQ line PQ

←→QP line QP

Plane: Infinitely many intersecting lines that extend forever in all directions.

www.ck12.org 2

Think of a plane as a huge sheet of paper that goes on forever.

Table 1.3:

Label It Say It

Plane M Plane M

Plane ABC Plane ABC

Example 1: What best describes San Diego, California on a globe?

A. point

B. line

C. plane

Solution: A city is usually labeled with a dot, or point, on a globe.

Example 2: What best describes the surface of a movie screen?

A. point

B. line

C. plane

Solution: The surface of a movie screen is most like a plane.

Beyond the Basics Now we can use point, line, and plane to define new terms.

Space: The set of all points expanding in three dimensions.

Think back to the plane. It goes up and down, and side to side. If we add a third direction, we have space,

something three-dimensional.

Collinear: Points that lie on the same line.

P,Q,R, S , and T are collinear because they are all on line w. If a point U was above or below line w, it

would be non-collinear.

Coplanar: Points and/or lines within the same plane.

3 www.ck12.org

Lines h and i and points A, B,C,D,G, and K are coplanar in Plane J .

Line ←→KF and point E are non-coplanar with Plane J .

Example 3: Use the picture above to answer these questions.

a) List another way to label Plane J .

b) List another way to label line h.

c) Are K and F collinear?

d) Are E, B and F coplanar?

Solution:

a) Plane BDG. Any combination of three coplanar points that are not collinear would be correct.

b) ←→AB. Any combination of two of the letters A,C or B would also work.

c) Yes

d) Yes

Endpoint: A point at the end of a line.

Line Segment: A line with two endpoints. Or, a line that stops at both ends.

Line segments are labeled by their endpoints. Order does not matter.

Table 1.4:

Label It Say It

AB Segment AB

BA Segment BA

Ray: A line with one endpoint and extends forever in the other direction.

A ray is labeled by its endpoint and one other point on the line. For rays, order matters. When labeling,

put endpoint under the side WITHOUT an arrow.

www.ck12.org 4

Table 1.5:

Label It Say It

−−→

CD Ray CD

←−−

DC Ray CD

Intersection: A point or line where lines, planes, segments or rays cross.

Example 4: What best describes a straight road connecting two cities?

A. ray

B. line

C. segment

D. plane

Solution: The straight road connects two cities, which are like endpoints. The best term is segment, or

C.

Example 5: Answer the following questions about the picture to the right.

a) Is line l coplanar with Plane V or W?

b) Are R and Q collinear?

c) What point is non-coplanar with either plane?

d) List three coplanar points in Plane W.

Solution:

a) No.

b) Yes.

c) S

d) Any combination of P,O,T and Q would work.

Further Beyond This section introduces a few basic postulates.

Postulates: Basic rules of geometry. We can assume that all postulates are true.

Theorem: A statement that is proven true using postulates, definitions, and previously proven theorems.

5 www.ck12.org

Postulate 1-1: There is exactly one (straight) line through any two points.

Investigation 1-1: Line Investigation

1. Draw two points anywhere on a piece of paper.

2. Use a ruler to connect these two points.

3. How many lines can you draw to go through these two points?

Postulate 1-2: One plane contains any three non-collinear points.

Postulate 1-3: A line with points in a plane is also in that plane.

Postulate 1-4: The intersection of two lines will be one point.

Lines l and m intersect at point A.

Postulate 1-5: The intersection of two planes is a line.

www.ck12.org 6

When making geometric drawings, you need to be clear and label all points and lines.

Example 6a: Draw and label the intersection of line ←→AB and ray −−→CD at point C.

Solution: It does not matter where you put A or B on the line, nor the direction that −−→CD points.

Example 6b: Redraw Example 6a, so that it looks different but is still true.

Solution:

Example 7: Describe the picture below using the geometric terms you have learned.

Solution: ←→AB and D are coplanar in Plane P, while←→BC and←→AC intersect at point C which is non-coplanar.

Know What? Revisited The octagon has 8 sides. In Latin, “octo” or “octa” means 8, so octagon,

literally means “8-sided figure.” An octagon in real-life would be a stop sign.

Review Questions

• Questions 1-5 are similar to Examples 6a and 6b.

• Questions 6-8 are similar to Examples 3 and 5.

• Questions 9-12 are similar to Examples 1, 2, and 4.

• Questions 13-16 are similar to Example 7.

• Questions 17-25 use the definitions and postulates learned in this lesson.

For questions 1-5, draw and label an image to fit the descriptions.

1. −−→CD intersecting AB and Plane P containing AB but not −−→CD.

2. Three collinear points A, B, and C and B is also collinear with points D and E.

3. −→XY ,−→XZ, and −−→XW such that −→XY and −→XZ are coplanar, but −−→XW is not.

4. Two intersecting planes, P and Q, with GH where G is in plane P and H is in plane Q.

5. Four non-collinear points, I, J,K, and L, with line segments connecting all points to each other.

6. Name this line in five ways.

7 www.ck12.org

7. Name the geometric figure in three different ways.

8. Name the geometric figure below in two different ways.

9. What is the best possible geometric model for a soccer field? Explain your answer.

10. List two examples of where you see rays in real life.

11. What type of geometric object is the intersection of a line and a plane? Draw your answer.

12. What is the difference between a postulate and a theorem?

For 13-16, use geometric notation to explain each picture in as much detail as possible.

13.

14.

15.

16.

For 17-25, determine if the following statements are true or false.

17. Any two points are collinear.

www.ck12.org 8

18. Any three points determine a plane.

19. A line is to two rays with a common endpoint.

20. A line segment is infinitely many points between two endpoints.

21. A point takes up space.

22. A line is one-dimensional.

23. Any four points are coplanar.

24. −→AB could be read “ray AB” or “ray “BA.”

25. ←→AB could be read “line AB” or “line BA.”

Review Queue Answers

1. Examples could be triangles, squares, rectangles, lines, circles, points, pentagons, stop signs (oc-

tagons), boxes (prisms), or dice (cubes).

2. A yield sign is a triangle with equal sides.

3. (a) 4x − 7 = 29

4x = 36

x = 9

(b) −3x + 5 = 17

− 3x = 12

x = −4

1.2 Segments and Distance

Learning Objectives

• Use the ruler postulate.

• Use the segment addition postulate.

• Plot line segments on the x − y plane.

Review Queue

1. Draw a line segment with endpoints C and D.

2. How would you label the following figure? List 2 different ways.

3. Draw three collinear points and a fourth that is coplanar.

4. Plot the following points on the x − y plane.

(a) (3, -3)

(b) (-4, 2)

(c) (0, -7)

(d) (6, 0)

Know What? The average adult human body can be measured in “heads.” For example, the average

human is 7-8 heads tall. When doing this, each person uses their own head to measure their own body.

Other measurements are in the picture to the right.

See if you can find the following measurements:

9 www.ck12.org

• The length from the wrist to the elbow

• The length from the top of the neck to the hip

• The width of each shoulder

Measuring Distances

Distance: The length between two points.

Measure: To determine how far apart two geometric objects are.

The most common way to measure distance is with a ruler. In this text we will use inches and centimeters.

Example 1: Determine how long the line segment is, in inches. Round to the nearest quarter-inch.

Solution: To measure this line segment, it is very important to line up the “0” with the one of the

endpoints. DO NOT USE THE EDGE OF THE RULER.

From this ruler, it looks like the segment is 4.75 inches (in) long.

Inch-rulers are usually divided up by eight-inch (or 0.125 in) segments. Centimeter rulers are divided up

by tenth-centimeter (or 0.1 cm) segments.

www.ck12.org 10

The two rulers above are NOT DRAWN TO SCALE, which means that the measured length is not

the distance apart that it is labeled.

Example 2: Determine the measurement between the two points to the nearest tenth of a centimeter.

Solution: Even though there is no line segment between the two points, we can still measure the distance

using a ruler.

It looks like the two points are 6 centimeters (cm) apart.

NOTE: We label a line segment, AB and the distance between A and B is shown below. m means measure.

The two can be used interchangeably.

Table 1.6:

Label It Say It

AB The distance between A and B

mAB The measure of AB

Ruler Postulate

Ruler Postulate: The distance between two points is the absolute value of the difference between the

numbers shown on the ruler.

The ruler postulate implies that you do not need to start measuring at “0”, as long as you subtract the

first number from the second. “Absolute value” is used because distance is always positive.

Example 3: What is the distance marked on the ruler below? The ruler is in centimeters.

Solution: Subtract one endpoint from the other. The line segment spans from 3 cm to 8 cm. |8−3| = |5| = 5

The line segment is 5 cm long. Notice that you also could have done |3 − 8| = | − 5| = 5.

Example 4: Draw CD, such that CD = 3.825 in.

11 www.ck12.org

Solution: To draw a line segment, start at “0” and draw a segment to 3.825 in.

Put points at each end and label.

Segment Addition Postulate

First, in the picture below, B is between A and C. As long as B is anywhere on the segment, it can be

considered to be between the endpoints.

Segment Addition Postulate: If A, B, and C are collinear and B is between A and C, then AB+BC = AC.

For example, if AB = 5 cm and BC = 12 cm, then AC must equal 5 + 12 or 17 cm (in the picture above).

Example 5: Make a sketch of OP, where Q is between O and P.

Solution: Draw OP first, then place Q on the segment.

Example 6: In the picture from Example 5, if OP = 17 and QP = 6, what is OQ?

Solution: Use the Segment Additional Postulate.

OQ + QP = OP

OQ + 6 = 17

OQ = 17 − 6

OQ = 11

Example 7: Make a sketch of: S is between T and V. R is between S and T . TR = 6,RV = 23, and

TR = SV.

Solution: Interpret the first sentence first: S is between T and V.

Then add in what we know about R: It is between S and T . Put markings for TR = SV.

Example 8: Find SV, TS ,RS and TV from Example 7.

www.ck12.org 12

Solution:

For SV: It is equal to TR, so SV = 6 cm.

For RS : RV = RS + SV For TS : TS = TR + RS For TV : TV = TR + RS + SV

23 = RS + 6 TS = 6 + 17 TV = 6 + 17 + 6

RS = 17 cm TS = 23 cm TV = 29 cm

Example 9: Algebra Connection For HK, suppose that J is between H and K. If HJ = 2x + 4, JK =

3x + 3, and KH = 22, find x.

Solution: Use the Segment Addition Postulate.

HJ + JK = KH

(2x + 4) + (3x + 3) = 22

5x + 7 = 22

5x = 15

x = 3

Distances on a Grid

You can now find the distances between points in the x − y plane if the lines are horizontal or vertical.

If the line is vertical, find the change in the y−coordinates.

If the line is horizontal, find the change in the x−coordinates.

Example 10: What is the distance between the two points shown below?

Solution: Because this line is vertical, look at the change in the y−coordinates.

|9 − 3| = |6| = 6

The distance between the two points is 6 units.

Example 11: What is the distance between the two points shown below?

13 www.ck12.org

Solution: Because this line is horizontal, look at the change in the x−coordinates.

|(−4) − 3| = | − 7| = 7

The distance between the two points is 7 units.

Know What? Revisited The length from the wrist to the elbow is one head, the length from the top of

the neck to the hip is two heads, and the width of each shoulder one head width.

Review Questions

• Questions 1-8 are similar to Examples 1 and 2.

• Questions 9-12 are similar to Example 3.

• Questions 13-17 are similar to Examples 5 and 6.

• Questions 18 and 19 are similar to Example 7 and 8.

• Questions 20 and 21 are similar to Example 9.

• Questions 22-26 are similar to Examples 10 and 11.

For 1-4, find the length of each line segment in inches. Round to the nearest 18 of an inch.

1.

2.

3.

4.

For 5-8, find the distance between each pair of points in centimeters. Round to the nearest tenth.

www.ck12.org 14

5.

6.

7.

8.

For 9-12, use the ruler in each picture to determine the length of the line segment.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13. Make a sketch of BT , with A between B and T .

14. If O is in the middle of LT , where exactly is it located? If LT = 16 cm, what is LO and OT?

15. For three collinear points, A between T and Q.

(a) Draw a sketch.

(b) Write the Segment Addition Postulate.

(c) If AT = 10 in and AQ = 5 in, what is TQ?

16. For three collinear points, M between H and A.

(a) Draw a sketch.

15 www.ck12.org

(b) Write the Segment Addition Postulate.

(c) If HM = 18 cm and HA = 29 cm, what is AM?

17. For three collinear points, I between M and T .

(a) Draw a sketch.

(b) Write the Segment Addition Postulate.

(c) If IT = 6 cm and MT = 25 cm, what is AM?

18. Make a sketch that matches the description: B is between A and D. C is between B and D. AB =

7 cm, AC = 15 cm, and AD = 32 cm. Find BC, BD, and CD.

19. Make a sketch that matches the description: E is between F and G. H is between F and E. FH =

4 in, EG = 9 in, and FH = HE. Find FE,HG, and FG.

For 20 and 21, Suppose J is between H and K. Use the Segment Addition Postulate to solve for x. Then

find the length of each segment.

20. HJ = 4x + 9, JK = 3x + 3, KH = 33

21. HJ = 5x − 3, JK = 8x − 9, KH = 131

For 23-26, determine the vertical or horizontal distance between the two points.

23.

24.

www.ck12.org 16

25.

26.

Review Queue Answers

1.

2. line l, MN

3.

17 www.ck12.org

4.

1.3 Angles and Measurement

Learning Objectives

• Classify angles.

• Apply the Protractor Postulate and the Angle Addition Postulate.

Review Queue

1. Label the following geometric figure. What is it called?

2. Find a, XY and YZ.

3. B is between A and C on AC. If AB = 4 and BC = 9, what is AC?

Know What? Back to the building blocks. Every block has its own dimensions, angles and measurements.

Using a protractor, find the measure of the three outlined angles in the “castle” to the right.

www.ck12.org 18

Two Rays = One Angle

In #1 above, the figure was a ray. It is labeled −→AB, with the arrow over the point that is NOT the endpoint.

When two rays have the same endpoint, an angle is created.

Angle: When two rays have the same endpoint.

Vertex: The common endpoint of the two rays that form an angle.

Sides: The two rays that form an angle.

Table 1.7:

Label It Say It

∠ABC Angle ABC

∠CBA Angle CBA

The vertex is B and the sides are −→BA and −→BC. Always use three letters to name an angle, ∠

SIDE-VERTEX-SIDE.

Example 1: How many angles are in the picture below? Label each one.

Solution: There are three angles with vertex U. It might be easier to see them all if we separate them.

So, the three angles can be labeled, ∠XUY (or ∠YUX), ∠YUZ (or ∠ZUY), and ∠XUZ (or ∠ZUX).

Protractor Postulate

We measure a line segment’s length with a ruler. Angles are measured with something called a protractor.

A protractor is a measuring device that measures how “open” an angle is. Angles are measured in degrees,

and labeled with a ◦ symbol.

19 www.ck12.org

There are two sets of measurements, one starting on the left and the other on the right side of the protractor.

Both go around from 0◦ to 180◦. When measuring angles, always line up one side with 0◦, and see where

the other side hits the protractor. The vertex lines up in the middle of the bottom line.

Example 2: Measure the three angles from Example 1, using a protractor.

Solution: Just like in Example 1, it might be easier to measure these three angles if we separate them.

With measurement, we put an m in front of the ∠ sign to indicate measure. So, m∠XUY = 84◦, m∠YUZ = 42◦

and m∠XUZ = 126◦.

Just like the Ruler Postulate for line segments, there is a Protractor Postulate for angles.

www.ck12.org 20

Protractor Postulate: For every angle there is a number between 0◦ and 180◦ that is the measure of

the angle. The angle’s measure is the difference of the degrees where the sides of the angle intersect the

protractor. For now, angles are always positive.

In other words, you do not have to start measuring an angle at 0◦, as long as you subtract one measurement

from the other.

Example 3: What is the measure of the angle shown below?

Solution: This angle is lined up with 0◦, so where the second side intersects the protractor is the angle

measure, which is 50◦.

Example 4: What is the measure of the angle shown below?

Solution: This angle is not lined up with 0◦, so use subtraction to find its measure. It does not matter

which scale you use.

Inner scale: 140◦ − 25◦ = 125◦

Outer scale: 165◦ − 40◦ = 125◦

Example 5: Use a protractor to measure ∠RST below.

Solution: Lining up one side with 0◦ on the protractor, the other side hits 100◦.

Classifying Angles

Angles can be grouped into four different categories.

Straight Angle: An angle that measures exactly 180◦.

Right Angle: An angle that measures exactly 90◦.

21 www.ck12.org

This half-square marks right, or 90◦, angles.

Acute Angles: Angles that measure between 0◦ and 90◦.

Obtuse Angles: Angles that measure between 90◦ and 180◦.

Perpendicular: When two lines intersect to form four right angles.

Even though all four angles are 90◦, only one needs to be marked with the half-square.

The symbol for perpendicular is ⊥.

Table 1.8:

Label It Say It

l ⊥ m Line l is perpendicular to line m.

←→

AC ⊥ ←→DE Line AC is perpendicular to line DE.

Example 6: Name the angle and determine what type of angle it is.

Solution: The vertex is U. So, the angle can be ∠TUV or ∠VUT . To determine what type of angle it is,

compare it to a right angle.

Because it opens wider than a right angle, and less than a straight angle it is obtuse.

Example 7: What type of angle is 84◦? What about 165◦?

www.ck12.org 22

Solution: 84◦ is less than 90◦, so it is acute. 165◦ is greater than 90◦, but less than 180◦, so it is obtuse.

Drawing an Angle

Investigation 1-2: Drawing a 50◦ Angle with a Protractor

1. Start by drawing a horizontal line across the page, 2 in long.

2. Place an endpoint at the left side of your line.

3. Place the protractor on this point, such that the bottom line of the protractor is on the line and the

endpoint is at the center. Mark 50◦ on the appropriate scale.

4. Remove the protractor and connect the vertex and the 50◦ mark.

This process can be used to draw any angle between 0◦ and 180◦. See http://www.mathsisfun.com/

geometry/protractor-using.html for an animation of this investigation.

Example 8: Draw a 135◦ angle.

Solution: Following the steps from above, your angle should look like this:

Now that we know how to draw an angle, we can also copy that angle with a compass and a ruler. Anytime

we use a compass and ruler to draw geometric figures, it is called a construction.

23 www.ck12.org

Compass: A tool used to draw circles and arcs.

Investigation 1-3: Copying an Angle with a Compass and Ruler

1. We are going to copy the 50◦ angle from Investigation 1-2. First, draw a straight line, 2 inches long,

and place an endpoint at one end.

2. With the point (non-pencil side) of the compass on the vertex, draw an arc that passes through both

sides of the angle. Repeat this arc with the line we drew in #1.

3. Move the point of the compass to the horizontal side of the angle we are copying. Place the point where

the arc intersects this side. Open (or close) the “mouth” of the compass so that you can draw an arc that

intersects the other side and the arc drawn in #2. Repeat this on the line we drew in #1.

4. Draw a line from the new vertex to the arc intersections.

To watch an animation of this construction, see http://www.mathsisfun.com/geometry/construct-anglesame.

html

www.ck12.org 24

Marking Angles and Segments in a Diagram

With all these segments and angles, we need to have different ways to label equal angles and segments.

Angle Markings

Segment Markings

Example 9: Write all equal angle and segment statements.

Solution: AD ⊥ ←→FC

m∠ADB = m∠BDC = m∠FDE = 45◦

AD = DE

FD = DB = DC

m∠ADF = m∠ADC = 90◦

Angle Addition Postulate

Like the Segment Addition Postulate, there is an Angle Addition Postulate.

Angle Addition Postulate: If B is on the interior of ∠ADC, then

m∠ADC = m∠ADB + m∠BDC

.

25 www.ck12.org

Example 10: What is m∠QRT in the diagram below?

Solution: Using the Angle Addition Postulate, m∠QRT = 15◦ + 30◦ = 45◦.

Example 11: What is m∠LMN if m∠LMO = 85◦ and m∠NMO = 53◦?

Solution: m∠LMO = m∠NMO + m∠LMN, so 85◦ = 53◦ + m∠LMN.

m∠LMN = 32◦.

Example 12: Algebra Connection If m∠ABD = 100◦, find x.

Solution: m∠ABD = m∠ABC + m∠CBD. Write an equation.

100◦ = (4x + 2)◦ + (3x − 7)◦

100◦ = 7x◦ − 5◦

105◦ = 7x◦

15◦ = x

Know What? Revisited Using a protractor, the measurement marked in the red triangle is 90◦, the

measurement in the blue triangle is 45◦ and the measurement in the orange square is 90◦.

Review Questions

• Questions 1-10 use the definitions, postulates and theorems from this section.

• Questions 11-16 are similar to Investigation 1-2 and Examples 7 and 8.

• Questions 17 and 18 are similar to Investigation 1-3.

• Questions 19-22 are similar to Examples 2-5.

www.ck12.org 26

• Question 23 is similar to Example 9.

• Questions 24-28 are similar to Examples 10 and 11.

• Questions 29 and 30 are similar to Example 12.

For questions 1-10, determine if the statement is true or false.

1. Two angles always add up to be greater than 90◦.

2. 180◦ is an obtuse angle.

3. 180◦ is a straight angle.

4. Two perpendicular lines intersect to form four right angles.

5. A construction uses a protractor and a ruler.

6. For an angle ∠ABC,C is the vertex.

7. For an angle ∠ABC, AB and BC are the sides.

8. The m in front of m∠ABC means measure.

9. Angles are always measured in degrees.

10. The Angle Addition Postulate says that an angle is equal to the sum of the smaller angles around it.

For 11-16, draw the angle with the given degree, using a protractor and a ruler. Also, state what type of

angle it is.

11. 55◦

12. 92◦

13. 178◦

14. 5◦

15. 120◦

16. 73◦

17. Construction Copy the angle you made from #12, using a compass and a ruler.

18. Construction Copy the angle you made from #16, using a compass and a ruler.

For 19-22, use a protractor to determine the measure of each angle.

19.

20.

21.

22.

27 www.ck12.org

23. Interpret the picture to the right. Write down all equal angles, segments and if any lines are perpen-

dicular.

In Exercises 24-29, use the following information: Q is in the interior of ∠ROS . S is in the interior of

∠QOP. P is in the interior of ∠SOT . S is in the interior of ∠ROT and m∠ROT = 160◦, m∠SOT = 100◦, and

m∠ROQ = m∠QOS = m∠POT .

24. Make a sketch.

25. Find m∠QOP

26. Find m∠QOT

27. Find m∠ROQ

28. Find m∠SOP

Algebra Connection Solve for x.

29. m∠ADC = 56◦

30. m∠ADC = 130◦

Review Queue Answers

1. −→AB, a ray

2. XY = 3, YZ = 38

a − 6 + 3a + 11 = 41

4a + 5 = 41

www.ck12.org 28

4a = 36

a = 9

3. Use the Segment Addition Postulate, AC = 13.

1.4 Midpoints and Bisectors

Learning Objectives

• Identify the midpoint of line segments.

• Identify the bisector of a line segment.

• Understand and use the Angle Bisector Postulate.

Review Queue

1. m∠SOP = 38◦, find m∠POT and m∠ROT .

2. Find the slope between the two numbers.

(a) (-4, 1) and (-1, 7)

(b) (5, -6) and (-3, -4)

3. Find the average of these numbers: 23, 30, 18, 27, and 32.

Know What? The building to the right is the Transamerica Building in San Francisco. This building

was completed in 1972 and, at that time was one of the tallest buildings in the world. In order to make

this building as tall as it is and still abide by the building codes, the designer used this pyramid shape.

It is very important in designing buildings that the angles and parts of the building are equal. What

components of this building look equal? Analyze angles, windows, and the sides of the building.

29 www.ck12.org

Congruence

You could argue that another word for equal is congruent. But, the two are a little different.

Congruent: When two geometric figures have the same shape and size.

Table 1.9:

Label It Say It

AB BA AB is congruent to BA

Table 1.10:

Equal Congruent

=

used with measurement used with figures

mAB = AB = 5cm AB BA

m∠ABC = 60◦ ∠ABC ∠CBA

If two segments or angles are congruent, then they are also equal.

Midpoints

Midpoint: A point on a line segment that divides it into two congruent segments.

Because AB = BC, B is the midpoint of AC.

Midpoint Postulate: Any line segment will have exactly one midpoint.

www.ck12.org 30

This postulate is referring to the midpoint, not the lines that pass through the midpoint.

There are infinitely many lines that pass through the midpoint.

Example 1: Is M a midpoint of AB?

Solution: No, it is not MB = 16 and AM = 34 − 16 = 18. AM must equal MB in order for M to be the

midpoint of AB.

Midpoint Formula

When points are plotted in the coordinate plane, we can use a formula to find the midpoint between them.

Here are two points, (-5, 6) and (3, 4).

It follows that the midpoint should be halfway between the points on the line. Just by looking, it seems

like the midpoint is (-1, 4).

Midpoint Formula: For two points, (x1, y1) and x2, y2, the midpoint is

( x1+x2

2 ,

y1+y2

2

)

.

Let’s use the formula to make sure (-1, 4) is the midpoint between (-5, 6) and (3, 2).

(−5 + 3

2

,

6 + 2

2

)

=

(−2

2

,

8

2

)

= (−1, 4)

Always use this formula to determine the midpoint.

Example 2: Find the midpoint between (9, -2) and (-5, 14).

Solution: Plug the points into the formula.

(

9 + (−5)

2

,

−2 + 14

2

)

=

(4

2

,

12

2

)

= (2, 6)

Example 3: If M(3,−1) is the midpoint of AB and B(7,−6), find A.

31 www.ck12.org

Solution: Plug in what you know into the midpoint formula.

(7 + xA

2

,

−6 + yA

2

)

= (3,−1)

7 + xA

2

= 3 and −6 + yA

2

= −1

7 + xA = 6 and − 6 + yA = −2

xA = −1 and yA = 4

So, A is (−1, 4).

Segment Bisectors

Segment Bisector: A bisector cuts a line segment into two congruent parts and passes through the

midpoint.

Example 4: Use a ruler to draw a bisector of the segment.

Solution: First, find the midpoint. Measure the line segment. It is 4 cm long. To find the midpoint,

divide 4 cm by 2 because we want 2 equal pieces. Measure 2 cm from one endpoint and draw the midpoint.

To finish, draw a line that passes through Z.

A specific type of segment bisector is called a perpendicular bisector.

Perpendicular Bisector: A line, ray or segment that passes through the midpoint of another segment

and intersects the segment at a right angle.

AB BC

AC ⊥ ←→DE

Perpendicular Bisector Postulate: For every line segment, there is one perpendicular bisector.

Example 5: Which line is the perpendicular bisector of MN?

www.ck12.org 32

Solution: The perpendicular bisector must bisect MN and be perpendicular to it. Only ←→OQ fits this

description. ←→SR is a bisector, but is not perpendicular.

Example 6: Algebra Connection Find x and y.

Solution: The line shown is the perpendicular bisector.

So, 3x − 6 = 21 And, (4y − 2)◦ = 90◦

3x = 27 4y = 92◦

x = 9 y = 23◦

Investigation 1-4: Constructing a Perpendicular Bisector

1. Draw a line that is 6 cm long, halfway down your page.

2. Place the pointer of the compass at an endpoint. Open the compass to be greater than half of the

segment. Make arc marks above and below the segment. Repeat on the other endpoint. Make sure the

arc marks intersect.

3. Use your straightedge to draw a line connecting the arc intersections.

This constructed line bisects the line you drew in #1 and intersects it at 90◦. To see an animation of this

investigation, go to http://www.mathsisfun.com/geometry/construct-linebisect.html.

33 www.ck12.org

Congruent Angles

Example 7: Algebra Connection What is the measure of each angle?

Solution: From the picture, we see that the angles are equal.

Set the angles equal to each other and solve.

(5x + 7)◦ = (3x + 23)◦

2x◦ = 16◦

x = 8◦

To find the measure of ∠ABC, plug in x = 8◦ to (5x + 7)◦ → (5(8) + 7)◦ = (40 + 7)◦ = 47◦. Because

m∠ABC = m∠XYZ, m∠XYZ = 47◦ too.

Angle Bisectors

Angle Bisector: A ray that divides an angle into two congruent angles, each having a measure exactly

half of the original angle.

BD is the angle bisector of ∠ABC

∠ABD ∠DBC

m∠ABD = 1

2

m∠ABC

Angle Bisector Postulate: Every angle has exactly one angle bisector.

Example 8: Let’s take a look at Review Queue #1 again. Is OP the angle bisector of ∠SOT?

Solution: Yes, OP is the angle bisector of ∠SOT from the markings in the picture.

Investigation 1-5: Constructing an Angle Bisector

www.ck12.org 34

1. Draw an angle on your paper. Make sure one side is horizontal.

2. Place the pointer on the vertex. Draw an arc that intersects both sides.

3. Move the pointer to the arc intersection with the horizontal side. Make a second arc mark on the

interior of the angle. Repeat on the other side. Make sure they intersect.

4. Connect the arc intersections from #3 with the vertex of the angle.

To see an animation of this construction, view http://www.mathsisfun.com/geometry/construct-anglebisect.

html.

Know What? Revisited The image to the right is an outline of the Transamerica Building from earlier

in the lesson. From this outline, we can see the following parts are congruent:

TR TC ∠TCR ∠TRC

RS CM ∠CIE ∠RAN

CI RA and ∠TMS ∠TS M

AN IE ∠IEC ∠ANR

TS TM ∠TCI ∠TRA

All the four triangular sides of the building are congruent to each other as well.

35 www.ck12.org

Review Questions

• Questions 1-18 are similar to Examples 1, 4, 5 and 8.

• Questions 19-22 are similar to Examples 6 and 7.

• Question 23 is similar to Investigation 1-5.

• Question 24 is similar to Investigation 1-4.

• Questions 25-28 are similar to Example 2.

• Question 29 and 30 are similar to Example 3.

1. Copy the figure below and label it with the following information:

∠A ∠C

∠B ∠D

AB CD

AD BC

H is the midpoint of AE and DG, B is the midpoint of AC, GD is the perpendicular bisector of FA and EC

AC FE and FA EC

Find:

2. AB

www.ck12.org 36

3. GA

4. ED

5. HE

6. m∠HDC

7. FA

8. GD

9. m∠FED

10. How many copies of triangle AHB can fit inside rectangle FECA without overlapping?

For 11-18, use the following picture to answer the questions.

11. What is the angle bisector of ∠TPR?

12. P is the midpoint of what two segments?

13. What is m∠QPR?

14. What is m∠TPS ?

15. How does VS relate to QT?

16. How does QT relate to VS ?

17. What is m∠QPV?

18. Is PU a bisector? If so, of what?

Algebra Connection For 19-22, use algebra to determine the value of variable in each problem.

19.

20.

21.

22.

37 www.ck12.org

23. Construction Using your protractor, draw an angle that is 110◦. Then, use your compass to

construct the angle bisector. What is the measure of each angle?

24. Construction Using your ruler, draw a line segment that is 7 cm long. Then use your compass to

construct the perpendicular bisector, What is the measure of each segment?

For questions 25-28, find the midpoint between each pair of points.

25. (-2, -3) and (8, -7)

26. (9, -1) and (-6, -11)

27. (-4, 10) and (14, 0)

28. (0, -5) and (-9, 9)

Given the midpoint (M) and either endpoint of AB, find the other endpoint.

29. A(−1, 2) and M(3, 6)

30. B(−10,−7) and M(−2, 1)

Review Queue Answers

1. m∠POT = 38◦, m∠ROT = 57◦ + 38◦ + 38◦ = 133◦

2. (a) 7−1−1+4 = 63 = 2

(b) −4+6−3−5 = 2−8 = −14

3. 23+30+18+27+325 = 1305 = 26

1.5 Angle Pairs

Learning Objectives

• Recognize complementary angles supplementary angles, linear pairs, and vertical angles.

• Apply the Linear Pair Postulate and the Vertical Angles Theorem.

Review Queue

1. Find x.

2. Find y.

3. Find z.

Know What? A compass (as seen to the right) is used to determine the direction a person is traveling.

The angles between each direction are very important because they enable someone to be more specific

with their direction. A direction of 45◦ NW, would be straight out along that northwest line.

www.ck12.org 38

What headings have the same angle measure? What is the angle measure between each compass line?

Complementary Angles

Complementary: Two angles that add up to 90◦.

Complementary angles do not have to be:

• congruent

• next to each other

Example 1: The two angles below are complementary. m∠GHI = x. What is x?

Solution: Because the two angles are complementary, they add up to 90◦. Make an equation.

x + 34◦ = 90◦

x = 56◦

Example 2: The two angles below are complementary. Find the measure of each angle.

Solution: The two angles add up to 90◦. Make an equation.

39 www.ck12.org

8r + 9◦ + 7r + 6◦ = 90◦

15r + 15◦ = 90◦

15r = 75◦

r = 5◦

However, you need to find each angle. Plug r back into each expression.

m∠GHI = 8(5◦) + 9◦ = 49◦

m∠JKL = 7(5◦) + 6◦ = 41◦

Supplementary Angles

Supplementary: Two angles that add up to 180◦.

Supplementary angles do not have to be:

• congruent

• next to each other

Example 3: The two angles below are supplementary. If m∠MNO = 78◦ what is m∠PQR?

Solution: Set up an equation. However, instead of equaling 90◦, now it is 180◦.

78◦ + m∠PQR = 180◦

m∠PQR = 102◦

Example 4: What is the measure of two congruent, supplementary angles?

Solution: Supplementary angles add up to 180◦. Congruent angles have the same measure. So, 180◦÷2 =

90◦, which means two congruent, supplementary angles are right angles, or 90◦.

Linear Pairs

Adjacent Angles: Two angles that have the same vertex, share a side, and do not overlap.

∠PSQ and ∠QSR are adjacent.

∠PQR and ∠PQS are NOT adjacent because they overlap.

www.ck12.org 40

Linear Pair: Two angles that are adjacent and the non-common sides form a straight line.

∠PSQ and ∠QSR are a linear pair.

Linear Pair Postulate: If two angles are a linear pair, then they are supplementary.

Example 5: Algebra Connection What is the measure of each angle?

Solution: These two angles are a linear pair, so they add up to 180◦.

(7q − 46)◦ + (3q + 6)◦ = 180◦

10q − 40◦ = 180◦

10q = 220◦

q = 22◦

Plug in q to get the measure of each angle. m∠ABD = 7(22◦) − 46◦ = 108◦ m∠DBC = 180◦ − 108◦ = 72◦

Example 6: Are ∠CDA and ∠DAB a linear pair? Are they supplementary?

Solution: The two angles are not a linear pair because they do not have the same vertex. They are

supplementary, 120◦ + 60◦ = 180◦.

Vertical Angles

Vertical Angles: Two non-adjacent angles formed by intersecting lines.

∠1 and ∠3 are vertical angles

41 www.ck12.org

∠2 and ∠4 are vertical angles

These angles are labeled with numbers. You can tell that these are labels because they do not have a

degree symbol.

Investigation 1-6: Vertical Angle Relationships

1. Draw two intersecting lines on your paper. Label the four angles created ∠1, ∠2, ∠3, and ∠4, just like

the picture above.

2. Use your protractor to find m∠1.

3. What is the angle relationship between ∠1 and ∠2 called? Find m∠2.

4. What is the angle relationship between ∠1 and ∠4 called? Find m∠4.

5. What is the angle relationship between ∠2 and ∠3 called? Find m∠3.

6. Are any angles congruent? If so, write them down.

From this investigation, you should find that ∠1 ∠3 and ∠2 ∠4.

Vertical Angles Theorem: If two angles are vertical angles, then they are congruent.

We can prove the Vertical Angles Theorem using the same process we used in the investigation. We will

not use any specific values for the angles.

From the picture above:

∠1 and ∠2 are a linear pair → m∠1 + m∠2 = 180◦ Equation 1

∠2 and ∠3 are a linear pair → m∠2 + m∠3 = 180◦ Equation 2

∠3 and ∠4 are a linear pair → m∠3 + m∠4 = 180◦ Equation 3

All of the equations = 180◦, so Equation 1 = Equation 2 and Equation 2 = Equation 3.

m∠1 + m∠2 = m∠2 + m∠3 and m∠2 + m∠3 = m∠3 + m∠4

Cancel out the like terms

m∠1 = m∠3 and m∠2 = m∠4

Recall that anytime the measures of two angles are equal, the angles are also congruent. So, ∠1 ∠3 and

∠2 ∠4 too.

Example 7: Find m∠1 and m∠2.

Solution: ∠1 is vertical angles with 18◦, so m∠1 = 18◦.

∠2 is a linear pair with ∠1 or 18◦, so 18◦ + m∠2 = 180◦.

m∠2 = 180◦ − 18◦ = 162◦.

Know What? Revisited The compass has several vertical angles and all of the smaller angles are

22.5◦, 180◦ ÷ 8. Directions that are opposite each other have the same angle measure, but of course, a

www.ck12.org 42

different direction. All of the green directions have the same angle measure, 22.5◦, and the purple have the

same angle measure, 45◦. N, S , E and W all have different measures, even though they are all 90◦ apart.

Review Questions

• Questions 1 and 2 are similar to Examples 1, 2, and 3.

• Questions 3-8 are similar to Examples 3, 4, 6 and 7.

• Questions 9-16 use the definitions, postulates and theorems from this section.

• Questions 17-25 are similar to Example 5.

1. Find the measure of an angle that is complementary to ∠ABC if m∠ABC is

(a) 45◦

(b) 82◦

(c) 19◦

(d) z◦

2. Find the measure of an angle that is supplementary to ∠ABC if m∠ABC is

(a) 45◦

(b) 118◦

(c) 32◦

(d) x◦

Use the diagram below for exercises 3-7. Note that NK ⊥ ←→IL.

3. Name one pair of vertical angles.

4. Name one linear pair of angles.

5. Name two complementary angles.

6. Name two supplementary angles.

7. What is:

(a) m∠INL

43 www.ck12.org

(b) m∠LNK

8. If m∠INJ = 63◦, find:

(a) m∠JNL

(b) m∠KNJ

(c) m∠MNL

(d) m∠MNI

For 9-16, determine if the statement is true or false.

9. Vertical angles are congruent.

10. Linear pairs are congruent.

11. Complementary angles add up to 180◦.

12. Supplementary angles add up to 180◦

13. Adjacent angles share a vertex.

14. Adjacent angles overlap.

15. Complementary angles are always 45◦.

16. Vertical angles have the same vertex.

For 17-25, find the value of x or y.

17.

18.

19.

20.

21.

22.

www.ck12.org 44

23.

24. Find x.

25. Find y.

Review Queue Answers

1. x + 26 = 3x − 8

34 = 2x

17 = x

2. (7y + 6)◦ = 90◦

7y = 84◦

y = 12◦

3. z + 15 = 5z + 9

6 = 4z

1.5 = z

1.6 Classifying Polygons

Learning Objectives

• Define triangle and polygon.

• Classify triangles by their sides and angles.

• Understand the difference between convex and concave polygons.

• Classify polygons by number of sides.

Review Queue

1. Draw a triangle.

2. Where have you seen 4, 5, 6 or 8 - sided polygons in real life? List 3 examples.

3. Fill in the blank.

(a) Vertical angles are always _____________.

(b) Linear pairs are _____________.

(c) The parts of an angle are called _____________ and a _____________.

45 www.ck12.org

Know What? The pentagon in Washington DC is a pentagon with congruent sides and angles. There is

a smaller pentagon inside of the building that houses an outdoor courtyard. Looking at the picture, the

building is divided up into 10 smaller sections. What are the shapes of these sections? Are any of these

division lines diagonals? How do you know?

Triangles

Triangle: Any closed figure made by three line segments intersecting at their endpoints.

Every triangle has three vertices (the points where the segments meet), three sides (the segments), and

three interior angles (formed at each vertex). All of the following shapes are triangles.

You might have also learned that the sum of the interior angles in a triangle is 180◦. Later we will prove

this, but for now you can use this fact to find missing angles.

Example 1: Which of the figures below are not triangles?

Solution: B is not a triangle because it has one curved side. D is not closed, so it is not a triangle either.

Example 2: How many triangles are in the diagram below?

www.ck12.org 46

Solution: Start by counting the smallest triangles, 16.

Now count the triangles that are formed by 4 of the smaller triangles, 7.

Next, count the triangles that are formed by 9 of the smaller triangles, 3.

Finally, there is the one triangle formed by all 16 smaller triangles. Adding these numbers together, we

get 16 + 7 + 3 + 1 = 27.

Classifying by Angles

Angles can be grouped by their angles; acute, obtuse or right. In any triangle, two of the angles will always

be acute. The third angle can be acute, obtuse, or right. We classify each triangle by this angle.

Right Triangle: A triangle with one right angle.

Obtuse Triangle: A triangle with one obtuse angle.

Acute Triangle: A triangle where all three angles are acute.

Equiangular Triangle: When all the angles in a triangle are congruent.

47 www.ck12.org

Example 3: Which term best describes 4RST below?

Solution: This triangle has one labeled obtuse angle of 92◦. Triangles can only have one obtuse angle, so

it is an obtuse triangle.

Classifying by Sides

You can also group triangles by their sides.

Scalene Triangle: A triangles where all three sides are different lengths.

Isosceles Triangle: A triangle with at least two congruent sides.

Equilateral Triangle: A triangle with three congruent sides.

From the definitions, an equilateral triangle is also an isosceles triangle.

Example 4: Classify the triangle by its sides and angles.

Solution: We see that there are two congruent sides, so it is isosceles. By the angles, they all look acute.

www.ck12.org 48

We say this is an acute isosceles triangle.

Example 5: Classify the triangle by its sides and angles.

Solution: This triangle has a right angle and no sides are marked congruent. So, it is a right scalene

triangle.

Polygons

Polygon: Any closed, 2-dimensional figure that is made entirely of line segments that intersect at their

endpoints.

Polygons can have any number of sides and angles, but the sides can never be curved.

The segments are called the sides of the polygons, and the points where the segments intersect are called

vertices.

Example 6: Which of the figures below is a polygon?

Solution: The easiest way to identify the polygon is to identify which shapes are not polygons. B and C

each have at least one curved side, so they are not be polygons. D has all straight sides, but one of the

vertices is not at the endpoint, so it is not a polygon. A is the only polygon.

Example 7: Which of the figures below is not a polygon?

Solution: C is a three-dimensional shape, so it does not lie within one plane, so it is not a polygon.

Convex and Concave Polygons

Polygons can be either convex or concave. The term concave refers to a cave, or the polygon is “caving

in”. All stars are concave polygons.

A convex polygon does not do this. Convex polygons look like:

49 www.ck12.org

Diagonals: Line segments that connect the vertices of a convex polygon that are not sides.

The red lines are all diagonals.

This pentagon has 5 diagonals.

Example 8: Determine if the shapes below are convex or concave.

Solution: To see if a polygon is concave, look at the polygons and see if any angle “caves in” to the

interior of the polygon. The first polygon does not do this, so it is convex. The other two do, so they are

concave.

Example 9: How many diagonals does a 7-sided polygon have?

Solution: Draw a 7-sided polygon, also called a heptagon.

Drawing in all the diagonals and counting them, we see there are 14.

Classifying Polygons

Whether a polygon is convex or concave, it is always named by the number of sides.

Table 1.11:

Polygon Name Number of Sides Number of Diago-

nals

Convex Example

Triangle 3 0

www.ck12.org 50

Table 1.11: (continued)

Polygon Name Number of Sides Number of Diago-

nals

Convex Example

Quadrilateral 4 2

Pentagon 5 5

Hexagon 6 9

Heptagon 7 14

Octagon 8 ?

Nonagon 9 ?

Decagon 10 ?

Undecagon or hen-

decagon

11 ?

Dodecagon 12 ?

n-gon n (where n > 12) ?

Example 10: Name the three polygons below by their number of sides and if it is convex or concave.

51 www.ck12.org

Solution: The pink polygon is a concave hexagon (6 sides).

The green polygon convex pentagon (5 sides).

The yellow polygon is a convex decagon (10 sides).

Know What? Revisited The pentagon is divided up into 10 sections, all quadrilaterals. None of these

dividing lines are diagonals because they are not drawn from vertices.

Review Questions

• Questions 1-8 are similar to Examples 3, 4 and 5.

• Questions 9-14 are similar to Examples 8 and 10

• Question 15 is similar to Example 6.

• Questions 16-19 are similar to Example 9 and the table.

• Questions 20-25 use the definitions, postulates and theorems in this section.

For questions 1-6, classify each triangle by its sides and by its angles.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

www.ck12.org 52

7. Can you draw a triangle with a right angle and an obtuse angle? Why or why not?

8. In an isosceles triangle, can the angles opposite the congruent sides be obtuse?

In problems 9-14, name each polygon in as much detail as possible.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15. Explain why the following figures are NOT polygons:

53 www.ck12.org

16. How many diagonals can you draw from one vertex of a pentagon? Draw a sketch of your answer.

17. How many diagonals can you draw from one vertex of an octagon? Draw a sketch of your answer.

18. How many diagonals can you draw from one vertex of a dodecagon?

19. Determine the number of total diagonals for an octagon, nonagon, decagon, undecagon, and do-

decagon.

For 20-25, determine if the statement is true or false.

20. Obtuse triangles can be isosceles.

21. A polygon must be enclosed.

22. A star is a convex polygon.

23. A right triangle is acute.

24. An equilateral triangle is equiangular.

25. A quadrilateral is always a square.

26. A 5-point star is a decagon

Review Queue Answers

1.

2. Examples include: stop sign (8), table top (4), the Pentagon (5), snow crystals (6), bee hive combs

(6), soccer ball pieces (5 and 6)

3. (a) congruent or equal

(b) supplementary

(c) sides, vertex

1.7 Chapter 1 Review

Symbol Toolbox

←→AB,−→AB, AB - Line, ray, line segment

∠ABC - Angle with vertex B

mAB or AB - Distance between A and B

m∠ABC - Measure of ∠ABC

⊥ - Perpendicular

= - Equal

- Congruent

Markings

www.ck12.org 54

Keywords, Postulates, and Theorems

Points, Lines, and Planes

• Geometry

• Point

• Line

• Plane

• Space

• Collinear

• Coplanar

• Endpoint

• Line Segment

• Ray

• Intersection

• Postulates

• Theorem

• Postulate 1-1

• Postulate 1-2

• Postulate 1-3

• Postulate 1-4

• Postulate 1-5

Segments and Distance

• Distance

• Measure

• Ruler Postulate

• Segment Addition Postulate

Angles and Measurement

• Angle

• Vertex

• Sides

• Protractor Postulate

• Straight Angle

• Right Angle

• Acute Angles

• Obtuse Angles

• Convex

55 www.ck12.org

• Concave

• Polygon

• Perpendicular

• Construction

• Compass

• Angle Addition Postulate

Midpoints and Bisectors

• Congruent

• Midpoint.

• Midpoint Postulate

• Segment Bisector

• Perpendicular Bisector

• Perpendicular Bisector Postulate

• Angle Bisector

• Angle Bisector Postulate

Angle Pairs

• Complementary

• Supplementary

• Adjacent Angles

• Linear Pair

• Linear Pair Postulate

• Vertical Angles

• Vertical Angles Theorem

Classifying Polygons

• Triangle

• Right Triangle

• Obtuse Triangle

• Acute Triangle

• Equiangular Triangle

• Scalene Triangle

• Isosceles Triangle

• Equilateral Triangle

• Vertices

• Diagonals

Review

Match the definition or description with the correct word.

1. When three points lie on the same line. — A. Measure

2. All vertical angles are ________. — B. Congruent

3. Linear pairs add up to _______. — C. Angle Bisector

www.ck12.org 56

4. The m in from of m∠ABC. — D. Ray

5. What you use to measure an angle. — E. Collinear

6. When two sides of a triangle are congruent. — F. Perpendicular

7. ⊥ — G. Line

8. A line that passes through the midpoint of another line. — H. Protractor

9. An angle that is greater than 90◦. — I. Segment Addition Postulate

10. The intersection of two planes is a ___________. — J. Obtuse

11. AB + BC = AC — K. Point

12. An exact location in space. — L. 180◦

13. A sunbeam, for example. — M. Isosceles

14. Every angle has exactly one. — N. Pentagon

15. A closed figure with 5 sides. — O. Hexagon

P. Bisector

Texas Instruments Resources

In the CK-12 Texas Instruments Geometry FlexBook, there are graphing calculator activities

designed to supplement the objectives for some of the lessons in this chapter. See http:

//www.ck12.org/flexr/chapter/9686.

1.8 Study Guide

Keywords: Define, write theorems, and/or draw a diagram for each word below.

1st Section: Points, Lines, and Planes

Geometry

Point

Line

Plane

Space

Collinear

Coplanar

Endpoint

Line Segment

Ray

Intersection

Postulates

Theorem

Postulate 1-1

Postulate 1-2

Postulate 1-3

Postulate 1-4

57 www.ck12.org

Postulate 1-5

Use this picture to identify the geometric terms in this section.

Homework:

2nd Section: Segments and Distance

Distance

Measure

Ruler Postulate

Segment Addition Postulate

Homework:

3rd Section: Angles and Measurement

Angle

Vertex

Sides

Protractor Postulate

Straight Angle

Right Angle

Acute Angles

Obtuse Angles

Perpendicular

Construction

Compass

Angle Addition Postulate

www.ck12.org 58

Homework:

4th Section: Midpoints and Bisectors

Congruent

Midpoint.

Midpoint Postulate

Segment Bisector

Perpendicular Bisector

Perpendicular Bisector Postulate

Angle Bisector

Angle Bisector Postulate

Homework:

5th Section: Angle Pairs

Complementary

Supplementary

Adjacent Angles

Linear Pair

Linear Pair Postulate

Vertical Angles

Vertical Angles Theorem

Homework:

59 www.ck12.org

6th Section: Classifying Polygons

Draw your own pictures for this section

Triangle

Right Triangle

Obtuse Triangle

Acute Triangle

Equiangular Triangle

Scalene Triangle

Isosceles Triangle

Equilateral Triangle

Vertices

Sides

Polygon

Convex Polygon

Concave Polygon

Quadrilateral, Pentagon, Hexagon, Heptagon, Octagon, Nonagon, Decagon…

Diagonals

Homework:

www.ck12.org 60

Chapter 2

Coordinate Geometry

2.1 Vocabulary Self-Rating

Table 2.1: Rating Guide: DK: I am sure I don’t know it K: I am sure I know it ?: I’m not

sure

Word Before Lesson/Unit After Lesson/Unit

Distance

Overbar

Estimation

Estimate

Ruler

Absolute value

x − y coordinate plane

x−coordinate

y−coordinate

Right triangle

Pythagorean Theorem

Distance Formula

Midpoint

Equidistant

Slope

Undefined

Parallel

Perpendicular

Slope-intercept form

y−intercept

Circle

Center

Radius

Leg

Hypotenuse

Concentric

Translation

61 www.ck12.org

Table 2.1: (continued)

Word Before Lesson/Unit After Lesson/Unit

Prime

Preimage

Image

Isometry

Reflection

Perpendicular bisector

Rotation

Angle of rotation

Arc

Central angle

Diameter

Acute

Complementary

2.2 Distance and Midpoint

Learning Objectives

• Derive the Distance Formula using the Pythagorean Theorem.

• Use the Distance Formula to find the length of a line segment with known endpoints.

• Use the Midpoint Formula to calculate the coordinates of the midpoint of a line segment given both

endpoints, or to determine the coordinates of one endpoint given the midpoint and the other endpoint.

Measuring Distances

There are many different ways to identify measurements. This lesson will present some that may be

familiar, and probably a few that are new to you.

Before we begin to examine distances, however, it is important to identify the meaning of distance in the

context of geometry. The distance between two points is defined by the length of the line segment that

connects them.

• The distance between two points is the _________________________ of the line seg-

ment that connects them.

The most common way to measure distance is with a ruler. Also, distance can be estimated using scale

on a map.

www.ck12.org 62

Notation Notes: When we name a segment we use the endpoints and an overbar (a bar or line above

the letters) with no arrows. For example, ”segment AB” is written AB. The length of a segment is named

by giving the endpoints without using an overbar. For example, the length of AB is written AB. In some

books you may also see mAB, or measure of AB, which means the same as AB, that is, it is the length of

the segment with endpoints A and B.

Example 1

Use the scale to estimate the distance between Aaron’s house and Bijal’s house. Assume that the first third

of the scale in black represents one inch.

You need to find the distance between the two houses in the map. The scale shows a sample distance.

Use the scale to estimate the distance. You will find that approximately 3 segments of the length of the

scale fit between the two points. Be careful — 3 is not the answer to this problem! As the scale shows 1

inch equal to 2 miles, you must multiply 3 units by 2 miles:

3 inches · 2 miles

1 inch

= 6 miles

The distance between the houses is about six miles.

You can also use estimation to identify measurements in other geometric figures. Remember to include

words like approximately, about, or estimation whenever you are finding an estimated answer.

The word “estimation” means using a non-exact guess of what a number is. Another similar word is

“approximation.”

Both of these words are nouns. The verb forms are: “to estimate” or “to approximate.”

We use these words when we are not sure of the exact measurement of a distance, length, or other number,

but when we can make an educated guess.

• To estimate (or to _________________________________ ) a number means to

give a non-exact but educated guess of what it is.

Rulers

You have probably been using rulers to measure distances for a long time and you know that a ruler is

a tool with measurement markings.

• A ruler is a tool with ___________________________________ markings.

Using a ruler: If you use a ruler to find the distance between two points, the distance will be the absolute

value of the difference between the numbers shown on the ruler.

63 www.ck12.org

This means that you do not need to start measuring at the zero mark, as long as you use subtraction to

find the distance.

Note: We say absolute value here since distances in geometry must always be positive, and subtraction

can give a negative result.

• You do not need to measure from zero on a ruler; just ______________________ the start

number from the end number to find the distance!

• The distance on a ruler is the ___________________________ value of the difference

between the numbers.

• Absolute value is always a ____________________________ number.

Example 2

What distance is marked on the ruler in the diagram below? Assume that the scale is marked in centimeters.

The way to use the ruler is to find the absolute value of the difference between the numbers shown. This

means you subtract the numbers and then make sure your answer is positive. The line segment spans from

3 cm to 8 cm:

|3 − 8| = | − 5| = 5

The absolute value of the difference between the two numbers shown on the ruler above is 5 cm. So the

line segment is 5 cm long.

Remember, we use vertical bars around an expression to show absolute value: |x|

Distances on a Grid

In algebra you most likely worked with graphing lines in the x− y coordinate plane. Sometimes you can

find the distance between points on a coordinate plane using the values of the coordinates:

• If the two points line up horizontally, look at the change of value in the x-coordinates.

• If the two points line up vertically, look at the change of value in the y-coordinates.

The change in value will show the distance between the points. Remember to use absolute value, just

like you did with the ruler. Later you will learn how to calculate distance between points that do not line

up horizontally or vertically.

• When points line up horizontally, they have the same _______-coordinate. This means their

_______-coordinates are different so we take their difference to find the distance between the

points.

• When points line up vertically, they have the same _______-coordinate. This means their ___-

____-coordinates are different so we take their difference to find the distance between the points.

www.ck12.org 64

Example 3

What is the distance between the two points shown below?

The two points shown on the grid are at (2, 9) and (2, 3). These points line up vertically (meaning they

have the same x−coordinate of 2), so we can look at the difference in their y−coordinates:

|9 − 3| = |6| = 6

So, the distance between the two points is 6 units.

Example 4

What is the distance between the two points shown below?

The two points shown on the grid are at (–4, 4) and (3, 4). These points line up horizontally (meaning they

have the same y−coordinate of 4), so we can look at the difference in their x−coordinates. Remember

to take the absolute value of the difference between the values to find the distance:

| − 4 − 3| = | − 7| = 7

The distance between the two points is 7 units.

Reading Check:

1. What is absolute value? Explain in your own words.

2. When 2 points line up vertically, what value do they have in common?

65 www.ck12.org

3. When 2 points line up horizontally, what value do they have in common?

The Distance Formula

We have learned that a right triangle with sides of lengths a and b and hypotenuse of length c has a

special relationship called the Pythagorean Theorem. The sum of the squares of a and b is equal to

the square of c. Placing this in equation form we have:

If we put this triangle in a coordinate plane so A has coordinates of (x1, y1) and B has coordinates of

(x2, y2), we can find the lengths of the legs of the triangle using what we just learned about points that

line up horizontally or vertically:

the length of AC is |x2 − x1| and the length of BC is |y2 − y1|

We are finding the length, which means that we want a positive value; the absolute value bars guarantee

www.ck12.org 66

that our answer is always positive. But in the final equation,

c2 = |x2 − x1|2 + |y2 − y1|2

the absolute value bars are not needed since we squared all three terms, and squared numbers are always

positive.

Getting the square root of both sides we have,

c =

√

(x2 − x1)2 + (y2 − y1)2

We say that c is the distance between the points A and B, and we call the formula above the Distance

Formula.

Reading Check:

1. On which famous theorem is the Distance Formula based?

2. How can you find the distance of one of the legs of a right triangle like the one in the diagram on the

previous page? Pick one leg and explain in your own words.

Segment Midpoints

Now that you understand congruent segments, there are a number of new terms and types of figures you

can explore.

A segment midpoint is a point on a line segment that divides the segment into two congruent segments.

So, each segment between the midpoint and an endpoint will have the same length.

• A midpoint divides a segment into two ___________________________ parts.

In the diagram below, point B is the midpoint of AC since AB is congruent to BC:

There is even a special postulate dedicated to midpoints:

Segment Midpoint Postulate

Any line segment will have exactly one midpoint—no more, and no less.

Example 5

67 www.ck12.org

Nandi and Arshad measure and find that their houses are 10 miles apart. If they agree to meet at the

midpoint between their two houses, how far will each of them travel?

The easiest way to find the distance to the midpoint of the imagined segment connecting their houses is

to divide the length (which is 10 miles) by 2:

10 ÷ 2 = 5

Each person will travel five miles to meet at the midpoint between their houses.

The Midpoint Formula

The midpoint is the middle point of a line segment. It is equidistant (equal distances) from both

endpoints.

The formula for determining the midpoint of a segment in a coordinate plane is the average of the

x−coordinates and the y−coordinates. Remember, to find the average of 2 numbers, you take the sum

of the numbers and then divide by 2.

If a segment has endpoints (x1, y1) and (x2, y2):

• the average of the x−coordinates is: x1+x22

• and the average of the y-coordinates is: y1+y22

Therefore, the midpoint is at:

Reading Check:

1. What is an average? Explain in your own words.

www.ck12.org 68

2. Where is a midpoint located on a line segment? Describe.

3. What does the word equidistant mean?

4. How many midpoints can a line segment have?

5. In the space below, draw a line segment. Then draw and label its midpoint.

2.3 Parallel and Perpendicular

Learning Objectives

• Identify and compute slope in the coordinate plane.

• Use the relationship between slopes of parallel lines.

• Use the relationship between slopes of perpendicular lines.

• Identify equations of parallel lines.

• Identify equations of perpendicular lines.

Slope in the Coordinate Plane

If you look at a graph of a line, you can think of the slope as the steepness of the line.

• Slope is the measure of the ______________________________ of a line.

Mathematically, you can calculate the slope using two different points on a line. Given two points (x1, y1)

and (x2, y2) the slope is:

69 www.ck12.org

slope = y2 − y1

x2 − x1

You may have also learned that slope equals “rise over run.”

This means that:

• The numerator (top) of the fraction is the “rise,” or how many units the slope goes up (positive) or

down (negative).

→ Up or down is how the slope moves along the y−axis.

• The denominator (bottom) of the fraction is the “run,” or how many units the slope goes to the right

(positive) or left (negative).

→ Right or left is how the slope moves along the x−axis.

You can remember “rise” as up or down because an elevator “rises” up or down.

“Rise” (up/down) is in the y direction.

You can remember “run” as moving right or left because a person “runs” with her right and left feet.

“Run” (right/left) is in the x direction.

• The numerator of the slope represents the change in the _________ direction.

• The slope’s _______________________ represents the change in the x direction.

In other words, first calculate the distance that the line travels up (or down), and then divide that value

by the distance the line travels left to right.

A line that goes up from left to right has positive slope, and a line that goes down from left to right has

negative slope:

images from http://www.tutorvista.com/math/positive-and-negative-slope

• A line that goes up from left to right has a _________________________ slope.

• A line that goes down from left to right has a ________________________ slope.

Example 1

What is the slope of a line that goes through the points (2, 2) and (4, 6)?

You can use the slope formula on the previous page to find the slope of this line. When substituting

values, (x1, y1) is (2, 2) and (x2, y2) is (4, 6):

www.ck12.org 70

x1 = , y1 = , and x2 = , y2 =

slope = y2 − y1

x2 − x1

slope = 6 − 2

4 − 2 =

4

2

= 2

The slope of this line is 2.

→ What does that mean graphically?

Look at the graph on the next page to see what the line looks like.

Notice: If the slope is positive, the line should go up from left to right. Does it?

You can see that the line “rises” 4 units as it “runs” 2 units to the right. So, the “rise” (numerator) is 4

units and the “run” (denominator) is 2 units. Since 4 ÷ 2 = 2, the slope of this line is 2.

As you read on the previous page, the slope of this line is 2, a positive number.

• Any line with a positive slope will go ____________________ from left to right.

• Any line with a negative slope will go ____________________ from left to right.

Example 2

What is the slope of the line that goes through the points (1, 9) and (3, 3)?

Again, use the formula to find the slope of this line:

x1 = , y1 = , and x2 = , y2 =

slope = y2 − y1

x2 − x1

slope = 3 − 9

3 − 1 =

−6

2

= −3

The slope of this line is –3.

Because the slope of the line in example 2 is negative, it will go down to the right. The points and the

line that connects them are shown below:

71 www.ck12.org

Some types of lines have special slopes. Check out following examples to see what happens with horizontal

and vertical lines.

Example 3

What is the slope of a line that goes through the points (4, 4) and (8, 4)?

Use the formula to find the slope of this line:

x1 = , y1 = , and x2 = , y2 =

slope = y2 − y1

x2 − x1

slope = 4 − 4

8 − 4 =

0

8

= 0

The slope of this line is 0.

Every line with a slope of 0 is horizontal.

• A ____________________________________ line has a slope equal to zero.

Example 4

What is the slope of a line that goes through the points (3, 2) and (3, 6)?

Use the formula to find the slope of this line:

x1 = , y1 = , and x2 = , y2 =

slope = y2 − y1

x2 − x1

slope = 6 − 2

3 − 3 =

4

0

Zero is not allowed to be in the denominator of a fraction! Therefore, the slope of this line is undefined.

Every line with an undefined slope is vertical.

• All vertical lines have slopes that are ____________________.

The line in example 4 is vertical and its slope is undefined:

www.ck12.org 72

In review, if you look at a graph of a line from left to right, then:

• Lines with positive slopes point up to the right.

• Lines with negative slopes point down to the right.

• Horizontal lines have a slope of zero.

• Vertical lines have undefined slope.

Reading Check:

1. On the coordinate plane below, draw a line with a positive slope.

2. On the coordinate plane below, draw a line with a negative slope.

3. On the coordinate plane below, draw a line with a slope of zero.

73 www.ck12.org

4. On the coordinate plane below, draw a line with an undefined slope.

Slopes of Parallel Lines

Now that you know how to find the slope of lines using x− and y−coordinates, you can think about how

lines are related to their slopes.

If two lines in the coordinate plane are parallel, then they will have the same slope. Conversely, if two

lines in the coordinate plane have the same slope, then those lines are parallel.

• Parallel lines have the _____________________________ slope.

Example 5

Which of the following answers below could represent the slope of a line parallel to the one shown on the

graph?

A. – 4

www.ck12.org 74

B. – 1

C. 14

D. 1

Since you are looking for the slope of a parallel line, it will have the same slope as the line on the graph.

First find the slope of the given line, and then choose the answer with that same slope. To do this, pick

any two points on the line and use the slope formula.

For example, for the points (–1, 5) and (3, 1) :

x1 = , y1 = , and x2 = , y2 =

slope = y2 − y1

x2 − x1

slope = 1 − 5

3 − (−1) =

−4

3 + 1

= −4

4

= −1

The slope of the line on the graph is –1. The answer is B.

Slopes of Perpendicular Lines

Parallel lines have the same slope. There is also a mathematical relationship for the slopes of perpen-

dicular lines.

The slopes of perpendicular lines will be the opposite reciprocal of each other.

Opposite here means the opposite sign.

If a slope is positive, then its opposite is negative.

If a slope is negative, then its opposite is positive.

A reciprocal is a fraction with its numerator and denominator flipped.

The reciprocal of 23 is 32 . The reciprocal of 12 is 2. The reciprocal of 4 is 14 .

• The opposite of 5 is _______________.

• The reciprocal of 5 is _______________.

The opposite reciprocal can be found in two steps:

1. First, find the reciprocal of the given slope. If the slope is a fraction, you can simply switch the

numbers in the numerator and the denominator to find the reciprocal. If the slope is not a fraction, you

can make it into a fraction by putting a 1 in the denominator. Then find the reciprocal by flipping the

numerator and denominator.

2. The second step is to find the opposite of the given number. If the value is positive, make it negative.

If the value is negative, make it positive.

The opposite reciprocal of 54 is −45 and the opposite reciprocal of - 3 is 13 .

• The opposite reciprocal of 5 is _______________.

Another way to check if lines are perpendicular is to multiply their slopes: if the slopes of two lines

multiply to be –1, then the two lines are perpendicular.

• The slopes of ____________________________ lines multiply to be –1.

75 www.ck12.org

Example 6

Which of the following numbers could represent the slope of a line perpendicular to the one shown below?

A. −75

B. 75

C. −57

D. 57

Since you are looking for the slope of a perpendicular line, it will be the opposite reciprocal of the slope

of the line on the graph. First find the slope of the given line, then find its opposite reciprocal. You can

use the slope formula to find the original line’s slope. Pick two points on the line.

For example, for the points (–3, –2) and (4, 3) :

x1 = , y1 = , and x2 = , y2 =

slope = y2 − y1

x2 − x1

slope =

3 − (−2)

4 − (−3) =

3 + 2

4 + 3

= 5

7

The slope of the line on the graph is 57 . Now find the opposite reciprocal of that value. First switch the

numerator and denominator in the fraction, then find the opposite sign. The opposite reciprocal of 57 is −75 .

The answer is A.

Slope-Intercept Equations

The most common type of linear equation to study is called slope-intercept form, which uses both the

slope of the line and its y−intercept. A y−intercept is the point where the line crosses the vertical

y−axis. This is the value of y when x is equal to 0.

• Slope-intercept form is an equation that uses the _________________________ and

the ______________________________ of a line.

• The y−intercept is the point where the line intersects the ___________________.

• At the y−intercept, x equals ______________.

The formula for an equation in slope-intercept form is:

www.ck12.org 76

y = mx + b

In this equation, y and x remain as variables, m is the slope of the line, and b is the y−intercept of the

line. For example, if you know that a line has a slope of 4 and it crosses the y−axis at (0, 8), then its

equation in slope-intercept form is: y = 4x + 8.

• In slope-intercept form, m represents the _____________.

• In slope-intercept form, b represents the _____________.

This form is especially useful for finding the equation of a line given its graph. You already know how to

calculate the slope by finding two points and using the slope formula. You can find the y−intercept by

seeing where the line crosses the y−axis on the graph. The value of b is the y−coordinate of this point.

Example 7

Write an equation in slope-intercept form that represents the following line:

First find the slope of the line. You already know how to do this using the slope formula. There are no

points given on the line, so you have to pick your own points. See where the line goes right through an

intersection (corner point) on the graph paper. You can use the two points (0, 3) and (2, 2) :

x1 = , y1 = , and x2 = , y2 =

slope = y2 − y1

x2 − x1

slope = 2 − 3

2 − 0 =

−1

2

= −1

2

The slope of the line is −12 . This will replace m in the slope-intercept equation.

Now you need to find the y−intercept. On the graph, find where the line intersects the y−axis. It crosses

the y−axis at (0, 3) so the y−intercept is 3. This will replace b in the slope-intercept equation, so now

you have all the information you need.

The equation for the line shown in the graph is: y = −12 x + 3.

77 www.ck12.org

• In the slope-intercept equation, the slope is represented by the letter _________.

• In the slope-intercept equation, the y−intercept is the letter _________.

Equations of Parallel Lines

You studied parallel lines and their graphical relationships, so now you will learn how to easily identify

equations of parallel lines. When looking for parallel lines, look for equations that have the same slope.

As long as the y−intercepts are not the same and the slopes are equal, the lines are parallel. If the

y−intercept and the slope are both the same, then the two equations are for the same exact line, and a

line cannot be parallel to itself.

• Parallel lines have the _______________________ slope.

Reading Check:

1. True or false:

The reciprocal of a fraction is when you flip the numerator and the denominator.

2. Make up an example that supports the statement in #1 above.

3. What is the slope-intercept form of an equation?

4. What do the letters m and b stand for in the slope-intercept equation?

m :

b :

5. How are the slopes of parallel lines related?

Example 8

Juan drew the line below:

www.ck12.org 78

Which of the following equations could represent a line parallel to the one Juan drew?

A. y = −12 x − 6

B. y = 12 x + 9

C. y = −2x − 18

D. y = 2x + 1

If you find the slope of the line in Juan’s graph, you can find the slope of a parallel line because it will

be the same. Pick two points on the graph and find the slope using the slope formula. Use the points (0,

5) and (1, 3) :

x1 = , y1 = , and x2 = , y2 =

slope = y2 − y1

x2 − x1

slope = 3 − 5

1 − 0 =

−2

1

= −2

The slope of Juan’s line is –2. Look at your four answer choices: which equation has a slope of –2? All

other parts of the equation do not matter. The only equation that has a slope of –2 is choice C, so that is

the correct answer.

Equations of Perpendicular Lines

You also studied perpendicular lines and their graphical relationships: remember that the slopes of

perpendicular lines are opposite reciprocals. To easily identify equations of perpendicular lines, look

for equations that have slopes that are opposite reciprocals of each other.

Here, it does not matter what the y−intercept is; as long as the slopes are opposite reciprocals, the lines

are perpendicular.

Example 9

Kara drew the line in this graph:

79 www.ck12.org

Which of the following equations could represent a line perpendicular to the one Kara drew above?

A. y = 32 x + 10

B. y = −32 x + 6

C. y = 23 x − 4

D. y = −23 x − 1

First find the slope of the line in Kara’s graph. Then find the opposite reciprocal of this slope. To begin,

pick two points on the graph and calculate the slope using the slope formula. Use the points (0, 2) and

(3, 4) :

x1 = , y1 = , and x2 = , y2 =

slope = y2 − y1

x2 − x1

slope = 4 − 2

3 − 0 =

2

3

The slope of Kara’s line on the graph is 23 .

Find the opposite reciprocal: the reciprocal of 23 is 32 , and the opposite of 32 is −32 .

So, −32 is the opposite reciprocal of (or perpendicular slope to) 23 .

Now look in your answer choices for the equation that has a slope of −32 .

The only equation that has a slope of −32 is choice B, so that is the correct answer.

Reading Check:

1. How are the slopes of perpendicular lines related to each other?

2. In the context of perpendicular slope values, what does opposite mean?

www.ck12.org 80

3. True or false: On a graph, perpendicular lines intersect at an angle of 45◦.

4. Correct the statement in #3 above to make it true.

2.4 Equation of a Circle

Learning Objectives

• Write the equation of a circle.

Equations and Graphs of Circles

A circle is defined as the set of all points that are the same distance from a single point called the center.

This definition can be used to find an equation of a circle in the coordinate plane.

• A circle is the set of all points equidistant from the ________________________.

Look at the circle shown below. As you can see, this circle has its center at the point (2, 2) and it has a

radius of 3.

All of the points (x, y) on the circle are a distance of 3 units away from the center of the circle.

81 www.ck12.org

We can express this information as an equation with the help of the Pythagorean Theorem. The right

triangle shown above has legs of lengths (x − 2) and (y − 2), and hypotenuse of length 3. We can write:

(x − 2)2 + (y − 2)2 = 32 or

(x − 2)2 + (y − 2)2 = 9

We can generalize this equation for a circle with center at point (x0, y0) and radius r:

(x − x0)2 + (y − y0)2 = r2

Example 1

Find the center and radius of the following circles:

A. (x − 4)2 + (y − 1)2 = 25

B. (x + 1)2 + (y − 2)2 = 4

A. We rewrite the equation as: (x − 4)2 + (y − 1)2 = 52. Compare this to the standard equation. The

center of the circle is at the point (4, 1) and the radius is 5.

B. We rewrite the equation as: (x − (−1))2 + (y − 2)2 = 22. The center of the circle is at the point (–1,

2) and the radius is 2.

Example 2

Graph the following circles:

A. x2 + y2 = 9

B. (x + 2)2 + y2 = 1

In order to graph a circle, we first graph the center point and then draw points that are the length of the

radius away from the center in the directions up, down, right, and left. Then connect the outer points

in a smooth circle!

A. We rewrite the equation as: (x − 0)2 + (y − 0)2 = 32. The center of the circle is at the point (0, 0) and

the radius is 3.

Plot the center point and a point 3 units up at (0, 3), 3 units down at (0, –3), 3 units right at (3, 0) and

3 units left at (–3, 0) :

www.ck12.org 82

B. We rewrite the equation as: (x − (−2))2 + (y − 0)2 = 12. The center of the circle is at the point (–2, 0)

and the radius is 1.

Plot the center point and a point 1 unit up at (–2, 1), 1 unit down at (–2, –1), 1 unit right at (–1, 0) and

1 unit left at (–3, 0) :

Reading Check:

1. In your own words, describe the radius of a circle.

2. In the general equation of a circle (x − x0)2 + (y − y0)2 = r2, the variables x0 and y0 stand for a special

point. What point is this?

3. How can you find the radius of a circle from its equation? What do you need to do to the right side of

the equation?

Example 3

Write the equation of the circle in the graph below:

83 www.ck12.org

From the graph, we can see that the center of the circle is at the point (–2, 2) and the radius is 3 units

long, so we use these numbers in the standard circle equation:

(x + 2)2 + (y − 2)2 = 32

(x + 2)2 + (y − 2)2 = 9

Example 4

Determine if the point (1, 3) is on the circle given by the equation:

(x − 1)2 + (y + 1)2 = 16

In order to find the answer, we simply plug the point (1, 3) into the equation of the circle given.

Substitute the number _________ for x and the number _________ for y:

(1 − 1)2 + (3 + 1)2 = 16

(0)2 + (4)2 = 16

16 = 16

Since we end up with a true statement, the point (1, 3) satisfies the equation. Therefore, the point is on

the circle.

Concentric Circles

Concentric circles are circles of different radii that share the same center point.

• Circles with the same ___________________ but different _________________-

are called concentric circles.

Example 5

www.ck12.org 84

Write the equations of the concentric circles shown in the graph:

All 4 circles have the same center point at (3, 2) so we know the equations will all be:

(x − 3)2 + (y − 2)2

Since the circles have different radius lengths, the right side of the equations will all be different numbers.

The smallest circle has a radius of 2:

(x − 3)2 + (y − 2)2 = 22 or

(x − 3)2 + (y − 2)2 = 4

The next larger circle has a radius of 3: (x − 3)2 + (y − 2)2 = 9

The next larger circle has a radius of 4: (x − 3)2 + (y − 2)2 = 16

The largest circle has a radius of 5: (x − 3)2 + (y − 2)2 = 25

Look at the word concentric:

In Spanish, the word “con” means “with.”

The second part of the word, “-centric” looks very similar to the word “center.”

When we put these two parts together, “concentric” means “with” the same “center.”

Reading Check:

1. If you are given a point and an equation of a circle, how can you tell if the given point is on the circle?

Describe what you would do.

2. What are concentric circles?

85 www.ck12.org

3. If you are given two equations of two different circles, how can you tell if the circles are concentric?

Describe what the two equations would have to have in common.

2.5 Translating and Reflecting

Learning Objectives

• Graph a translation in a coordinate plane.

• Recognize that a translation is an isometry.

• Find the reflection of a point in a line on a coordinate plane.

• Verify that a reflection is an isometry.

Translations

A translation moves every point a given horizontal distance and/or a given vertical distance.

• When a point is moved a certain distance horizontally and/or vertically, the move is called a ___-

___________________________.

For example, if a translation moves point A(3, 7) 2 units to the right and 4 units up to A′(5, 11), then this

translation moves every point in a larger figure the same way.

The symbol next to the letter A′ above is called the prime symbol.

The prime symbol looks like an apostrophe like you may use to show possessive, such as, “that is my

brother’s book.”

(The apostrophe is before the s in brother’s)

In math, we use the prime symbol to show that two things are related.

In the translation above, the original point is related to the translated point, so instead of renaming the

translated point, we use the prime symbol to show this.

The original point (or figure) is called the preimage and the translated point (or figure) is called the

image. In the example given above, the preimage is point A(3, 7) and the image is point A′(5, 11). The

image is designated (or shown) with the prime symbol.

• Another name for the original point is the __________________________.

• Another name for the translated point is the __________________________.

• The translated point uses the _______________ symbol next to its naming letter.

Example 1

The point A(3, 7) in a translation becomes the point A′(2, 4). What is the image of B(−6, 1) in the same

translation?

www.ck12.org 86

Point A moved 1 unit to the left and 3 units down to get to A′. Point B will also move 1 unit to the left

and 3 units down.

We subtract 1 from the x−coordinate and 3 from the y−coordinate of point B:

B′ = (−6 − 1, 1 − 3) = (−7,−2)

B′(−7,−2) is the image of B(−6, 1).

Using the Distance Formula, you can notice the following:

AB =

√

(−6 − 3)2 + (1 − 7)2 =

√

(−9)2 + (−6)2 =

√

117

A′B′ =

√

(−7 − 2)2 + (−2 − 4)2 =

√

(−9)2 + (−6)2 =

√

117

Since the endpoints of AB and A′B′ moved the same distance horizontally and vertically, both segments

have the same length.

Translation is an Isometry

An isometry is a transformation in which distance is “preserved.” This means that the distance between

any two points in the preimage (before the translation) is the same as the distance between the points

in the image (after the translation).

• An isometry is when ______________________________ is preserved from the preim-

age to the image.

As you saw in Example 1 above:

The preimage AB = the image A′B′ (since they are both equal to

√

117)

Would we get the same result for any other point in this translation? The answer is yes. It is clear that

for any point X, the distance from X to X′ will be

√

117. Every point moves

√

117 units to its image.

This is true in general:

Translation Isometry Theorem

Every translation in the coordinate plane is an isometry.

• Every translation in an x − y coordinate plane is an ________________________.

Reflection in a Line

A reflection in a line is as if the line were a mirror:

87 www.ck12.org

• When an object is reflected in a line, the line is like a ______________________.

An object reflects in the mirror, and we see the image of the object.

• The image is the same distance behind the mirror line as the object is in front of the mirror line.

• The “line of sight” from the object to the mirror is perpendicular to the mirror line itself.

• The “line of sight” from the image to the mirror is also perpendicular to the mirror line.

Reflection of a Point in a Line

Point P′ is the reflection of point P in line k if and only if line k is the perpendicular bisector of PP′.

• The mirror line is a perpendicular ____________________________ of the line that

connects the object to its reflected image.

Reflections in Special Lines

In a coordinate plane there are some “special” lines for which it is relatively easy to create reflections:

• the x−axis

• the y−axis

• the line y = x (this line makes a 45◦ angle between the x−axis and the y−axis)

• The _________-axis, the _________-axis, and the line _________ = _________-

are “special” lines to use as mirrors when finding reflections of figures.

We can develop simple formulas for reflections in these lines.

Let P(x, y) be a point in the coordinate plane:

www.ck12.org 88

We now have the following reflections of P(x, y) :

• Reflection of P in the x−axis is Q(x, –y)

[ the x−coordinate stays the same, and the y−coordinate is opposite]

• Reflection of P in the y−axis is R(−x, y)

[ the x−coordinate is opposite, and the y−coordinate stays the same ]

• Reflection of P in the line y = x is S (y, x)

[ switch the x−coordinate and the y−coordinate ]

Look at the graph above and you will be convinced of the first two reflections in the axes. We will prove

the third reflection in the line y = x on the next page.

• Reflections in the x−axis have the same ________-coordinate, but the y−coordinate has the

_________________________ value.

• Reflections in the y−axis have an ___________________________ x−coordinate, and

the y−coordinate stays the ____________________.

• For reflections in the y = x line, __________________ the x− and y−coordinates.

Example 2

Prove that the reflection of point P(h, k) in the line y = x is the point S (k, h).

Here is an “outline” proof:

First, we know the slope of the line y = x is 1 because y = 1x + 0.

Next, we will investigate the slope of the line that connects our two points, PS . Use the slope formula

and the values of the points’ coordinates given above:

Slope of PS is k−hh−k =

−1(h−k)

h−k = −1

89 www.ck12.org

Therefore, we have just shown that PS and y = x are perpendicular because the product of their slopes

is –1.

Finally, we can show that y = x is the perpendicular bisector of PS by finding the midpoint of PS :

Midpoint of PS is

(

h+k

2 ,

h+k

2

)

We know the midpoint of PS is on the line y = x because the x−coordinate and the y−coordinate of the

midpoint are the same.

Therefore, the line y = x is the perpendicular bisector of PS .

Conclusion: The points P and S are reflections in the line y = x.

Example 3

Point P(5, 2) is reflected in the line y = x. The image is P′. P′ is then reflected in the y−axis. The image

is P′′. What are the coordinates of P′′?

We find one reflection at a time:

• Reflect P in the line y = x to find P′ :

For reflections in the line y = x we ___________________ coordinates.

Therefore, P′ is (2, 5).

• Reflect P′ in the y−axis:

For reflections in the y−axis, the x−coordinate is _____________________ and the y−coordinate

stays the _______________________.

Therefore, P′′ is (–2, 5).

Reflections Are Isometries

Like a translation, a reflection in a line is also an isometry. Distance between points is “preserved”

(stays the same).

• A reflection in a line is an __________________________, which means that distance

is preserved.

We will verify the isometry for reflection in the x−axis. The proof is very similar for reflection in the

y−axis.

The diagram below shows PQ and its reflection in the x−axis, P′Q′ :

www.ck12.org 90

Use the Distance Formula:

PQ =

√

(m − h)2 + (n − k)2

P′Q′ =

√

(m − h)2 + (−n − (−k))2 =

√

(m − h)2 + (k − n)2

=

√

(m − h)2 + (n − k)2

So PQ = P′Q′

Conclusion: When a segment is reflected in the x−axis, the image segment has the same length as the

original preimage segment. This is the meaning of isometry. You can see that a similar argument would

apply to reflection in any line.

Reading Check:

1. True or false: Both translations and reflections are isometries.

2. What is the meaning of the statement in #1 above?

3. If a translation rule is (x + 3, y − 1), in which directions is a point moved?

4. When a point or figure is reflected in a line, that line acts as a mirror.

a. How does the x−axis change a point that is reflected? What do you do to the coordinates of the point in

this type of reflection?

91 www.ck12.org

b. How does the y−axis change a point that is reflected? What do you do to the coordinates of the point in

this type of reflection?

c. How does the line y = x change a point that is reflected? What do you do to the coordinates of the point

in this type of reflection?

2.6 Rotating

Learning Objectives

• Find the image of a point in a rotation in a coordinate plane.

• Recognize that a rotation is an isometry.

Sample Rotations

In this lesson we will study rotations centered at the origin of a coordinate plane. We begin with some

specific examples of rotations. Later we will see how these rotations fit into a general formula.

We define a rotation as follows: In a rotation centered at the origin with an angle of rotation of n◦, a

point moves counterclockwise along an arc of a circle. The central angle of the circle measures n◦.

The original preimage point is one endpoint of the arc, and the image of the original point is the other

endpoint of the arc:

www.ck12.org 92

• Rotations centered at the origin move points ______________________ along an arc of

a circle.

• For a rotation of n◦, the central angle of the circle measures ____________.

• The preimage point is one endpoint of the _________________ and the image is the other

endpoint.

180◦ Rotation

Our first example is rotation through an angle of 180◦:

In a 180◦ rotation, the image of P(h, k) is the point P′(−h,−k).

Notice:

• P and P′ are the endpoints of a diameter of a circle.

→ This means that the distance from the point P to the origin (or the distance from the point P′ to the

origin) is a radius of the circle.

93 www.ck12.org

The distance from P to the origin equals the distance from ________ to the origin.

• The rotation is the same as a “reflection in the origin.”

→This means that if we use the origin as a mirror, the point P is directly across from the point P′.

A 180◦ _____________________________ is also a reflection in the origin.

In a rotation of 180◦, the x−coordinate and the y−coordinate of the __________________ become

the negative versions of the values in the image.

A 180◦ rotation is an isometry. The image of a segment is a congruent segment:

Use the Distance Formula:

PQ =

√

(k − t)2 + (h − r)2

P′Q′ =

√

(−k − (−t))2 + (−h − (−r))2 =

√

(−k + t)2 + (−h + r)2

=

√

(t − k)2 + (r − h)2

=

√

(k − t)2 + (h − r)2

So PQ = P′Q′

• A 180◦ rotation is an ___________________________, so distance is preserved.

• When a segment is rotated 180◦ (or reflected in the origin), its image is a ____________-

_____________________ segment.

90◦ Rotation

The next example is a rotation through an angle of 90◦. The rotation is in the counterclockwise direction:

www.ck12.org 94

In a 90◦ rotation, the image of P(h, k) is the point P′(−k, h).

Notice:

• PO and P′O are both radii of the same circle, so PO = P′O.

If PO and P′O are both radii, then they are the same ______________________.

• ∠POP′ is a right angle.

• The acute angle formed by PO and the x−axis and the acute angle formed by P′O and the x−axis

are complementary angles.

Remember, complementary angles add up to ________________◦.

You can see by the coordinates of the preimage and image points, in a 90◦ rotation:

• the x− and y−coordinates are switched AND

• the x−coordinate is negative.

In a 90◦ rotation, switch the _________- and _________-coordinates and make the new x−coordinate

_________________________.

A 90◦ rotation is an isometry. The image of a segment is a congruent segment.

95 www.ck12.org

Use the Distance Formula:

PQ =

√

(k − t)2 + (h − r)2

P′Q′ =

√

(h − r)2 + (−k − (−t))2 =

√

(h − r)2 + (t − k)2

=

√

(k − t)2 + (h − r)2

So PQ = P′Q′

Reading Check:

Which of the following are isometries? Circle all that apply:

30◦rotation 45◦rotation 60◦rotation

90◦rotation 150◦rotation 180◦rotation

Re f lection Translation Bisection

Example 1

What are the coordinates of the vertices of ∆ABC in a rotation of 90◦?

www.ck12.org 96

Point A is (4, 6), B is (–4, 2), and C is (6, –2).

In a 90◦ rotation, the x−coordinate and the y−coordinate are switched AND the new x−coordinate is

made negative:

• A becomes A′ : switch x and y to (6, 4) and make x negative (–6, 4)

• B becomes B′ : switch x and y to (2, –4) and make x negative (–2, –4)

• C becomes C′ : switch x and y to (–2, 6) and make x negative (−(−2), 6) = (2, 6)

So the vertices of ∆A′B′C′ are (–6, 4), (–2, –4), and (2, 6).

Plot each of these points on the coordinate plane above and draw in each side of the new rotated triangle.

Can you see how ∆ABC is rotated 90◦ to ∆A′B′C′?

Reading Check:

1. True or false: A rotation is always in the counterclockwise direction.

2. On the coordinate plane below, create a point anywhere you like, and label it P.

Then draw a second point W that is the image of point P rotated 180◦.

3. On the coordinate plane above, draw a third point R that is the image of your original point P rotated

90◦.

97 www.ck12.org

4. Is a 90◦ rotation an isometry? Explain.

5. Is a 180◦ rotation an isometry? Explain.

6. What type of rotation is the same as a reflection in the origin?

www.ck12.org 98

Chapter 3

Triangles and Congruence

In this chapter, you will learn all about triangles. First, we will find out how many degrees are in a triangle

and other properties of the angles within a triangle. Second, we will use that information to determine if

two different triangles are congruent. Finally, we will investigate the properties of isosceles and equilateral

triangles.

3.1 Triangle Sums

Learning Objectives

• Understand the Triangle Sum Theorem.

• Identify interior and exterior angles in a triangle.

• Use the Exterior Angle Theorem.

Review Queue

Classify the triangles below by their angles and sides.

1.

2.

3.

4. Draw and label a straight angle, ∠ABC. Which point is the vertex? How many degrees does a straight

angle have?

Know What? To the right is the Bermuda Triangle. The myth of this triangle is that ships and planes

have passed through and mysteriously disappeared.

99 www.ck12.org

The measurements of the sides of the triangle are in the picture. Classify the Bermuda triangle by its sides

and angles. Then, using a protractor, find the measure of each angle. What do they add up to?

Recall that a triangle can be classified by its sides...

and its angles...

Interior Angles: The angles inside of a polygon.

Vertex: The point where the sides of a polygon meet.

Triangles have three interior angles, three vertices, and three sides.

A triangle is labeled by its vertices with a 4. This triangle can be labeled 4ABC, 4ACB, 4BCA, 4BAC, 4CBA

or 4CAB.

Triangle Sum Theorem The interior angles in a polygon are measured in degrees. How many degrees

are there in a triangle?

Investigation 4-1: Triangle Tear-Up

www.ck12.org 100

Tools Needed: paper, ruler, pencil, colored pencils

1. Draw a triangle on a piece of paper. Make all three angles different sizes. Color the three interior

angles three different colors and label each one, ∠1, ∠2, and ∠3.

2. Tear off the three colored angles, so you have three separate angles.

3. Line up the angles so the vertices points all match up. What happens? What measure do the three

angles add up to?

This investigation shows us that the sum of the angles in a triangle is 180◦ because the three angles fit

together to form a straight angle where all the vertices meet.

Triangle Sum Theorem: The interior angles of a triangle add up to 180◦.

m∠1 + m∠2 + m∠3 = 180◦

Example 1: What m∠T?

Solution: Set up an equation.

m∠M + m∠A + m∠T = 180◦

82◦ + 27◦ + m∠T = 180◦

109◦ + m∠T = 180◦

m∠T = 71◦

Even thought Investigation 4-1 is a way to show that the angles in a triangle add up to 180◦, it is not a

proof. Here is the proof of the Triangle Sum Theorem.

101 www.ck12.org

Given: 4ABC with ←→AD||BC

Prove: m∠1 + m∠2 + m∠3 = 180◦

Table 3.1:

Statement Reason

1. 4ABC above with ←→AD||BC Given

2. ∠1 ∠4, ∠2 ∠5 Alternate Interior Angles Theorem

3. m∠1 = m∠4, m∠2 = m∠5 angles have = measures

4. m∠4 + m∠CAD = 180◦ Linear Pair Postulate

5. m∠3 + m∠5 = m∠CAD Angle Addition Postulate

6. m∠4 + m∠3 + m∠5 = 180◦ Substitution PoE

7. m∠1 + m∠3 + m∠2 = 180◦ Substitution PoE

Example 2: What is the measure of each angle in an equiangular triangle?

Solution: 4ABC is an equiangular triangle, where all three angles are equal. Write an equation.

m∠A + m∠B + m∠C = 180◦

m∠A + m∠A + m∠A = 180◦ S ubstitute, all angles are equal.

3m∠A = 180◦ Combine like terms.

m∠A = 60◦

If m∠A = 60◦, then m∠B = 60◦ and m∠C = 60◦.

Each angle in an equiangular triangle is 60◦.

Example 3: Find the measure of the missing angle.

Solution: m∠O = 41◦ and m∠G = 90◦ because it is a right angle.

www.ck12.org 102

m∠D + m∠O + m∠G = 180◦

m∠D + 41◦ + 90◦ = 180◦

m∠D + 41◦ = 90◦

m∠D = 49◦

Notice that m∠D + m∠O = 90◦.

The acute angles in a right triangle are always complementary.

Exterior Angles

Exterior Angle: The angle formed by one side of a polygon and the extension of the adjacent side.

In all polygons, there are two sets of exterior angles, one that goes around clockwise and the other goes

around counterclockwise.

Notice that the interior angle and its adjacent exterior angle form a linear pair and add up to 180◦.

m∠1 + m∠2 = 180◦

Example 4: Find the measure of ∠RQS .

Solution: 112◦ is an exterior angle of 4RQS and is supplementary to ∠RQS .

112◦ + m∠RQS = 180◦

m∠RQS = 68◦

Example 5: Find the measure of the numbered interior and exterior angles in the triangle.

103 www.ck12.org

Solution: m∠1 + 92◦ = 180◦ by the Linear Pair Postulate. m∠1 = 88◦

m∠2 + 123◦ = 180◦ by the Linear Pair Postulate. m∠2 = 57◦

m∠1 + m∠2 + m∠3 = 180◦ by the Triangle Sum Theorem.

88◦ + 57◦ + m∠3 = 180

m∠3 = 35◦

Lastly, m∠3 + m∠4 = 180◦ by the Linear Pair Postulate.

35◦ + m∠4 = 180◦

m∠4 = 145◦

In Example 5, the exterior angles are 92◦, 123◦, and 145◦. Adding these angles together, we get 92◦ +

123◦ + 145◦ = 360◦. This is true for any set of exterior angles for any polygon.

Exterior Angle Sum Theorem: The exterior angles of a polygon add up to 360◦.

m∠1 + m∠2 + m∠3 = 360◦

m∠4 + m∠5 + m∠6 = 360◦

Example 6: What is the value of p in the triangle below?

Solution: First, we need to find the missing exterior angle, let’s call it x. Set up an equation using the

Exterior Angle Sum Theorem.

130◦ + 110◦ + x = 360◦

x = 360◦ − 130◦ − 110◦

x = 120◦

www.ck12.org 104

x and p add up to 180◦ because they are a linear pair.

x + p = 180◦

120◦ + p = 180◦

p = 60◦

Example 7: Find m∠A.

Solution:

m∠ACB + 115◦ = 180◦ because they are a linear pair

m∠ACB = 65◦

m∠A + 65◦ + 79◦ = 180◦ by the Triangle Sum Theorem

m∠A = 36◦

Remote Interior Angles: The two angles in a triangle that are not adjacent to the indicated exterior

angle.

In Example 7 above, ∠A and 79◦ are the remote interior angles relative to 115◦.

Exterior Angle Theorem From Example 7, we can find the sum of m∠A and m∠B, which is 36◦ + 79◦ =

115◦. This is equal to the exterior angle at C.

Exterior Angle Theorem: The sum of the remote interior angles is equal to the non-adjacent exterior

angle.

m∠A + m∠B = m∠ACD

Proof of the Exterior Angle Theorem

Given: Triangle with exterior ∠4

Prove: m∠1 + m∠2 = m∠4

105 www.ck12.org

Table 3.2:

Statement Reason

1. Triangle with exterior ∠4 Given

2. m∠1 + m∠2 + m∠3 = 180◦ Triangle Sum Theorem

3. m∠3 + m∠4 = 180◦ Linear Pair Postulate

4. m∠1 + m∠2 + m∠3 = m∠3 + m∠4 Transitive PoE

5. m∠1 + m∠2 = m∠4 Subtraction PoE

Example 8: Find m∠C.

Solution: Using the Exterior Angle Theorem

m∠C + 16◦ = 121◦

m∠TCA = 105◦

If you forget the Exterior Angle Theorem, you can do this problem just like Example 7.

Example 9: Algebra Connection Find the value of x and the measure of each angle.

Solution: All the angles add up to 180◦.

(8x − 1)◦ + (3x + 9)◦ + (3x + 4)◦ = 180◦

(14x + 12)◦ = 180◦

14x = 168◦

x = 12◦

Substitute in 12◦ for x to find each angle.

3(12◦) + 9◦ = 45◦ 3(12◦) + 4◦ = 40◦ 8(12◦) − 1◦ = 95◦

Example 10: Algebra Connection Find the value of x and the measure of each angle.

www.ck12.org 106

Solution: Set up an equation using the Exterior Angle Theorem.

(4x + 2)◦ + (2x − 9)◦ = (5x + 13)◦

↑ ↗ ↑

interior angles exterior angle

(6x − 7)◦ = (5x + 13)◦

x = 20◦

Substitute in 20◦ for x to find each angle.

4(20◦) + 2◦ = 82◦ 2(20◦) − 9◦ = 31◦ Exterior angle: 5(20◦) + 13◦ = 113◦

Know What? Revisited The Bermuda Triangle is an acute scalene triangle. The actual angle measures

are in the picture to the right. Your measured angles should be within a degree or two of these measures

and should add up to 180◦. However, because your measures are estimates using a protractor, they might

not exactly add up.

Review Questions

• Questions 1-16 are similar to Examples 1-8.

• Questions 17 and 18 use the definition of an Exterior Angle and the Exterior Angle Sum Theorem.

• Question 19 is similar to Example 3.

• Questions 20-27 are similar to Examples 9 and 10.

Determine m∠1.

1.

2.

107 www.ck12.org

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

www.ck12.org 108

13.

14.

15.

16. Find the lettered angles, a − f , in the picture to the right. Note that the two lines are parallel.

17. Draw both sets of exterior angles on the same triangle.

(a) What is m∠1 + m∠2 + m∠3?

(b) What is m∠4 + m∠5 + m∠6?

(c) What is m∠7 + m∠8 + m∠9?

(d) List all pairs of congruent angles.

18. Fill in the blanks in the proof below.

Given: The triangle to the right with interior angles and exterior angles.

Prove: m∠4 + m∠5 + m∠6 = 360◦

109 www.ck12.org

Table 3.3:

Statement Reason

1. Triangle with interior and exterior angles. Given

2. m∠1 + m∠2 + m∠3 = 180◦

3. ∠3 and ∠4 are a linear pair, ∠2 and ∠5 are a

linear pair, and ∠1 and ∠6 are a linear pair

4. Linear Pair Postulate (do all 3)

5. m∠1 + m∠6 = 180◦

m∠2 + m∠5 = 180◦

m∠3 + m∠4 = 180◦

6. m∠1 + m∠6 + m∠2 + m∠5 + m∠3 + m∠4 = 540◦

7. m∠4 + m∠5 + m∠6 = 360◦

19. Fill in the blanks in the proof below.

Given: 4ABC with right angle B.

Prove: ∠A and ∠C are complementary.

Table 3.4:

Statement Reason

1. 4ABC with right angle B. Given

2. Definition of a right angle

3. m∠A + m∠B + m∠C = 180◦

4. m∠A + 90◦ + m∠C = 180◦

5.

6. ∠A and ∠C are complementary

Algebra Connection Solve for x.

www.ck12.org 110

20.

21.

22.

23.

24.

25.

26.

27.

Review Queue Answers

1. acute isosceles

2. obtuse scalene

3. right scalene

4. B is the vertex, 180◦,

111 www.ck12.org

3.2 Congruent Figures

Learning Objectives

• Define congruent triangles and use congruence statements.

• Understand the Third Angle Theorem.

Review Queue

What part of each pair of triangles are congruent? Write out each congruence statement for the marked

congruent sides and angles.

1.

2.

3. Determine the measure of x.

(a)

(b) What is the measure of each angle?

(c) What type of triangle is this?

Know What? Quilt patterns are very geometrical. The pattern to the right is made up of several

congruent figures. In order for these patterns to come together, the quilter rotates and flips each block (in

this case, a large triangle, smaller triangle, and a smaller square) to get new patterns and arrangements.

How many different sets of colored congruent triangles are there? How many triangles are in each set?

How do you know these triangles are congruent?

www.ck12.org 112

Congruent Triangles

Two figures are congruent if they have exactly the same size and shape.

Congruent Triangles: Two triangles are congruent if the three corresponding angles and sides are

congruent.

4ABC and 4DEF are congruent because

AB DE ∠A ∠D

BC EF and ∠B ∠E

AC DF ∠C ∠F

When referring to corresponding congruent parts of congruent triangles it is called Corresponding Parts

of Congruent Triangles are Congruent, or CPCTC.

Example 1: Are the two triangles below congruent?

Solution: To determine if the triangles are congruent, match up sides with the same number of tic marks:

BC MN, AB LM, AC LN.

113 www.ck12.org

Next match up the angles with the same markings:

∠A ∠L, ∠B ∠M, and ∠C ∠N.

Lastly, we need to make sure these are corresponding parts. To do this, check to see if the congruent angles

are opposite congruent sides. Here, ∠A is opposite BC and ∠L is opposite MN. Because ∠A ∠L and

BC MN, they are corresponding. Doing this check for the other sides and angles, we see that everything

matches up and the two triangles are congruent.

Creating Congruence Statements

In Example 1, we determined that 4ABC and 4LMN are congruent. When stating that two triangles are

congruent, the corresponding parts must be written in the same order. Using Example 1, we would have:

Notice that the congruent sides also line up within the congruence statement.

AB LM, BC MN, AC LN

We can also write this congruence statement five other ways, as long as the congruent angles match up.

For example, we can also write 4ABC 4LMN as:

4ACB 4LNM 4BCA 4MNL 4BAC 4MLN

4CBA 4NML 4CAB 4NLM

Example 2: Write a congruence statement for the two triangles below.

Solution: Line up the corresponding angles in the triangles:

∠R ∠F, ∠S ∠E, and ∠T ∠D.

4RST ∠FED

Example 3: If 4CAT 4DOG, what else do you know?

Solution: From this congruence statement, we know three pairs of angles and three pairs of sides are

congruent.

www.ck12.org 114

Third Angle Theorem

Example 4: Find m∠C and m∠J.

Solution: The sum of the angles in a triangle is 180◦.

4ABC : 35◦ + 88◦ + m∠C = 180◦

m∠C = 57◦

4HIJ : 35◦ + 88◦ + m∠J = 180◦

m∠J = 57◦

Notice we were given m∠A = m∠H and m∠B = m∠I and we found out m∠C = m∠J. This can be generalized

into the Third Angle Theorem.

Third Angle Theorem: If two angles in one triangle are congruent to two angles in another triangle,

then the third pair of angles must also congruent.

If ∠A ∠D and ∠B ∠E, then ∠C ∠F.

Example 5: Determine the measure of the missing angles.

Solution: From the Third Angle Theorem, we know ∠C ∠F.

m∠A + m∠B + m∠C = 180◦

m∠D + m∠B + m∠C = 180◦

42◦ + 83◦ + m∠C = 180◦

m∠C = 55◦ = m∠F

Congruence Properties Recall the Properties of Congruence from Chapter 2. They will be very useful

in the upcoming sections.

115 www.ck12.org

Reflexive Property of Congruence: AB AB or 4ABC 4ABC

Symmetric Property of Congruence: ∠EFG ∠XYZ and ∠XYZ ∠EFG

4ABC 4DEF and 4DEF 4ABC

Transitive Property of Congruence: 4ABC 4DEF and 4DEF 4GHI then

4ABC 4GHI

These three properties will be very important when you begin to prove that two triangles are congruent.

Example 6: In order to say that 4ABD 4ABC, you must show the three corresponding angles and sides

are congruent. Which pair of sides is congruent by the Reflexive Property?

Solution: The side AB is shared by both triangles. In a geometric proof, AB AB by the Reflexive

Property.

Know What? Revisited The 16 “A” triangles are congruent. The 16 “B” triangles are also congruent.

The quilt pattern is made from dividing up the entire square into smaller squares. Both the “A” and “B”

triangles are right triangles.

Review Questions

• Questions 1 and 2 are similar to Example 3.

• Questions 3-12 are a review and use the definitions and theorems explained in this section.

• Questions 13-17 are similar to Example 1 and 2.

• Question 18 the definitions and theorems explained in this section.

• Questions 19-22 are similar to Examples 4 and 5.

• Question 23 is a proof of the Third Angle Theorem.

• Questions 24-28 are similar to Example 6.

• Questions 29 and 30 are investigations using congruent triangles, a ruler and a protractor.

1. If 4RAT 4UGH, what is also congruent?

2. If 4BIG 4TOP, what is also congruent?

www.ck12.org 116

For questions 3-7, use the picture to the right.

3. What theorem tells us that ∠FGH ∠FGI?

4. What is m∠FGI and m∠FGH? How do you know?

5. What property tells us that the third side of each triangle is congruent?

6. How does FG relate to ∠IFH?

7. Write the congruence statement for these two triangles.

For questions 8-12, use the picture to the right.

8. AB||DE, what angles are congruent? How do you know?

9. Why is ∠ACB ∠ECD? It is not the same reason as #8.

10. Are the two triangles congruent with the information you currently have? Why or why not?

11. If you are told that C is the midpoint of AE and BD, what segments are congruent?

12. Write a congruence statement.

For questions 13-16, determine if the triangles are congruent. If they are, write the congruence statement.

13.

14.

15.

117 www.ck12.org

16.

17. Suppose the two triangles to the right are congruent. Write a congruence statement for these triangles.

18. Explain how we know that if the two triangles are congruent, then ∠B ∠Z.

For questions 19-22, determine the measure of all the angles in the each triangle.

19.

20.

21.

22.

23. Fill in the blanks in the Third Angle Theorem proof below.

Given: ∠A ∠D, ∠B ∠E

Prove: ∠C ∠F

www.ck12.org 118

Table 3.5:

Statement Reason

1. ∠A ∠D, ∠B ∠E

2. angles have = measures

3. m∠A + m∠B + m∠C = 180◦

m∠D + m∠E + m∠F = 180◦

4. Substitution PoE

5. Substitution PoE

6. m∠C = m∠F

7. ∠C ∠F

For each of the following questions, determine if the Reflexive, Symmetric or Transitive Properties of

Congruence is used.

24. ∠A ∠B and ∠B ∠C, then ∠A ∠C

25. AB AB

26. 4XYZ 4LMN and 4LMN 4XYZ

27. 4ABC 4BAC

28. What type of triangle is 4ABC in #27? How do you know?

Review Queue Answers

1. ∠B ∠H, AB GH, BC HI

2. ∠C ∠M, BC LM

3. The angles add up to 180◦

(a) (5x + 2)◦ + (4x + 3)◦ + (3x − 5)◦ = 180◦

12x = 180◦

x = 15◦

(b) 77◦, 63◦, 40◦

(c) acute scalene

3.3 Triangle Congruence using SSS and SAS

Learning Objectives

• Use the distance formula to analyze triangles on the x − y plane.

• Apply the SSS and SAS Postulate to show two triangles are congruent.

119 www.ck12.org

Review Queue

1. Use the distance formula,

√

(x2 − x1)2 + (y2 − y1)2 to find the distance between the two points.

(a) (-1, 5) and (4, 12)

(b) (-6, -15) and (-3, 8)

2.

(a) If we know that AB||CD, AD||BC, what angles are congruent? By which theorem?

(b) Which side is congruent by the Reflexive Property?

(c) Is this enough to say 4ADC 4CBA?

3.

(a) If we know that B is the midpoint of AC and DE, what segments are congruent?

(b) Are there any angles that are congruent by looking at the picture? Which ones and why?

(c) Is this enough to say 4ABE 4CBD?

Know What?

The “ideal” measurements in a kitchen from the sink, refrigerator and oven are as close to an equilateral

triangle as possible. Your parents are remodeling theirs to be as close to this as possible and the measure-

ments are in the picture at the left, below. Your neighbor’s kitchen has the measurements on the right.

Are the two triangles congruent? Why or why not?

SSS Postulate of Triangle Congruence

Consider the question: If I have three lengths: 3 in, 4 in, and 5 in, can I construct more than one triangle?

Investigation 4-2: Constructing a Triangle Given Three Sides

Tools Needed: compass, pencil, ruler, and paper

1. Draw the longest side (5 in) horizontally, halfway down the page.

www.ck12.org 120

The drawings in this investigation are to scale.

2. Take the compass and, using the ruler, widen the compass to measure 4 in, the second side.

3. Using the measurement from Step 2, place the pointer of the compass on the left endpoint of the side

drawn in Step 1. Draw an arc mark above the line segment.

4. Repeat Step 2 with the third measurement, 3 in. Then, like Step 3, place the pointer of the compass

on the right endpoint of the side drawn in Step 1. Draw an arc mark above the line segment. Make sure

it intersects the arc mark drawn in Step 3.

5. Draw lines from each endpoint to the arc intersections. These segments are the other two sides of the

triangle.

An animation of this construction can be found at: http://www.mathsisfun.com/geometry/construct-ruler-compass-1.

html

Can another triangle be drawn with these measurements that look different? NO. Only one triangle

can be created from any given three lengths. You can rotate, flip, or move this triangle but

it will still be the same size.

Side-Side-Side (SSS) Triangle Congruence Postulate: If 3 sides in one triangle are congruent to 3

sides in another triangle, then the triangles are congruent.

121 www.ck12.org

BC YZ, AB XY, and AC XZ then 4ABC 4XYZ.

The SSS Postulate is a shortcut. Before, you had to show 3 sides and 3 angles in one triangle were

congruent to 3 sides and 3 angles in another triangle. Now you only have to show 3 sides in one triangle

are congruent to 3 sides in another.

Example 1: Write a triangle congruence statement based on the picture below:

Solution: From the tic marks, we know AB LM, AC LK, BC MK. From the SSS Postulate, the

triangles are congruent. Lining up the corresponding sides, we have 4ABC 4LMK.

Don’t forget ORDER MATTERS when writing congruence statements. Line up the sides with the same

number of tic marks.

Example 2: Write a two-column proof to show that the two triangles are congruent.

Given: AB DE

C is the midpoint of AE and DB.

Prove: 4ACB 4ECD

Solution:

Table 3.6:

Statement Reason

1. AB DE

C is the midpoint of AE and DB

Given

2. AC CE, BC CD Definition of a midpoint

3. 4ACB 4ECD SSS Postulate

Prove Move: You must clearly state the three sets of sides are congruent BEFORE stating the triangles

are congruent.

Prove Move: Mark the picture with the information you are given as well as information that you see in

www.ck12.org 122

the picture (vertical angles, information from parallel lines, midpoints, angle bisectors, right angles). This

information may be used in a proof.

SAS Triangle Congruence Postulate

SAS refers to Side-Angle-Side. The placement of the word Angle is important because it indicates that

the angle you are given is between the two sides.

Included Angle: When an angle is between two given sides of a polygon.

∠B would be the included angle for sides AB and BC.

Consider the question: If I have two sides of length 2 in and 5 in and the angle between them is 45◦, can I

construct one triangle?

Investigation 4-3: Constructing a Triangle Given Two Sides and Included Angle

Tools Needed: protractor, pencil, ruler, and paper

1. Draw the longest side (5 in) horizontally, halfway down the page.

The drawings in this investigation are to scale.

2. At the left endpoint of your line segment, use the protractor to measure a 45◦ angle. Mark this

measurement.

3. Connect your mark from Step 2 with the left endpoint. Make your line 2 in long, the length of the

second side.

4. Connect the two endpoints to draw the third side.

Can you draw another triangle, with these measurements that looks different? NO. Only one triangle

can be created from any two lengths and the INCLUDED angle.

123 www.ck12.org

Side-Angle-Side (SAS) Triangle Congruence Postulate: If two sides and the included angle in one

triangle are congruent to two sides and the included angle in another triangle, then the two triangles are

congruent.

AC XZ, BC YZ, and ∠C ∠Z, then 4ABC 4XYZ.

Example 3: What additional piece of information do you need to show that these two triangles are

congruent using the SAS Postulate?

a) ∠ABC ∠LKM

b) AB LK

c) BC KM

d) ∠BAC ∠KLM

Solution: For the SAS Postulate, you need the side on the other side of the angle. In 4ABC, that is BC

and in 4LKM that is KM. The answer is c.

Example 4: Write a two-column proof to show that the two triangles are congruent.

Given: C is the midpoint of AE and DB

Prove: 4ACB 4ECD

Solution:

Table 3.7:

Statement Reason

1. C is the midpoint of AE and DB Given

2. AC CE, BC CD Definition of a midpoint

3. ∠ACB ∠DCE Vertical Angles Postulate

4. 4ACB 4ECD SAS Postulate

www.ck12.org 124

SSS in the Coordinate Plane

The only way we will show two triangles are congruent in an x− y plane is using SSS. To do this, you need

to use the distance formula.

Example 5: Find the distances of all the line segments from both triangles to see if the two triangles are

congruent.

Solution: Begin with 4ABC and its sides.

AB =

√

(−6 − (−2))2 + (5 − 10)2

=

√

(−4)2 + (−5)2

=

√

16 + 25

=

√

41

BC =

√

(−2 − (−3))2 + (10 − 3)2

=

√

(1)2 + (7)2

=

√

1 + 49

=

√

50 = 5

√

2

AC =

√

(−6 − (−3))2 + (5 − 3)2

=

√

(−3)2 + (2)2

=

√

9 + 4

=

√

13

Now, find the distances of all the sides in 4DEF.

DE =

√

(1 − 5)2 + (−3 − 2)2

=

√

(−4)2 + (−5)2

=

√

16 + 25

=

√

41

125 www.ck12.org

EF =

√

(5 − 4)2 + (2 − (−5))2

=

√

(1)2 + (7)2

=

√

1 + 49

=

√

50 = 5

√

2

DF =

√

(1 − 4)2 + (−3 − (−5))2

=

√

(−3)2 + (2)2

=

√

9 + 4

=

√

13

AB = DE, BC = EF, and AC = DF, so two triangles are congruent by SSS.

Example 6: Determine if the two triangles are congruent.

Solution: Start with 4ABC.

AB =

√

(−2 − (−8))2 + (−2 − (−6))2

=

√

(6)2 + (4)2

=

√

36 + 16

=

√

52 = 2

√

13

BC =

√

(−8 − (−6))2 + (−6 − (−9))2

=

√

(−2)2 + (3)2

=

√

4 + 9

=

√

13

AC =

√

(−2 − (−6))2 + (−2 − (−9))2

=

√

(4)2 + (7)2

=

√

16 + 49

=

√

65

www.ck12.org 126

Now find the sides of 4DEF.

DE =

√

(3 − 6)2 + (9 − 4)2

=

√

(−3)2 + (5)2

=

√

9 + 25

=

√

34

EF =

√

(6 − 10)2 + (4 − 7)2

=

√

(−4)2 + (−3)2

=

√

16 + 9

=

√

25 = 5

DF =

√

(3 − 10)2 + (9 − 7)2

=

√

(−7)2 + (2)2

=

√

49 + 4

=

√

53

No sides have equal measures, so the triangles are not congruent.

Know What? Revisited From what we have learned in this section, the two triangles are not congruent

because the distance from the fridge to the stove in your house is 4 feet and in your neighbor’s it is 4.5

ft. The SSS Postulate tells us that all three sides have to be congruent in order for the triangles to be

congruent.

Review Questions

• Questions 1-10 are similar to Example 1.

• Questions 11-16 are similar to Example 3.

• Questions 17-23 are similar to Examples 2 and 4.

• Questions 24-27 are similar to Examples 5 and 6.

Are the pairs of triangles congruent? If so, write the congruence statement and why.

1.

2.

127 www.ck12.org

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

State the additional piece of information needed to show that each pair of triangles is congruent.

11. Use SAS

www.ck12.org 128

12. Use SSS

13. Use SAS

14. Use SAS

15. Use SSS

16. Use SAS

Fill in the blanks in the proofs below.

17. Given: AB DC, BE CE

Prove: 4ABE 4ACE

129 www.ck12.org

Table 3.8:

Statement Reason

1. 1.

2. ∠AEB ∠DEC 2.

3. 4ABE 4ACE 3.

18. Given: AB DC, AC DB

Prove: 4ABC 4DCB

Table 3.9:

Statement Reason

1. 1.

2. 2. Reflexive PoC

3. 4ABC 4DCB 3.

19. Given: B is a midpoint of DC

AB ⊥ DC

Prove: 4ABD 4ABC

Table 3.10:

Statement Reason

1. B is a midpoint of DC, AB ⊥ DC 1.

2. 2. Definition of a midpoint

3. ∠ABD and ∠ABC are right angles 3.

www.ck12.org 130

Table 3.10: (continued)

Statement Reason

4. 4. All right angles are

5. 5.

6. 4ABD 4ABC 6.

20. Given: AB is an angle bisector of ∠DAC

AD AC

Prove: 4ABD 4ABC

Table 3.11:

Statement Reason

1.

2. ∠DAB ∠BAC

3. Reflexive PoC

4. 4ABD 4ABC

21. Given: B is the midpoint of DC

AD AC

Prove: 4ABD 4ABC

Table 3.12:

Statement Reason

1.

2. Definition of a Midpoint

3. Reflexive PoC

4. 4ABD 4ABC

22. Given: B is the midpoint of DE and AC

∠ABE is a right angle

131 www.ck12.org

Prove: 4ABE 4CBD

Table 3.13:

Statement Reason

1. Given

2. DB BE, AB BC

3. Definition of a Right Angle

4. Vertical Angle Theorem

5. 4ABE 4CBD

23. Given: DB is the angle bisector of ∠ADC

AD DC

Prove: 4ABD 4CBD

Table 3.14:

Statement Reason

1.

2. ∠ADB ∠BDC

3.

4. 4ABD 4CBD

Find the lengths of the sides of each triangle to see if the two triangles are congruent. Leave your answers

under the radical.

www.ck12.org 132

24.

25.

26. 4ABC : A(−1, 5), B(−4, 2), C(2,−2) and 4DEF : D(7,−5), E(4, 2), F(8,−9)

27. 4ABC : A(−8,−3), B(−2,−4), C(−5,−9) and 4DEF : D(−7, 2), E(−1, 3), F(−4, 8)

Review Queue Answers

1. (a)

√

74

(b)

√

538

2. (a) ∠BAC ∠DCA, ∠DAC ∠BCA by the Alternate Interior Angles Theorem.

(b) AC AC

(c) Not yet, this would be ASA.

3. (a) DB BE, AB BC

(b) ∠DBC ∠ABE by the Vertical Angles Theorem.

(c) By the end of this section, yes, we will be able to show that these two triangles are congruent

by SAS.

3.4 Triangle Congruence using ASA, AAS, and

HL

Learning Objectives

• Use and understand the ASA, AAS, and HL Congruence Postulate.

• Complete two-column proofs using SSS, SAS, ASA and AAS.

133 www.ck12.org

Review Queue

1.

(a) What sides are marked congruent?

(b) Is third side congruent? Why?

(c) Write the congruence statement for the two triangles. Why are they congruent?

2.

(a) From the parallel lines, what angles are congruent?

(b) How do you know the third angle is congruent?

(c) Are any sides congruent? How do you know?

(d) Are the two triangles congruent? Why or why not?

3. If 4DEF 4PQR, can it be assumed that:

(a) ∠F ∠R? Why or why not?

(b) EF PR? Why or why not?

Know What? Your parents changed their minds at the last second about their kitchen layout. Now, the

measurements are in the triangle on the left, below. Your neighbor’s kitchen is in blue on the right. Are

the kitchen triangles congruent now?

ASA Congruence

ASA refers to Angle-Side-Angle. The placement of the word Side is important because it indicates that

the side that you are given is between the two angles.

Consider the question: If I have two angles that are 45◦ and 60◦ and the side between them is 5 in, can I

construct only one triangle?

Investigation 4-4: Constructing a Triangle Given Two Angles and Included Side

www.ck12.org 134

Tools Needed: protractor, pencil, ruler, and paper

1. Draw the side (5 in) horizontally, about halfway down the page.

The drawings in this investigation are to scale.

2. At the left endpoint of your line segment, use the protractor to measure the 45◦ angle. Mark this

measurement and draw a ray from the left endpoint through the 45◦ mark.

3. At the right endpoint of your line segment, use the protractor to measure the 60◦ angle. Mark this

measurement and draw a ray from the left endpoint through the 60◦ mark. Extend this ray so that it

crosses through the ray from Step 2.

4. Erase the extra parts of the rays from Steps 2 and 3 to leave only the triangle.

Can you draw another triangle, with these measurements that looks different? NO. Only one triangle

can be created from any given two angle measures and the INCLUDED side.

Angle-Side-Angle (ASA) Congruence Postulate: If two angles and the included side in one triangle

are congruent to two angles and the included side in another triangle, then the two triangles are congruent.

∠A ∠X, ∠B ∠Y, and AB XY, then 4ABC 4XYZ.

Example 1: What information do you need to prove that these two triangles are congruent using the

ASA Postulate?

a) AB UT

b) AC UV

c) BC TV

d) ∠B ∠T

135 www.ck12.org

Solution: For ASA, we need the side between the two given angles, which is AC and UV. The answer is

b.

Example 2: Write a 2-column proof.

Given: ∠C ∠E, AC AE

Prove: 4ACF 4AEB

Solution:

Table 3.15:

Statement Reason

1. ∠C ∠E, AC AE Given

2. ∠A ∠A Reflexive PoC

3. 4ACF 4AEB ASA

AAS Congruence

A variation on ASA is AAS, which is Angle-Angle-Side. For ASA you need two angles and the side between

them. But, if you know two pairs of angles are congruent, the third pair will also be congruent by the 3rd

Angle Theorem. This means you can prove two triangles are congruent when you have any two pairs of

corresponding angles and a pair of sides.

ASA

AAS

Angle-Angle-Side (AAS) Congruence Theorem: If two angles and a non-included side in one triangle

are congruent to two angles and a non-included side in another triangle, then the triangles are congruent.

www.ck12.org 136

Proof of AAS Theorem

Given: ∠A ∠Y, ∠B ∠Z, AC XY

Prove: 4ABC 4YZX

Table 3.16:

Statement Reason

1. ∠A ∠Y, ∠B ∠Z, AC XY Given

2. ∠C ∠X 3rd Angle Theorem

3. 4ABC 4YZX ASA

By proving 4ABC 4YZX with ASA, we have also proved that the AAS Theorem is true.

Example 3: What information do you need to prove that these two triangles are congruent using:

a) ASA?

b) AAS?

c) SAS?

Solution:

a) For ASA, we need the angles on the other side of EF and QR. ∠F ∠Q

b) For AAS, we would need the other angle. ∠G ∠P

c) For SAS, we need the side on the other side of ∠E and ∠R. EG RP

Example 4: Can you prove that the following triangles are congruent? Why or why not?

137 www.ck12.org

Solution: We cannot show the triangles are congruent because KL and ST are not corresponding, even

though they are congruent. To determine if KL and ST are corresponding, look at the angles around them,

∠K and ∠L and ∠S and ∠T . ∠K has one arc and ∠L is unmarked. ∠S has two arcs and ∠T is unmarked. In

order to use AAS, ∠S needs to be congruent to ∠K.

Example 5: Write a 2-column proof.

Given: BD is an angle bisector of ∠CDA, ∠C ∠A

Prove: 4CBD ∠ABD

Solution:

Table 3.17:

Statement Reason

1. BD is an angle bisector of ∠CDA, ∠C ∠A Given

2. ∠CDB ∠ADB Definition of an Angle Bisector

3. DB DB Reflexive PoC

4. 4CBD 4ABD AAS

Hypotenuse-Leg

So far, the congruence postulates we have used will work for any triangle. The last congruence theorem

can only be used on right triangles. A right triangle has exactly one right angle. The two sides adjacent

to the right angle are called legs and the side opposite the right angle is called the hypotenuse.

You may or may not know the Pythagorean Theorem, which says, for any right triangle, this equation is

true:

(leg)2 + (leg)2 = (hypotenuse)2

What this means is that if you are given two sides of a right triangle, you can always find the third.

Therefore, if you have two sides of a right triangle are congruent to two sides of another right triangle; you

can conclude that third sides are also congruent.

The Hypotenuse-Leg (HL) Congruence Theorem is a shortcut of this process.

www.ck12.org 138

HL Congruence Theorem: If the hypotenuse and leg in one right triangle are congruent to the hy-

potenuse and leg in another right triangle, then the two triangles are congruent.

4ABC and 4XYZ are both right triangles and AB XY and BC YZ then 4ABC 4XYZ.

Example 6: What information would you need to prove that these two triangles were congruent using

the:

a) HL Theorem?

b) SAS Theorem?

Solution:

a) For HL, you need the hypotenuses to be congruent. AC MN.

b) To use SAS, we would need the other legs to be congruent. AB ML.

AAA and SSA Relationships There are two other side-angle relationships that we have not discussed:

AAA and SSA.

AAA implies that all the angles are congruent.

As you can see, 4ABC and 4PRQ are not congruent, even though all the angles are.

SSA relationships do not prove congruence either. See 4ABC and 4DEF below.

Because ∠B and ∠D are not the included angles between the congruent sides, we cannot prove that these

two triangles are congruent.

139 www.ck12.org

Recap

Table 3.18:

Side-Angle Relationship Picture Determine Congruence?

SSS Yes

4ABC 4XYZ

SAS Yes

4ABC 4XYZ

ASA Yes

4ABC 4XYZ

AAS (or SAA) Yes

4ABC 4YZX

HL Yes, Right Triangles Only

4ABC 4XYZ

SSA NO

AAA NO

Example 7: Write a 2-column proof.

www.ck12.org 140

Given: AB||ED, ∠C ∠F, AB ED

Prove: AF CD

Solution:

Table 3.19:

Statement Reason

1. AB||ED, ∠C ∠F, AB ED Given

2. ∠ABE ∠DDB Alternate Interior Angles Theorem

3. 4ABF 4DEC ASA

4. AF CD CPCTC

Prove Move: At the beginning of this chapter we introduced CPCTC. Now, it can be used in a proof

once two triangles are proved congruent. It is used to prove the parts of congruent triangles are congruent.

Know What? Revisited Even though we do not know all of the angle measures in the two triangles,

we can find the missing angles by using the Third Angle Theorem. In your parents’ kitchen, the missing

angle is 39◦. The missing angle in your neighbor’s kitchen is 50◦. From this, we can conclude that the two

kitchens are now congruent, either by ASA or AAS.

Review Questions

• Questions 1-10 are similar to Examples 1, 3, 4, and 6.

• Questions 11-20 are review and use the definitions and theorems explained in this section.

• Question 21-26 are similar to Examples 1, 3, 4 and 6.

• Questions 27 and 28 are similar to Examples 2 and 5.

• Questions 29-31 are similar to Example 4 and Investigation 4-4.

For questions 1-10, determine if the triangles are congruent. If they are, write the congruence statement

and which congruence postulate or theorem you used.

1.

2.

141 www.ck12.org

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

For questions 11-15, use the picture to the right and the given information below.

www.ck12.org 142

Given: DB ⊥ AC, DB is the angle bisector of ∠CDA

11. From DB ⊥ AC, which angles are congruent and why?

12. Because DB is the angle bisector of ∠CDA, what two angles are congruent?

13. From looking at the picture, what additional piece of information are you given? Is this enough to

prove the two triangles are congruent?

14. Write a 2-column proof to prove 4CDB 4ADB, using #11-13.

15. What would be your reason for ∠C ∠A?

For questions 16-20, use the picture to the right and the given information.

Given: LP||NO, LP NO

16. From LP||NO, which angles are congruent and why?

17. From looking at the picture, what additional piece of information can you conclude?

18. Write a 2-column proof to prove 4LMP 4OMN.

19. What would be your reason for LM MO?

20. Fill in the blanks for the proof below. Use the given from above.

Prove: M is the midpoint of PN.

Table 3.20:

Statement Reason

1. LP||NO, LP NO Given

2. Alternate Interior Angles

3. ASA

4. LM MO

5. M is the midpoint of PN.

Determine the additional piece of information needed to show the two triangles are congruent by the given

postulate.

21. AAS

143 www.ck12.org

22. ASA

23. ASA

24. AAS

25. HL

26. SAS

Fill in the blanks in the proofs below.

27. Given: SV ⊥ WU

T is the midpoint of SV and WU

Prove: WS UV

www.ck12.org 144

Table 3.21:

Statement Reason

1.

2. ∠STW and ∠UTV are right angles

3.

4. ST TV , WT TU

5. 4STW 4UTV

6. WS UV

28. Given: ∠K ∠T , EI is the angle bisector of ∠KET

Prove: EI is the angle bisector of ∠KIT

Table 3.22:

Statement Reason

1.

2. Definition of an angle bisector

3. EI EI

4. 4KEI 4TEI

5. ∠KIE ∠T IE

6. EI is the angle bisector of ∠KIT

Construction Let’s see if we can construct two different triangles like 4KLM and 4STU from Example

4.

145 www.ck12.org

29. Look at 4KLM.

(a) If m∠K = 70◦ and m∠M = 60◦, what is m∠L?

(b) If KL = 2 in, construct 4KLM using ∠L, ∠K, KL and Investigation 4-4 (ASA Triangle construc-

tion).

30. Look at 4STU.

(a) If m∠S = 60◦ and m∠U = 70◦, what is m∠T?

(b) If ST = 2 in, construct 4STU using ∠S , ∠T, ST and Investigation 4-4 (ASA Triangle construc-

tion).

31. Are the two triangles congruent?

Review Queue Answers

1. (a) AD DC, AB BC

(b) Yes, by the Reflexive Property

(c) 4DAB 4DCB by SSS

2. (a) ∠L ∠N and ∠M ∠P by the Alternate Interior Angles Theorem

(b) ∠PON ∠LOM by Vertical Angles or the 3rd Angle Theorem

(c) No, no markings or midpoints

(d) No, no congruent sides.

3. (a) Yes, CPCTC

(b) No, these sides do not line up in the congruence statement.

3.5 Isosceles and Equilateral Triangles

Learning Objectives

• Understand the properties of isosceles and equilateral triangles.

• Use the Base Angles Theorem and its converse.

• Understand that an equilateral triangle is also equiangular.

Review Queue

Find the value of x and/or y.

1.

www.ck12.org 146

2.

3.

4. If a triangle is equiangular, what is the measure of each angle?

Know What? Your parents now want to redo the bathroom. To the right are 3 of the tiles they would

like to place in the shower. Each blue and green triangle is an equilateral triangle. What shape is each

dark blue polygon? Find the number of degrees in each of these figures?

Isosceles Triangle Properties

An isosceles triangle is a triangle that has at least two congruent sides. The congruent sides of the isosceles

triangle are called the legs. The other side is called the base. The angles between the base and the legs

are called base angles. The angle made by the two legs is called the vertex angle.

Investigation 4-5: Isosceles Triangle Construction

Tools Needed: pencil, paper, compass, ruler, protractor

1. Refer back to Investigation 4-2. Using your compass and ruler, draw an isosceles triangle with sides of

3 in, 5 in and 5 in. Draw the 3 in side (the base) horizontally at least 6 inches down the page.

147 www.ck12.org

2. Now that you have an isosceles triangle, use your protractor to measure the base angles and the vertex

angle.

The base angles should each be 72.5◦ and the vertex angle should be 35◦.

We can generalize this investigation for all isosceles triangles.

Base Angles Theorem: The base angles of an isosceles triangle are congruent.

For 4DEF, if DE EF, then ∠D ∠F.

To prove the Base Angles Theorem, we need to draw the angle bisector (Investigation 1-5) of ∠E.

Given: Isosceles triangle 4DEF above, with DE EF.

Prove: ∠D ∠F

Table 3.23:

Statement Reason

1. Isosceles triangle 4DEF with DE EF Given

2. Construct angle bisector EG of ∠E Every angle has one angle bisector

3. ∠DEG ∠FEG Definition of an angle bisector

4. EG EG Reflexive PoC

5. 4DEG 4FEG SAS

6. ∠D ∠F CPCTC

Let’s take a further look at the picture from step 2 of our proof.

www.ck12.org 148

Because 4DEG 4FEG, we know ∠EGD ∠EGF by CPCTC. These two angles are also a linear pair, so

90◦ each and EG ⊥ DF.

Additionally, DG GF by CPCTC, so G is the midpoint of DF. This means that EG is the perpendicular

bisector of DF.

Isosceles Triangle Theorem: The angle bisector of the vertex angle in an isosceles triangle is also the

perpendicular bisector of the base.

Note this is ONLY true of the vertex angle. We will prove this theorem in the review questions.

Example 1: Which two angles are congruent?

Solution: This is an isosceles triangle. The congruent angles, are opposite the congruent sides. From the

arrows we see that ∠S ∠U.

Example 2: If an isosceles triangle has base angles with measures of 47◦, what is the measure of the

vertex angle?

Solution: Draw a picture and set up an equation to solve for the vertex angle, v.

47◦ + 47◦ + v = 180◦

v = 180◦ − 47◦ − 47◦

v = 86◦

Example 3: If an isosceles triangle has a vertex angle with a measure of 116◦, what is the measure of

each base angle?

149 www.ck12.org

Solution: Draw a picture and set up and equation to solve for the base angles, b.

116◦ + b + b = 180◦

2b = 64◦

b = 32◦

The converses of the Base Angles Theorem and the Isosceles Triangle Theorem are both true.

Base Angles Theorem Converse: If two angles in a triangle are congruent, then the opposite sides are

also congruent.

For 4DEF, if ∠D ∠F, then DE EF.

Isosceles Triangle Theorem Converse: The perpendicular bisector of the base of an isosceles triangle

is also the angle bisector of the vertex angle.

For isosceles 4DEF, if EG ⊥ DF and DG GF, then ∠DEG ∠FEG.

Equilateral Triangles By definition, all sides in an equilateral triangle have the same length.

Investigation 4-6: Constructing an Equilateral Triangle

Tools Needed: pencil, paper, compass, ruler, protractor

1. Because all the sides of an equilateral triangle are equal, pick one length to be all the sides of the

triangle. Measure this length and draw it horizontally on you paper.

2. Put the pointer of your compass on the left endpoint of the line you drew in Step 1. Open the compass

to be the same width as this line. Make an arc above the line. Repeat Step 2 on the right endpoint.

www.ck12.org 150

4. Connect each endpoint with the arc intersections to make the equilateral triangle.

Use the protractor to measure each angle of your constructed equilateral triangle. What do you notice?

From the Base Angles Theorem, the angles opposite congruent sides in an isosceles triangle are congruent.

So, if all three sides of the triangle are congruent, then all of the angles are congruent, 60◦ each.

Equilateral Triangle Theorem: All equilateral triangles are also equiangular. Also, all equiangular

triangles are also equilateral.

If AB BC AC, then ∠A ∠B ∠C.

If ∠A ∠B ∠C, then AB BC AC.

Example 4: Algebra Connection Find the value of x.

Solution: Because this is an equilateral triangle 3x − 1 = 11. Solve for x.

3x − 1 = 11

3x = 12

x = 4

Example 5: Algebra Connection Find the value of x and the measure of each angle.

151 www.ck12.org

Solution: Similar to Example 4, the two angles are equal, so set them equal to each other and solve for x.

(4x + 12)◦ = (5x − 3)◦

15◦ = x

Substitute x = 15◦; the base angles are 4(15◦) + 12, or 72◦. The vertex angle is 180◦ − 72◦ − 72◦ = 36◦.

Know What? Revisited Let’s focus on one tile. First, these triangles are all equilateral, so this is an

equilateral hexagon (6 sides). Second, we now know that every equilateral triangle is also equiangular, so

every triangle within this tile has 3 60◦ angles. This makes our equilateral hexagon also equiangular, with

each angle measuring 120◦. Because there are 6 angles, the sum of the angles in a hexagon are 6 · 120◦ or

720◦.

Review Questions

• Questions 1-5 are similar to Investigations 4-5 and 4-6.

• Questions 6-14 are similar to Examples 2-5.

• Question 15 uses the definition of an equilateral triangle.

• Questions 16-20 use the definition of an isosceles triangle.

• Question 21 is similar to Examples 2 and 3.

• Questions 22-25 are proofs and use definitions and theorems learned in this section.

• Questions 26-30 use the distance formula.

Constructions For questions 1-5, use your compass and ruler to:

1. Draw an isosceles triangle with sides 3.5 in, 3.5 in, and 6 in.

2. Draw an isosceles triangle that has a vertex angle of 100◦ and legs with length of 4 cm. (you will

also need your protractor for this one)

3. Draw an equilateral triangle with sides of length 7 cm.

4. Using what you know about constructing an equilateral triangle, construct (without a protractor) a

60◦ angle.

5. Draw an isosceles right triangle. What is the measure of the base angles?

For questions 6-14, find the measure of x and/or y.

www.ck12.org 152

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

153 www.ck12.org

14.

15. 4EQG is an equilateral triangle. If EU bisects ∠LEQ, find:

(a) m∠EUL

(b) m∠UEL

(c) m∠ELQ

(d) If EQ = 4, find LU.

Determine if the following statements are true or false.

16. Base angles of an isosceles triangle are congruent.

17. Base angles of an isosceles triangle are complementary.

18. Base angles of an isosceles triangle can be equal to the vertex angle.

19. Base angles of an isosceles triangle can be right angles.

20. Base angles of an isosceles triangle are acute.

21. In the diagram below, l1||l2. Find all of the lettered angles.

Fill in the blanks in the proofs below.

22. Given: Isosceles 4CIS , with base angles ∠C and ∠S

IO is the angle bisector of ∠CIS

Prove: IO is the perpendicular bisector of CS

www.ck12.org 154

Table 3.24:

Statement Reason

1. Given

2. Base Angles Theorem

3. ∠CIO ∠S IO

4. Reflexive PoC

5. 4CIO 4S IO

6. CO OS

7. CPCTC

8. ∠IOC and ∠IOS are supplementary

9. Congruent Supplements Theorem

10. IO is the perpendicular bisector of CS

23. Given: Equilateral 4RST with RT ST RS

Prove: 4RST is equiangular

Table 3.25:

Statement Reason

1. Given

2. Base Angles Theorem

3. Base Angles Theorem

4. Transitive PoC

5. 4RST is equiangular

24. Given: Isosceles 4ICS with ∠C and ∠S

IO is the perpendicular bisector of CS

Prove: IO is the angle bisector of ∠CIS

155 www.ck12.org

Table 3.26:

Statement Reason

1.

2. ∠C ∠S

3. CO OS

4. m∠IOC = m∠IOS = 90◦

5.

6. CPCTC

7. IO is the angle bisector of ∠CIS

25. Given: Isosceles 4ABC with base angles ∠B and ∠C

Isosceles 4XYZ with base angles ∠Y and ∠Z

∠C ∠Z, BC YZ

Prove: 4ABC 4XYZ

Table 3.27:

Statement Reason

1.

2. ∠B ∠C, ∠Y ∠Z

3. ∠B ∠Y

4. 4ABC 4XYZ

Coordinate Plane Geometry On the x − y plane, plot the coordinates and determine if the given three

points make a scalene or isosceles triangle.

26. (-2, 1), (1, -2), (-5, -2)

27. (-2, 5), (2, 4), (0, -1)

28. (6, 9), (12, 3), (3, -6)

29. (-10, -5), (-8, 5), (2, 3)

30. (-1, 2), (7, 2), (3, 9)

Review Queue Answers

1. (5x − 1)◦ + (8x + 5)◦ + (4x + 6)◦ = 180◦

17x + 10 = 180◦

17x = 170◦

x = 10◦

2. x = 40◦, y = 70◦

www.ck12.org 156

3. x − 3 = 8

x = 5

4. Each angle is 180◦3 , or 60◦

3.6 Chapter 4 Review

Symbols Toolbox

Congruent Triangles and their corresponding parts

Definitions, Postulates, and Theorems

Triangle Sums

• Interior Angles

• Vertex

• Triangle Sum Theorem

• Exterior Angle

• Exterior Angle Sum Theorem

• Remote Interior Angles

• Exterior Angle Theorem

Congruent Figures

• Congruent Triangles

• Congruence Statements

• Third Angle Theorem

• Reflexive Property of Congruence

• Symmetric Property of Congruence

• Transitive Property of Congruence

Triangle Congruence using SSS and SAS

• Side-Side-Side (SSS) Triangle Congruence Postulate

• Included Angle

• Side-Angle-Side (SAS) Triangle Congruence Postulate

• Distance Formula

Triangle Congruence using ASA, AAS, and HL

• Angle-Side-Angle (ASA) Congruence Postulate

157 www.ck12.org

• Angle-Angle-Side (AAS) Congruence Theorem

• Hypotenuse

• Legs (of a right triangle)

• HL Congruence Theorem

Isosceles and Equilateral Triangles

• Base

• Base Angles

• Vertex Angle

• Legs (of an isosceles triangle)

• Base Angles Theorem

• Isosceles Triangle Theorem

• Base Angles Theorem Converse

• Isosceles Triangle Theorem Converse

• Equilateral Triangles Theorem

Review

For each pair of triangles, write what needs to be congruent in order for the triangles to be congruent.

Then, write the congruence statement for the triangles.

1. HL

2. ASA

3. AAS

4. SSS

www.ck12.org 158

5. SAS

Using the pictures below, determine which theorem, postulate or definition that supports each statement

below.

6. m∠1 + m∠2 = 180◦

7. ∠5 ∠6

8. m∠1 + m∠4 + m∠3

9. m∠8 = 60◦

10. m∠5 + m∠6 + m∠7 = 180◦

11. ∠8 ∠9 ∠10

12. If m∠7 = 90◦, then m∠5 = m∠6 = 45◦

Texas Instruments Resources

In the CK-12 Texas Instruments Geometry FlexBook, there are graphing calculator activities

designed to supplement the objectives for some of the lessons in this chapter. See http:

//www.ck12.org/flexr/chapter/9689.

3.7 Study Guide

Keywords: Define, write theorems, and/or draw a diagram for each word below.

1st Section: Triangle Sums

Interior Angles

Vertex

Triangle Sum Theorem

Exterior Angle Exterior Angle Sum Theorem

Remote Interior Angles

159 www.ck12.org

Exterior Angle Theorem

Homework:

2nd Section: Congruent Figures

Congruent Triangles

Congruence Statements

Third Angle Theorem

Reflexive Property of Congruence

Symmetric Property of Congruence

Transitive Property of Congruence

Homework:

3rd Section: Triangle Congruence using SSS and SAS

Side-Side-Side (SSS) Triangle Congruence Postulate

Included Angle

Side-Angle-Side (SAS) Triangle Congruence Postulate

Distance Formula

Homework:

4th Section: Triangle Congruence using ASA, AAS, and HL

Angle-Side-Angle (ASA) Congruence Postulate

Angle-Angle-Side (AAS) Congruence Theorem

Hypotenuse

Legs (of a right triangle)

HL Congruence Theorem

Homework:

5th Section: Isosceles and Equilateral Triangles

www.ck12.org 160

Base

Base Angles

Vertex Angle

Legs (of an isosceles triangle)

Base Angles Theorem

Isosceles Triangle Theorem

Base Angles Theorem Converse

Isosceles Triangle Theorem Converse

Equilateral Triangle Theorem

Homework:

161 www.ck12.org

Chapter 4

Right Triangle Trigonometry

Chapter 8 takes a look at right triangles. A right triangle is a triangle with exactly one right angle. In this

chapter, we will prove the Pythagorean Theorem and its converse. Then, we will introduce trigonometry

ratios. Finally, there is an extension about the Law of Sines and the Law of Cosines.

4.1 The Pythagorean Theorem

Learning Objectives

• Review simplifying and reducing radicals.

• Prove and use the Pythagorean Theorem.

• Use the Pythagorean Theorem to derive the distance formula.

Review Queue

1. Draw a right scalene triangle.

2. Draw an isosceles right triangle.

3. List all the factors of 75.

4. Write the prime factorization of 75.

Know What? For a 52” TV, 52” is the length of the diagonal. High Definition Televisions (HDTVs) have

sides in a ratio of 16:9. What are the length and width of a 52” HDTV?

Simplifying and Reducing Radicals

In algebra, you learned how to simplify radicals. Let’s review it here.

Example 1: Simplify the radical.

www.ck12.org 162

a)

√

50

b)

√

27

c)

√

272

Solution: For each radical, find the square number(s) that are factors.

a)

√

50 =

√

25 · 2 = 5

√

2

b)

√

27 =

√

9 · 3 = 3

√

3

c)

√

272 =

√

16 · 17 = 4

√

17

When adding radicals, you can only combine radicals with the same number underneath it. For example,

2

√

5 + 3

√

6 cannot be combined, because 5 and 6 are not the same number.

Example 2: Simplify the radicals.

a) 2

√

10 +

√

160

b) 5

√

6 · 4

√

18

c)

√

8 · 12

√

2

d)

(

5

√

2

)2

Solution:

a) Simplify

√

160 before adding: 2

√

10 +

√

160 = 2

√

10 +

√

16 · 10 = 2

√

10 + 4

√

10 = 6

√

10

b) To multiply two radicals, multiply what is under the radicals and what is in front.

5

√

6 · 4

√

18 = 5 · 4

√

6 · 18 = 20

√

108 = 20

√

36 · 3 = 20 · 6

√

3 = 120

√

3

c)

√

8 · 12

√

2 = 12

√

8 · 2 = 12

√

16 = 12 · 4 = 48

d)

(

5

√

2

)2

= 52

(√

2

)2

= 25 · 2 = 50→ the √ and the 2 cancel each other out

Lastly, to divide radicals, you need to simplify the denominator, which means multiplying the top and

bottom of the fraction by the radical in the denominator.

Example 3: Divide and simplify the radicals.

a) 4

√

6 ÷

√

3

b)

√

30√

8

c) 8

√

2

6

√

7

Solution: Rewrite all division problems like a fraction.

a)

b)

√

30√

8

·

√

8√

8

=

√

240√

64

=

√

16·15

8 =

4

√

15

8 =

√

15

2

c) 8

√

2

6

√

7

·

√

7√

7

= 8

√

14

6·7 =

4

√

14

3·7 =

4

√

14

21

Notice, we do not really “divide” radicals, but get them out of the denominator of a fraction.

163 www.ck12.org

The Pythagorean Theorem

We have used the Pythagorean Theorem already in this text, but have not proved it. Recall that the sides

of a right triangle are the legs (the sides of the right angle) and the hypotenuse (the side opposite the

right angle). For the Pythagorean Theorem, the legs are “a” and “b” and the hypotenuse is “c”.

Pythagorean Theorem: Given a right triangle with legs of lengths a and b and a hypotenuse of length

c, then a2 + b2 = c2.

Investigation 8-1: Proof of the Pythagorean Theorem

Tools Needed: pencil, 2 pieces of graph paper, ruler, scissors, colored pencils (optional)

1. On the graph paper, draw a 3 in. square, a 4 in. square, a 5 in. square and a right triangle with legs

of 3 in. and 4 in.

2. Cut out the triangle and square and arrange them like the picture on the right.

3. This theorem relies on area. Recall that the area of a square is side2. In this case, we have three

squares with sides 3 in., 4 in., and 5 in. What is the area of each square?

4. Now, we know that 9+16 = 25, or 32 +42 = 52. Cut the smaller squares to fit into the larger square,

thus proving the areas are equal.

For two more proofs, go to: http://www.mathsisfun.com/pythagoras.html and scroll down to “And

You Can Prove the Theorem Yourself.”

Using the Pythagorean Theorem

Here are several examples of the Pythagorean Theorem in action.

Example 4: Do 6, 7, and 8 make the sides of a right triangle?

www.ck12.org 164

Solution: Plug in the three numbers to the Pythagorean Theorem. The largest length will always be

the hypotenuse. If 62 + 72 = 82, then they are the sides of a right triangle.

62 + 72 = 36 + 49 = 85

82 = 64 85 , 64, so the lengths are not the sides of a right triangle.

Example 5: Find the length of the hypotenuse.

Solution: Use the Pythagorean Theorem. Set a = 8 and b = 15. Solve for c.

82 + 152 = c2

64 + 225 = c2

289 = c2 Take the square root o f both sides.

17 = c

When you take the square root of an equation, the answer is 17 or -17. Length is never negative, which

makes 17 the answer.

Example 6: Find the missing side of the right triangle below.

Solution: Here, we are given the hypotenuse and a leg. Let’s solve for b.

72 + b2 = 142

49 + b2 = 196

b2 = 147

b =

√

147 =

√

49 · 3 = 7

√

3

Example 7: What is the diagonal of a rectangle with sides 10 and 16?

165 www.ck12.org

Solution: For any square and rectangle, you can use the Pythagorean Theorem to find the length of a

diagonal. Plug in the sides to find d.

102 + 162 = d2

100 + 256 = d2

356 = d2

d =

√

356 = 2

√

89 ≈ 18.87

Pythagorean Triples

In Example 5, the sides of the triangle were 8, 15, and 17. This combination of numbers is called a

Pythagorean triple.

Pythagorean Triple: A set of three whole numbers that makes the Pythagorean Theorem true.

3, 4, 5 5, 12, 13 7, 24, 25 8, 15, 17 9, 12, 15 10, 24, 26

Any multiple of a Pythagorean triple is also considered a triple because it would still be three whole

numbers. Multiplying 3, 4, 5 by 2 gives 6, 8, 10, which is another triple. To see if a set of numbers makes

a triple, plug them into the Pythagorean Theorem.

Example 8: Is 20, 21, 29 a Pythagorean triple?

Solution: If 202 + 212 = 292, then the set is a Pythagorean triple.

202 + 212 = 400 + 441 = 841

292 = 841

Therefore, 20, 21, and 29 is a Pythagorean triple.

Height of an Isosceles Triangle

One way to use The Pythagorean Theorem is to find the height of an isosceles triangle.

Example 9: What is the height of the isosceles triangle?

www.ck12.org 166

Solution: Draw the altitude from the vertex between the congruent sides, which bisect the base.

72 + h2 = 92

49 + h2 = 81

h2 = 32

h =

√

32 =

√

16 · 2 = 4

√

2

The Distance Formula

Another application of the Pythagorean Theorem is the Distance Formula. We will prove it here.

Let’s start with point A(x1, y1) and point B(x2, y2), to the left. We will call the distance between A and

B, d.

Draw the vertical and horizontal lengths to make a right triangle.

Now that we have a right triangle, we can use the Pythagorean Theorem to find the hypotenuse, d.

d2 = (x1 − x2)2 + (y1 − y2)2

d =

√

(x1 − x2)2 + (y1 − y2)2

167 www.ck12.org

Distance Formula: The distance A(x1, y1) and B(x2, y2) is d =

√

(x1 − x2)2 + (y1 − y2)2.

Example 10: Find the distance between (1, 5) and (5, 2).

Solution: Make A(1, 5) and B(5, 2). Plug into the distance formula.

d =

√

(1 − 5)2 + (5 − 2)2

=

√

(−4)2 + (3)2

=

√

16 + 9 =

√

25 = 5

Just like the lengths of the sides of a triangle, distances are always positive.

Know What? Revisited To find the length and width of a 52” HDTV, plug in the ratios and 52 into

the Pythagorean Theorem. We know that the sides are going to be a multiple of 16 and 9, which we will

call n.

(16n)2 + (9n)2 = 522

256n2 + 81n2 = 2704

337n2 = 2704

n2 = 8.024

n = 2.83

The dimensions of the TV are 16(2.83”) × 9(2.83”), or 45.3” × 25.5”.

Review Questions

• Questions 1-9 are similar to Examples 1-3.

• Questions 10-15 are similar to Example 5 and 6.

• Questions 16-19 are similar to Example 7.

• Questions 20-25 are similar to Example 8.

• Questions 26-28 are similar to Example 9.

• Questions 29-31 are similar to Example 10.

• Questions 32 and 33 are similar to the Know What?

• Question 34 and 35 are a challenge and similar to Example 9.

Simplify the radicals.

1. 2

√

5 +

√

20

2.

√

24

3.

(

6

√

3

)2

4. 8

√

8 ·

√

10

www.ck12.org 168

5.

(

2

√

30

)2

6.

√

320

7. 4

√

5√

6

8. 12√

10

9. 21

√

5

9

√

15

Find the length of the missing side. Simplify all radicals.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16. If the legs of a right triangle are 10 and 24, then the hypotenuse is __________.

17. If the sides of a rectangle are 12 and 15, then the diagonal is _____________.

18. If the sides of a square are 16, then the diagonal is ____________.

19. If the sides of a square are 9, then the diagonal is _____________.

Determine if the following sets of numbers are Pythagorean Triples.

169 www.ck12.org

20. 12, 35, 37

21. 9, 17, 18

22. 10, 15, 21

23. 11, 60, 61

24. 15, 20, 25

25. 18, 73, 75

Find the height of each isosceles triangle below. Simplify all radicals.

26.

27.

28.

Find the length between each pair of points.

29. (-1, 6) and (7, 2)

30. (10, -3) and (-12, -6)

31. (1, 3) and (-8, 16)

32. What are the length and width of a 42” HDTV? Round your answer to the nearest tenth.

33. Standard definition TVs have a length and width ratio of 4:3. What are the length and width of a

42” Standard definition TV? Round your answer to the nearest tenth.

34. Challenge An equilateral triangle is an isosceles triangle. If all the sides of an equilateral triangle

are 8, find the height. Leave your answer in simplest radicalform.

35. If the sides are length s, what would the height be?

www.ck12.org 170

Review Queue Answers

1.

2.

3. Factors of 75: 1, 3, 5, 15, 25, 75

4. Prime Factorization of 75: 3 · 5 · 5

4.2 Converse of the Pythagorean Theorem

Learning Objectives

• Understand the converse of the Pythagorean Theorem.

• Determine if a triangle is acute or obtuse from side measures.

Review Queue

1. Determine if the following sets of numbers are Pythagorean triples.

(a) 14, 48, 50

(b) 9, 40, 41

(c) 12, 43, 44

(d) 12, 35, 37

2. Simplify the radicals.

(a)

(

5

√

12

)2

(b) 14√

2

(c) 18√

3

Know What? A friend of yours is designing a building and wants it to be rectangular. One wall 65 ft.

long and the other is 72 ft. long. How can he ensure the walls are going to be perpendicular?

171 www.ck12.org

Converse of the Pythagorean Theorem

Pythagorean Theorem Converse: If the square of the longest side of a triangle is equal to the sum of

the squares of the other two sides, then the triangle is a right triangle.

If a2 + b2 = c2, then 4ABC is a right triangle.

With this converse, you can use the Pythagorean Theorem to prove that a triangle is a right triangle, even

if you do not know any angle measures.

Example 1: Determine if the triangles below are right triangles.

a)

b)

Solution: Check to see if the three lengths satisfy the Pythagorean Theorem. Let the longest side represent

c.

a) a2 + b2 = c2

82 + 162 ?=

(

8

√

5

)2

64 + 256 ?= 64 · 5

320 = 320 Yes

b) a2 + b2 = c2

222 + 242 ?= 262

484 + 576 ?= 676

1060 , 676 No

Example 2: Do the following lengths make a right triangle?

a)

√

5, 3,

√

14

b) 6, 2

√

3, 8

c) 3

√

2, 4

√

2, 5

√

2

www.ck12.org 172

Solution: Even though there is no picture, you can still use the Pythagorean Theorem. Again, the longest

length will be c.

a)

(√

5

)2

+ 32 =

√

142

5 + 9 = 14

Yes

b) 62 +

(

2

√

3

)2

= 82

36 + (4 · 3) = 64

36 + 12 , 64

c) This is a multiple of

√

2 of a 3, 4, 5 right triangle. Yes, this is a right triangle.

Identifying Acute and Obtuse Triangles

We can extend the converse of the Pythagorean Theorem to determine if a triangle is an obtuse or acute

triangle.

Theorem 8-3: If the sum of the squares of the two shorter sides in a right triangle is greater than the

square of the longest side, then the triangle is acute.

b < c and a < c

If a2 + b2 > c2, then the triangle is acute.

Theorem 8-4: If the sum of the squares of the two shorter sides in a right triangle is less than the square

of the longest side, then the triangle is obtuse.

b < c and a < c

If a2 + b2 < c2, then the triangle is obtuse.

Example 3: Determine if the following triangles are acute, right or obtuse.

a)

173 www.ck12.org

b)

Solution: Set the longest side equal to c.

a) 62 +

(

3

√

5

)2

? 82

36 + 45 ? 64

81 > 64

The triangle is acute.

b) 152 + 142 ? 212

225 + 196 ? 441

421 < 441

The triangle is obtuse.

Example 4: Graph A(−4, 1), B(3, 8), and C(9, 6). Determine if 4ABC is acute, obtuse, or right.

Solution: Use the distance formula to find the length of each side.

AB =

√

(−4 − 3)2 + (1 − 8)2 =

√

49 + 49 =

√

98 = 7

√

2

BC =

√

(3 − 9)2 + (8 − 6)2 =

√

36 + 4 =

√

40 = 2

√

10

AC =

√

(−4 − 9)2 + (1 − 6)2 =

√

169 + 25 =

√

194

Plug these lengths into the Pythagorean Theorem.

(√

98

)2

+

(√

40

)2

?

(√

194

)2

98 + 40 ? 194

138 < 194

4ABC is an obtuse triangle.

Know What? Revisited Find the length of the diagonal.

www.ck12.org 174

652 + 722 = c2

4225 + 5184 = c2

9409 = c2

97 = c To make the building rectangular, both diagonals must be 97 feet.

Review Questions

• Questions 1-6 are similar to Examples 1 and 2.

• Questions 7-15 are similar to Example 3.

• Questions 16-20 are similar to Example 4.

• Questions 21-24 use the Pythagorean Theorem.

• Question 25 uses the definition of similar triangles.

Determine if the following lengths make a right triangle.

1. 7, 24, 25

2.

√

5, 2

√

10, 3

√

5

3. 2

√

3,

√

6, 8

4. 15, 20, 25

5. 20, 25, 30

6. 8

√

3, 6, 2

√

39

Determine if the following triangles are acute, right or obtuse.

7. 7, 8, 9

8. 14, 48, 50

9. 5, 12, 15

10. 13, 84, 85

11. 20, 20, 24

12. 35, 40, 51

13. 39, 80, 89

14. 20, 21, 38

15. 48, 55, 76

Graph each set of points and determine if 4ABC is acute, right, or obtuse, using the distance formula.

16. A(3,−5), B(−5,−8),C(−2, 7)

17. A(5, 3), B(2,−7),C(−1, 5)

18. A(1, 6), B(5, 2),C(−2, 3)

19. A(−6, 1), B(−4,−5),C(5,−2)

20. Show that #18 is a right triangle by using the slopes of the sides of the triangle.

The figure to the right is a rectangular prism. All sides (or faces) are either squares (the front and

back) or rectangles (the four around the middle). All faces are perpendicular.

175 www.ck12.org

21. Find c.

22. Find d.

Now, the figure is a cube, where all the sides are squares. If all the sides have length 4, find:

23. Find c.

24. Find d.

25. Writing Explain why m∠A = 90◦.

Review Queue Answers

1. (a) Yes

(b) Yes

(c) No

(d) Yes

2. (a)

(

5

√

12

)2

= 52 · 12 = 25 · 12 = 300

(b) 14√

2

·

√

2√

2

= 14

√

2

2 = 7

√

2

(c) 18√

3

·

√

3√

3

= 18

√

3

3 = 6

√

3

4.3 Using Similar Right Triangles

Learning Objectives

• Identify similar triangles inscribed in a larger triangle.

• Use proportions in similar right triangles.

Review Queue

1. Solve the following ratios.

(a) 3x = x27

(b)

√

6

x =

x

9

√

6

www.ck12.org 176

(c) x15 = 12x

2. If the legs of an isosceles right triangle are 4, find the length of the hypotenuse. Draw a picture and

simplify the radical.

Know What? The bridge to the right is called a truss bridge. It is a steel bridge with a series of right

triangles that are connected as support. All the red right triangles are similar. Can you find x, y and z?

Inscribed Similar Triangles

You may recall that if two objects are similar, corresponding angles are congruent and their sides are

proportional in length.

Theorem 8-5: If an altitude is drawn from the right angle of any right triangle, then the two triangles

formed are similar to the original triangle and all three triangles are similar to each other.

In 4ADB,m∠A = 90◦ and AC⊥DB, then 4ADB ∼ 4CDA ∼ 4CAB.

Example 1: Write the similarity statement for the triangles below.

Solution: Separate out the three triangles.

177 www.ck12.org

Line up the congruent angles: 4IRE ∼ 4ITR ∼ 4RTE

We can also use the side proportions to find the length of the altitude.

Example 2: Find the value of x.

Solution: Separate the triangles to find the corresponding sides.

Set up a proportion.

shorter leg in 4EDG

shorter leg in 4DFG =

hypotenuse in 4EDG

hypotenuse in 4DFG

6

x

= 10

8

48 = 10x

4.8 = x

Example 3: Find the value of x.

Solution: Set up a proportion.

www.ck12.org 178

shorter leg in 4SVT

shorter leg in 4RST =

hypotenuse in 4SVT

hypotenuse in 4RST

4

x

= x

20

x2 = 80

x =

√

80 = 4

√

5

Example 4: Find the value of y in 4RST above.

Solution: Use the Pythagorean Theorem.

y2 +

(

4

√

5

)2

= 202

y2 + 80 = 400

y2 = 320

y =

√

320 = 8

√

5

The Geometric Mean

Geometric Mean: The geometric mean of two positive numbers a and b is the positive number x, such

that ax = xb or x2 = ab and x =

√

ab.

Example 5: Find the geometric mean of 24 and 36.

Solution: x =

√

24 · 36 =

√

12 · 2 · 12 · 3 = 12

√

6

Example 6: Find the geometric mean of 18 and 54.

Solution: x =

√

18 · 54 =

√

18 · 18 · 3 = 18

√

3

In both of these examples, we did not multiply the numbers together. This makes it easier to simplify the

radical. A practical application of the geometric mean is to find the altitude of a right triangle.

Example 7: Find the value of x.

Solution: Set up a proportion.

shortest leg o f smallest 4

shortest leg o f middle 4 =

longer leg o f smallest 4

longer leg o f middle 4

9

x

= x

27

x2 = 243

x =

√

243 = 9

√

3

In Example 7, 9x = x27 is in the definition of the geometric mean. So, the altitude is the geometric mean of

the two segments that it divides the hypotenuse into. In other words, BCAC = ACDC . Two other true proportions

are BCAB = ABDB and DCAD = ADDB .

179 www.ck12.org

Example 8: Find the value of x and y.

Solution: Separate the triangles. Write a proportion for x.

20

x

= x

35

x2 = 20 · 35

x =

√

20 · 35

x = 10

√

7

Set up a proportion for y. Or, you can use the Pythagorean Theorem to solve for y.

15

y

= y

35

(10

√

7)2 + y2 = 352

y2 = 15 · 35 700 + y2 = 1225

y =

√

15 · 35 y =

√

525 = 5

√

21

y = 5

√

21 Use the method you feel most comfortable with.

Know What? Revisited To find the hypotenuse of the smallest triangle, do the Pythagorean Theorem.

www.ck12.org 180

452 + 282 = x2

2809 = x2

53 = x

Because the triangles are similar, find the scale factor of 7028 = 2.5.

y = 45 · 2.5 = 112.5 and z = 53 · 2.5 = 135.5

Review Questions

• Questions 1-4 use the ratios of similar right triangles.

• Questions 5-8 are similar to Example 1.

• Questions 9-11 are similar to Examples 2-4

• Questions 12-17 are similar to Examples 5 and 6.

• Questions 18-29 are similar to Examples 2, 3, 4, 7, and 8.

• Question 30 is a proof of theorem 8-5.

Fill in the blanks.

1. 4BAD ∼ 4 ∼ 4

2. BC? = ?CD

3. BCAB = AB?

4. ?AD = ADBD

Write the similarity statement for the right triangles in each diagram.

5.

6.

181 www.ck12.org

7.

Use the diagram to answer questions 8-11.

8. Write the similarity statement for the three triangles in the diagram.

9. If JM = 12 and ML = 9, find KM.

10. Find JK.

11. Find KL.

Find the geometric mean between the following two numbers. Simplify all radicals.

12. 16 and 32

13. 45 and 35

14. 10 and 14

15. 28 and 42

16. 40 and 100

17. 51 and 8

Find the length of the missing variable(s). Simplify all radicals.

18.

19.

www.ck12.org 182

20.

21.

22.

23.

24.

25.

26.

183 www.ck12.org

27.

28.

29.

30. Fill in the blanks of the proof for Theorem 8-5.

Given: 4ABD with AC ⊥ DB and ∠DAB is a right angle.

Prove: 4ABD ∼ 4CBA ∼ 4CAD

Table 4.1:

Statement Reason

1. Given

2. ∠DCA and ∠ACB are right angles

3. ∠DAB ∠DCA ∠ACB

4. Reflexive PoC

5. AA Similarity Postulate

6. B ∠B

7. 4CBA 4ABD

8. 4CAD 4CBA

Review Queue Answers

1. (a) 3x = x27 → x2 = 81→ x = 9

(b)

√

6

x =

x

9

√

6

→ x2 = 54→ x =

√

54 =

√

9 · 6 = 3

√

6

(c) x15 = 12x → x2 = 180→ x =

√

180 =

√

4 · 9 · 5 = 2 · 3

√

5 = 6

√

5

2. 42 + 42 = h2

h =

√

32 = 4

√

2

www.ck12.org 184

4.4 Special Right Triangles

Learning Objectives

• Learn and use the 45-45-90 triangle ratio.

• Learn and use the 30-60-90 triangle ratio.

Review Queue

Find the value of the missing variables. Simplify all radicals.

1.

2.

3.

4. Is 9, 12, and 15 a right triangle?

5. Is 3, 3

√

3, and 6 a right triangle?

Know What? A baseball diamond is a square with sides that are 90 feet long. Each base is a corner of

the square. What is the length between 1st and 3rd base and between 2nd base and home plate? (the red

dotted lines in the diagram).

185 www.ck12.org

Isosceles Right Triangles

There are two special right triangles. The first is an isosceles right triangle.

Isosceles Right Triangle: A right triangle with congruent legs and acute angles. This triangle is also

called a 45-45-90 triangle (after the angle measures).

4ABC is a right triangle with:

m∠A = 90◦

AB AC

m∠B = m∠C = 45◦

Investigation 8-2: Properties of an Isosceles Right Triangle

Tools Needed: Pencil, paper, compass, ruler, protractor

1. Draw an isosceles right triangle with 2 inch legs and the 90◦ angle between them.

2. Find the measure of the hypotenuse, using the Pythagorean Theorem. Simplify the radical.

22 + 22 = c2

8 = c2

c =

√

8 =

√

4 · 2 = 2

√

2

What do you notice about the length of the legs and hypotenuse?

www.ck12.org 186

3. Now, let’s say the legs are of length x and the hypotenuse is h. Use the Pythagorean Theorem to find

the hypotenuse. How is it similar to your answer in #2?

x2 + x2 = h2

2x2 = h2

x

√

2 = h

45-45-90 Theorem: If a right triangle is isosceles, then its sides are x : x : x

√

2.

For any isosceles right triangle, the legs are x and the hypotenuse is always x

√

2. Because the three

angles are always 45◦, 45◦, and 90◦, all isosceles right triangles are similar.

Example 1: Find the length of the missing sides.

a)

b)

Solution: Use the x : x : x

√

2 ratio.

a) TV = 6 because it is equal to ST . So, SV = 6 ·

√

2 = 6

√

2.

b) AB = 9

√

2 because it is equal to AC. So, BC = 9

√

2 ·

√

2 = 9 · 2 = 18.

Example 2: Find the length of x.

a)

187 www.ck12.org

b)

Solution: Use the x : x : x

√

2 ratio.

a) 12

√

2 is the diagonal of the square. Remember that the diagonal of a square bisects each angle, so it

splits the square into two 45-45-90 triangles. 12

√

2 would be the hypotenuse, or equal to x

√

2.

12

√

2 = x

√

2

12 = x

b) Here, we are given the hypotenuse. Solve for x in the ratio.

x

√

2 = 16

x = 16√

2

·

√

2

√

2

= 16

√

2

2

= 8

√

2

In part b, we rationalized the denominator which we learned in the first section.

30-60-90 Triangles

The second special right triangle is called a 30-60-90 triangle, after the three angles. To draw a 30-60-90

triangle, start with an equilateral triangle.

Investigation 8-3: Properties of a 30-60-90 Triangle

Tools Needed: Pencil, paper, ruler, compass

1. Construct an equilateral triangle with 2 inch sides.

http://www.mathsisfun.com/geometry/construct-equitriangle.html

2. Draw or construct the altitude from the top vertex to form two congruent triangles.

3. Find the measure of the two angles at the top vertex and the length of the shorter leg.

www.ck12.org 188

The top angles are each 30◦ and the shorter leg is 1 in because the altitude of an equilateral triangle is also

the angle and perpendicular bisector.

4. Find the length of the longer leg, using the Pythagorean Theorem. Simplify the radical.

12 + b2 = 22

1 + b2 = 4

b2 = 3

b =

√

3

5. Now, let’s say the shorter leg is length x and the hypotenuse is 2x. Use the Pythagorean Theorem to

find the longer leg. How is this similar to your answer in #4?

x2 + b2 = (2x)2

x2 + b2 = 4x2

b2 = 3x2

b = x

√

3

30-60-90 Theorem: If a triangle has angle measures 30◦, 60◦ and 90◦, then the sides are x : x

√

3 : 2x.

The shortest leg is always x, the longest leg is always x

√

3, and the hypotenuse is always 2x. If you ever

forget these theorems, you can still use the Pythagorean Theorem.

Example 3: Find the length of the missing sides.

a)

b)

Solution: In part a, we are given the shortest leg and in part b, we are given the hypotenuse.

a) If x = 5, then the longer leg, b = 5

√

3, and the hypotenuse, c = 2(5) = 10.

b) Now, 2x = 20, so the shorter leg, f = 202 = 10, and the longer leg, g = 10

√

3.

Example 4: Find the value of x and y.

189 www.ck12.org

a)

b)

Solution: In part a, we are given the longer leg and in part b, we are given the hypotenuse.

a) x

√

3 = 12

x = 12√

3

·

√

3√

3

= 12

√

3

3 = 4

√

3

The hypotenuse is

y = 2(4

√

3) = 8

√

3

b) 2x = 16

x = 8

The longer leg is

y = 8 ·

√

3 = 8

√

3

Example 5: A rectangle has sides 4 and 4

√

3. What is the length of the diagonal?

Solution: If you are not given a picture, draw one.

The two lengths are x, x

√

3, so the diagonal would be 2x, or 2(4) = 8.

If you did not recognize this is a 30-60-90 triangle, you can use the Pythagorean Theorem too.

42 +

(

4

√

3

)2

= d2

16 + 48 = d2

d =

√

64 = 8

Example 6: A square has a diagonal with length 10, what are the sides?

Solution: Draw a picture.

www.ck12.org 190

We know half of a square is a 45-45-90 triangle, so 10 = s

√

2.

s

√

2 = 10

s = 10√

2

·

√

2

√

2

= 10

√

2

2

= 5

√

2

Know What? Revisited The distance between 1st and 3rd base is one of the diagonals of the square.

So, it would be the same as the hypotenuse of a 45-45-90 triangle. Using our ratios, the distance is

90

√

2 ≈ 127.3 f t. The distance between 2nd base and home plate is the same length.

Review Questions

• Questions 1-4 are similar to Example 1-4.

• Questions 5-8 are similar to Examples 5 and 6.

• Questions 9-23 are similar to Examples 1-4.

• Questions 24 and 25 are a challenge.

1. In an isosceles right triangle, if a leg is 4, then the hypotenuse is __________.

2. In a 30-60-90 triangle, if the shorter leg is 5, then the longer leg is __________ and the hy-

potenuse is ___________.

3. In an isosceles right triangle, if a leg is x, then the hypotenuse is __________.

4. In a 30-60-90 triangle, if the shorter leg is x, then the longer leg is __________ and the hy-

potenuse is ___________.

5. A square has sides of length 15. What is the length of the diagonal?

6. A square’s diagonal is 22. What is the length of each side?

7. A rectangle has sides of length 6 and 6

√

3. What is the length of the diagonal?

8. Two (opposite) sides of a rectangle are 10 and the diagonal is 20. What is the length of the other

two sides?

For questions 9-23, find the lengths of the missing sides. Simplify all radicals.

191 www.ck12.org

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

www.ck12.org 192

16.

17.

18.

19.

20.

21.

22.

193 www.ck12.org

23.

Challenge For 24 and 25, find the value of y. You may need to draw in additional lines. Round all answers

to the nearest hundredth.

24.

25.

Review Queue Answers

1. 42 + 42 = x2

32 = x2

x = 4

√

2

2. 32 + y2 = 62

y2 = 27

y = 3

√

3

3. x2 + x2 =

(

10

√

2

)2

2x2 = 200

x2 = 100

x = 10

4. Yes, 92 + 122 = 152 → 81 + 144 = 225

5. Yes, 32 +

(

3

√

3

)2

= 62 → 9 + 27 = 36

4.5 Tangent, Sine and Cosine

Learning Objectives

• Use the tangent, sine and cosine ratios.

• Use a scientific calculator to find sine, cosine and tangent.

• Use trigonometric ratios in real-life situations.

www.ck12.org 194

Review Queue

1. The legs of an isosceles right triangle have length 14. What is the hypotenuse?

2. Do the lengths 8, 16, 20 make a right triangle? If not, is the triangle obtuse or acute?

3. In a 30-60-90 triangle, what do the 30, 60, and 90 refer to?

Know What? A restaurant is building a wheelchair ramp. The angle of elevation for the ramp is 5◦. If

the vertical distance from the sidewalk to the front door is 4 feet, how long will the ramp be (x)? Round

your answers to the nearest hundredth.

What is Trigonometry?

In this lesson we will define three trigonometric (or trig) ratios. Once we have defined these ratios, we will

be able to solve problems like the Know What? above.

Trigonometry: The study of the relationships between the sides and angles of right triangles.

The legs are called adjacent or opposite depending on which acute angle is being used.

a is ad jacent to ∠B a is opposite ∠A

b is ad jacent to ∠A b is opposite ∠B

c is the hypotenuse

Sine, Cosine, and Tangent Ratios

The three basic trig ratios are called, sine, cosine and tangent. For now, we will only take the sine, cosine

and tangent of acute angles. However, you can use these ratios with obtuse angles as well.

For right triangle 4ABC, we have:

Sine Ratio: opposite leghypotenuse sin A = ac or sin B = bc

Cosine Ratio: ad jacent leghypotenuse cos A = bc or cos B = ac

Tangent Ratio: opposite legad jacent leg tan A = ab or tan B = ba

195 www.ck12.org

An easy way to remember ratios is to use SOH-CAH-TOA.

Example 1: Find the sine, cosine and tangent ratios of ∠A.

Solution: First, we need to use the Pythagorean Theorem to find the length of the hypotenuse.

52 + 122 = h2

13 = h

sin A = leg opposite ∠A

hypotenuse

= 12

13

cos A = leg ad jacent to ∠A

hypotenuse

= 5

13

,

tan A = leg opposite ∠A

leg ad jacent to ∠A

= 12

5

A few important points:

• Always reduce ratios (fractions) when you can.

• Use the Pythagorean Theorem to find the missing side (if there is one).

• If there is a radical in the denominator, rationalize the denominator.

Example 2: Find the sine, cosine, and tangent of ∠B.

Solution: Find the length of the missing side.

AC2 + 52 = 152

AC2 = 200

AC = 10

√

2

sin B = 10

√

2

15

= 2

√

2

3

cos B = 5

15

= 1

3

tan B = 10

√

2

5

= 2

√

2

Example 3: Find the sine, cosine and tangent of 30◦.

www.ck12.org 196

Solution: This is a 30-60-90 triangle. The short leg is 6, y = 6

√

3 and x = 12.

sin 30◦ = 6

12

= 1

2

cos 30◦ = 6

√

3

12

= 3

2

tan 30◦ = 6

6

√

3

= 1√

3

· 3√

3

=

√

3

3

Sine, Cosine, and Tangent with a Calculator

From Example 3, we can conclude that there is a fixed sine, cosine, and tangent value for every

angle, from 0◦ to 90◦. Your scientific (or graphing) calculator knows all the trigonometric values for any

angle. Your calculator, should have [SIN], [COS], and [TAN] buttons.

Example 4: Find the trigonometric value, using your calculator. Round to 4 decimal places.

a) sin 78◦

b) cos 60◦

c) tan 15◦

Solution: Depending on your calculator, you enter the degree and then press the trig button or the other

way around. Also, make sure the mode of your calculator is in DEGREES.

a) sin 78◦ = 0.9781

b) cos 60◦ = 0.5

c) tan 15◦ = 0.2679

Finding the Sides of a Triangle using Trig Ratios

One application of the trigonometric ratios is to use them to find the missing sides of a right triangle.

Example 5: Find the value of each variable. Round your answer to the nearest tenth.

Solution: We are given the hypotenuse. Use sine to find b, and cosine to find a.

sin 22◦ = b

30

cos 22◦ = a

30

30 · sin 22◦ = b 30 · cos 22◦ = a

b ≈ 11.2 a ≈ 27.8

Example 6: Find the value of each variable. Round your answer to the nearest tenth.

197 www.ck12.org

Solution: We are given the adjacent leg to 42◦. To find c, use cosine and tangent to find d.

cos 42◦ = ad jacent

hypotenuse

= 9

c

tan 42◦ = opposite

ad jacent

= d

9

c · cos 42◦ = 9 9 · tan 42◦ = d

c = 9cos 42◦ ≈ 12.1 d ≈ 8.1

Anytime you use trigonometric ratios, only use the information that you are given. This will give the most

accurate answers.

Angles of Depression and Elevation

Another application of the trigonometric ratios is to find lengths that you cannot measure. Very frequently,

angles of depression and elevation are used in these types of problems.

Angle of Depression: The angle measured from the horizon or horizontal line, down.

Angle of Elevation: The angle measure from the horizon or horizontal line, up.

Example 7: A math student is standing 25 feet from the base of the Washington Monument. The angle

of elevation from her horizontal line of sight is 87.4◦. If her “eye height” is 5 ft, how tall is the monument?

Solution: We can find the height of the monument by using the tangent ratio.

www.ck12.org 198

tan 87.4◦ = h

25

h = 25 · tan 87.4◦ = 550.54

Adding 5 ft, the total height of the Washington Monument is 555.54 ft.

Know What? Revisited To find the length of the ramp, we need to use sine.

sin 5◦ = 4

x

y = 2sin 5◦ = 22.95

Review Questions

• Questions 1-8 use the definitions of sine, cosine and tangent.

• Questions 9-16 are similar to Example 4.

• Questions 17-22 are similar to Examples 1-3.

• Questions 23-28 are similar to Examples 5 and 6.

• Questions 29 and 30 are similar to Example 7.

Use the diagram to fill in the blanks below.

1. tan D = ??

2. sin F = ??

3. tan F = ??

4. cos F = ??

5. sin D = ??

6. cos D = ??

From questions 1-6, we can conclude the following. Fill in the blanks.

7. cos = sin F and sin = cos F.

8. tan D and tan F are _________ of each other.

Use your calculator to find the value of each trig function below. Round to four decimal places.

9. sin 24◦

10. cos 45◦

11. tan 88◦

12. sin 43◦

199 www.ck12.org

13. tan 12◦

14. cos 79◦

15. sin 82◦

16. tan 45◦

Find the sine, cosine and tangent of ∠A. Reduce all fractions and radicals.

17.

18.

19.

20.

21.

22.

Find the length of the missing sides. Round your answers to the nearest tenth.

www.ck12.org 200

23.

24.

25.

26.

27.

28.

29. Kristin is swimming in the ocean and notices a coral reef below her. The angle of depression is 35◦

and the depth of the ocean, at that point is 250 feet. How far away is she from the reef?

30. The Leaning Tower of Piza currently “leans” at a 4◦ angle and has a vertical height of 55.86 meters.

How tall was the tower when it was originally built?

201 www.ck12.org

Review Queue Answers

1. The hypotenuse is 14

√

2.

2. No, 82 + 162 < 202, the triangle is obtuse.

3. 30◦, 60◦, and 90◦ refer to the angle measures in the special right triangle.

4.6 Inverse Trigonometric Ratios

Learning Objectives

• Use the inverse trigonometric ratios to find an angle in a right triangle.

• Solve a right triangle.

Review Queue

Find the lengths of the missing sides. Round your answer to the nearest tenth.

1.

2.

3. Draw an isosceles right triangle with legs of length 3. What is the hypotenuse?

4. Use the triangle from #3, to find the sine, cosine, and tangent of 45◦.

www.ck12.org 202

Know What? The longest escalator in North America is at the Wheaton Metro Station in Maryland. It

is 230 feet long and is 115 ft. high. What is the angle of elevation, x◦, of this escalator?

Inverse Trigonometric Ratios

In mathematics, the word inverse means “undo.” For example, addition and subtraction are inverses of

each other because one undoes the other. When we apply inverses to the trigonometric ratios, we can find

acute angle measures as long as we are given two sides.

Inverse Tangent: Labeled tan−1, the “-1” means inverse.

tan−1

(

b

a

)

= m∠B tan−1

(a

b

)

= m∠A

Inverse Sine: Labeled sin−1.

sin−1

(

b

c

)

= m∠B sin−1

(a

c

)

= m∠A

Inverse Cosine: Labeled cos−1.

cos−1

(a

c

)

= m∠B cos−1

(

b

c

)

= m∠A

In order to find the measure of the angles, you will need you use your calculator. On most scientific and

graphing calculators, the buttons look like [SIN−1], [COS−1], and [TAN−1]. You might also have to hit a

shift or 2nd button to access these functions.

Example 1: Use the sides of the triangle and your calculator to find the value of ∠A. Round your answer

to the nearest tenth of a degree.

203 www.ck12.org

Solution: In reference to ∠A, we are given the opposite leg and the adjacent leg. This means we should

use the tangent ratio.

tan A = 2025 = 45 . So, tan−1 45 = m∠A. Now, use your calculator.

If you are using a TI-83 or 84, the keystrokes would be: [2nd][TAN]

(

4

5

)

[ENTER] and the screen looks like:

m∠A = 38.7◦

Example 2: ∠A is an acute angle in a right triangle. Find m∠A to the nearest tenth of a degree.

a) sin A = 0.68

b) cos A = 0.85

c) tan A = 0.34

Solution:

a) m∠A = sin−1 0.68 = 42.8◦

b) m∠A = cos−1 0.85 = 31.8◦

c) m∠A = tan−1 0.34 = 18.8◦

Solving Triangles

To solve a right triangle, you need to find all sides and angles in a right triangle, using sine, cosine or

tangent, inverse sine, inverse cosine, or inverse tangent, or the Pythagorean Theorem.

Example 3: Solve the right triangle.

Solution: To solve this right triangle, we need to find AB,m∠C and m∠B. Only use the values you are

given.

AB: Use the Pythagorean Theorem.

www.ck12.org 204

242 + AB2 = 302

576 + AB2 = 900

AB2 = 324

AB =

√

324 = 18

m∠B: Use the inverse sine ratio.

sin B = 24

30

= 4

5

sin−1

(4

5

)

= 53.1◦ = m∠B

m∠C: Use the inverse cosine ratio.

cosC = 24

30

= 4

5

−→ cos−1

(4

5

)

= 36.9◦ = m∠C

Example 4: Solve the right triangle.

Solution: To solve this right triangle, we need to find AB, BC and m∠A.

AB: Use sine ratio.

sin 62◦ = 25

AB

AB = 25sin 62◦

AB ≈ 28.31

BC: Use tangent ratio.

tan 62◦ = 25

BC

BC = 25tan 62◦

BC ≈ 13.30

m∠A: Use Triangle Sum Theorem

62◦ + 90◦ + m∠A = 180◦

m∠A = 28◦

Example 5: Solve the right triangle.

205 www.ck12.org

Solution: The two acute angles are congruent, making them both 45◦. This is a 45-45-90 triangle. You

can use the trigonometric ratios or the special right triangle ratios.

Trigonometric Ratios

tan 45◦ = 15

BC

sin 45◦ = 15

AC

BC = 15tan 45◦ = 15 AC =

15

sin 45◦ ≈ 21.21

45-45-90 Triangle Ratios

BC = AB = 15, AC = 15

√

2 ≈ 21.21

Real-Life Situations

Example 6: A 25 foot tall flagpole casts a 42 feet shadow. What is the angle that the sun hits the

flagpole?

Solution: Draw a picture. The angle that the sun hits the flagpole is x◦. We need to use the inverse

tangent ratio.

tan x = 42

25

tan−1 42

25

≈ 59.2◦ = x

Example 7: Elise is standing on top of a 50 foot building and sees her friend, Molly. If Molly is 35 feet

away from the base of the building, what is the angle of depression from Elise to Molly? Elise’s eye height

is 4.5 feet.

Solution: Because of parallel lines, the angle of depression is equal to the angle at Molly, or x◦. We can

use the inverse tangent ratio.

tan−1

(54.5

30

)

= 61.2◦ = x

www.ck12.org 206

Know What? Revisited To find the escalator’s angle of elevation, use the inverse sine.

sin−1

(115

230

)

= 30◦ The angle of elevation is 30◦.

Review Questions

• Questions 1-6 are similar to Example 1.

• Questions 7-12 are similar to Example 2.

• Questions13-21 are similar to Examples 3 and 4.

• Questions 22-24 are similar to Examples 6 and 7.

• Questions 25-30 are a review of the trigonometric ratios.

Use your calculator to find m∠A to the nearest tenth of a degree.

1.

2.

3.

207 www.ck12.org

4.

5.

6.

Let ∠A be an acute angle in a right triangle. Find m∠A to the nearest tenth of a degree.

7. sin A = 0.5684

8. cos A = 0.1234

9. tan A = 2.78

10. cos−1 0.9845

11. tan−1 15.93

12. sin−1 0.7851

Solving the following right triangles. Find all missing sides and angles. Round any decimal answers to the

nearest tenth.

13.

14.

15.

www.ck12.org 208

16.

17.

18.

19.

20.

21.

Real-Life Situations Use what you know about right triangles to solve for the missing angle. If needed,

draw a picture. Round all answers to the nearest tenth of a degree.

22. A 75 foot building casts an 82 foot shadow. What is the angle that the sun hits the building?

23. Over 2 miles (horizontal), a road rises 300 feet (vertical). What is the angle of elevation?

24. A boat is sailing and spots a shipwreck 650 feet below the water. A diver jumps from the boat and

swims 935 feet to reach the wreck. What is the angle of depression from the boat to the shipwreck?

Examining Patterns Below is a table that shows the sine, cosine, and tangent values for eight different

angle measures. Answer the following questions.

209 www.ck12.org

Table 4.2:

10◦ 20◦ 30◦ 40◦ 50◦ 60◦ 70◦ 80◦

Sine 0.1736 0.3420 0.5 0.6428 0.7660 0.8660 0.9397 0.9848

Cosine 0.9848 0.9397 0.8660 0.7660 0.6428 0.5 0.3420 0.1736

Tangent 0.1763 0.3640 0.5774 0.8391 1.1918 1.7321 2.7475 5.6713

25. What value is equal to sin 40◦?

26. What value is equal to cos 70◦?

27. Describe what happens to the sine values as the angle measures increase.

28. Describe what happens to the cosine values as the angle measures increase.

29. What two numbers are the sine and cosine values between?

30. Find tan 85◦, tan 89◦, and tan 89.5◦ using your calculator. Now, describe what happens to the tangent

values as the angle measures increase.

Review Queue Answers

1. sin 36◦ = y7 cos 36◦ = x7

y = 4.11 x = 5.66

2. cos 12.7◦ = 40x tan 12.7◦ =

y

40

x = 41.00 y = 9.01

3.

4. sin 45◦ = 3

3

√

2

=

√

2

2

cos 45◦ = 3

3

√

2

=

√

2

2

tan 45◦ = 33 = 1

4.7 Chapter 8 Review

Keywords & Theorems

The Pythagorean Theorem

• Pythagorean Theorem

• Pythagorean Triple

• Distance Formula

The Pythagorean Theorem Converse

• Pythagorean Theorem Converse

• Theorem 8-3

www.ck12.org 210

• Theorem 8-4

Similar Right Triangles

• Theorem 8-5

• Geometric Mean

Special Right Triangles

• Isosceles Right (45-45-90) Triangle

• 30-60-90 Triangle

• 45-45-90 Theorem

• 30-60-90 Theorem

Tangent, Sine and Cosine Ratios

• Trigonometry

• Adjacent (Leg)

• Opposite (Leg)

• Sine Ratio

• Cosine Ratio

• Tangent Ratio

• Angle of Depression

• Angle of Elevation

Solving Right Triangles

• Inverse Tangent

• Inverse Sine

• Inverse Cosine

Review

Fill in the blanks using right triangle 4ABC.

1. a2 + 2 = c2

2. sin = bc

3. tan = fd

4. cos = bc

5. tan−1

( f

e

)

=

211 www.ck12.org

6. sin−1

( f

b

)

=

7. 2 + d2 = b2

8. ?b = bc

9. e? = ?c

10. df =

f

?

Solve the following right triangles using the Pythagorean Theorem, the trigonometric ratios, and the inverse

trigonometric ratios. When possible, simplify the radical. If not, round all decimal answers to the nearest

tenth.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

www.ck12.org 212

18.

19.

Determine if the following lengths make an acute, right, or obtuse triangle. If they make a right triangle,

determine if the lengths are a Pythagorean triple.

20. 11, 12, 13

21. 16, 30, 34

22. 20, 25, 42

23. 10

√

6, 30, 10

√

15

24. 22, 25, 31

25. 47, 27, 35

Find the value of x.

26.

27.

28.

29. The angle of elevation from the base of a mountain to its peak is 76◦. If its height is 2500 feet, what

is the length to reach the top? Round the answer to the nearest tenth.

30. Taylor is taking an aerial tour of San Francisco in a helicopter. He spots AT&T Park (baseball

stadium) at a horizontal distance of 850 feet and down (vertical) 475 feet. What is the angle of

depression from the helicopter to the park? Round the answer to the nearest tenth.

213 www.ck12.org

Texas Instruments Resources

In the CK-12 Texas Instruments Geometry FlexBook, there are graphing calculator activities

designed to supplement the objectives for some of the lessons in this chapter. See http:

//www.ck12.org/flexr/chapter/9693.

4.8 Study Guide

Keywords: Define, write theorems, and/or draw a diagram for each word below.

1st Section: The Pythagorean Theorem

Pythagorean Theorem

Pythagorean Triple

Distance Formula

Homework:

2nd Section: The Pythagorean Theorem Converse

Pythagorean Theorem Converse

Theorem 8-3

Theorem 8-4

Homework:

3rd Section: Similar Right Triangles

Theorem 8-5

Geometric Mean

Homework:

www.ck12.org 214

4th Section: Special Right Triangles

Isosceles Right (45-45-90) Triangle

30-60-90 Triangle

45-45-90 Theorem

30-60-90 Theorem

Homework:

5th Section: Tangent, Sine and Cosine Ratios

Trigonometry

Adjacent (Leg)

Opposite (Leg)

Sine Ratio

Cosine Ratio

Tangent Ratio

Angle of Depression

Angle of Elevation

Homework:

6th Section: Solving Right Triangles

Inverse Tangent

215 www.ck12.org

Inverse Sine

Inverse Cosine

Solving Right Triangles

Homework:

www.ck12.org 216

Chapter 5

Circles

First, we will define all the parts of circles and explore the properties of tangent lines, arcs, inscribed

angles, and chords. Next, we will learn about angles and segments that are formed by chords, tangents

and secants. Lastly, we will place circles in the coordinate plane and find the equation of and graph circles.

5.1 Parts of Circles & Tangent Lines

Learning Objectives

• Define the parts of a circle.

• Discover the properties of tangent lines.

Review Queue

1. Find the equation of the line with m = 25 and y−intercept of 4.

2. Find the equation of the line with m = −2 and passes through (4, -5).

3. Find the equation of the line that passes though (6, 2) and (-3, -1).

4. Find the equation of the line perpendicular to the line in #2 and passes through (-8, 11).

Know What? The clock to the right is an ancient astronomical clock in Prague. It has a large background

circle that tells the local time and the “ancient time” and the smaller circle rotates to show the current

astrological sign. The yellow point is the center of the larger clock. How does the orange line relate to the

small and large circle? How does the hand with the moon on it relate to both circles?

217 www.ck12.org

Defining Terms

Circle: The set of all points that are the same distance away from a specific point, called the center.

The center of the circle is point A. We call this circle, “circle A,” and it is labeled

⊙

A.

Radii (the plural of radius) are line segments. There are infinitely many radii in any circle and they are

all equal.

Radius: The distance from the center to the circle.

Chord: A line segment whose endpoints are on a circle.

Diameter: A chord that passes through the center of the circle.

Secant: A line that intersects a circle in two points.

The tangent ray −→TP and tangent segment TP are also called tangents.

The length of a diameter is two times the length of a radius.

Tangent: A line that intersects a circle in exactly one point.

Point of Tangency: The point where the tangent line touches the circle.

Example 1: Find the parts of

⊙

A that best fit each description.

a) A radius

b) A chord

www.ck12.org 218

c) A tangent line

d) A point of tangency

e) A diameter

f) A secant

Solution:

a) HA or AF

b) CD, HF, or DG

c) ←→BJ

d) Point H

e) HF

f) ←→BD

Coplanar Circles

Example 2: Draw an example of how two circles can intersect with no, one and two points of intersection.

You will make three separate drawings.

Solution:

Tangent Circles: When two circles intersect at one point.

Concentric Circles: When two circles have the same center, but different radii.

Congruent Circles: Two circles with the same radius, but different centers.

If two circles have different radii, they are similar. All circles are similar.

Example 3: Determine if any of the following circles are congruent.

219 www.ck12.org

Solution: From each center, count the units to the circle. It is easiest to count vertically or horizontally.

Doing this, we have:

Radius of

⊙

A = 3 units

Radius of

⊙

B = 4 units

Radius of

⊙

C = 3 units

From these measurements, we see that

⊙

A

⊙

C.

Notice the circles are congruent. The lengths of the radii are equal.

Internally & Externally Tangent

If two circles are tangent to each other, then they are internally or externally tangent.

Internally Tangent Circles: When two circles are tangent and one is inside the other.

Externally Tangent Circles: When two circles are tangent and next to each other.

Internally Tangent

Externally Tangent

If circles are not tangent, they can still share a tangent line, called a common tangent.

www.ck12.org 220

Common Internal Tangent: A line that is tangent to two circles and passes between the circles.

Common External Tangent: A line that is tangent to two circles and stays on the top or bottom of

both circles.

Common Internal Tangent

Common External Tangent

Tangents and Radii

Let’s investigate a tangent line and the radius drawn to the point of tangency.

Investigation 9-1: Tangent Line and Radius Property

Tools Needed: compass, ruler, pencil, paper, protractor

1. Using your compass, draw a circle. Locate the center and draw a radius. Label the radius AB, with

A as the center.

2. Draw a tangent line, ←→BC, where B is the point of tangency. To draw a tangent line, take your ruler

and line it up with point B. B must be the only point on the circle that the line passes through.

3. Find m∠ABC.

Tangent to a Circle Theorem: A line is tangent to a circle if and only if the line is perpendicular to

the radius drawn to the point of tangency.

221 www.ck12.org

←→

BC is tangent at point B if and only if ←→BC ⊥ AB.

This theorem uses the words “if and only if,” making it a biconditional statement, which means the converse

of this theorem is also true.

Example 4: In

⊙

A, CB is tangent at point B. Find AC. Reduce any radicals.

Solution: CB is tangent, so AB ⊥ CB and 4ABC a right triangle. Use the Pythagorean Theorem to find

AC.

52 + 82 = AC2

25 + 64 = AC2

89 = AC2

AC =

√

89

Example 5: Find DC, in

⊙

A. Round your answer to the nearest hundredth.

Solution: DC = AC − AD

DC =

√

89 − 5 ≈ 4.43

Example 6: Determine if the triangle below is a right triangle.

Solution: Again, use the Pythagorean Theorem. 4

√

10 is the longest side, so it will be c.

82 + 102 ?

(

4

√

10

)2

64 + 100 , 160

4ABC is not a right triangle. From this, we also find that CB is not tangent to

⊙

A.

Example 7: Find AB in

⊙

A and

⊙

B. Reduce the radical.

www.ck12.org 222

Solution: AD ⊥ DC and DC ⊥ CB. Draw in BE, so EDCB is a rectangle. Use the Pythagorean Theorem

to find AB.

52 + 552 = AC2

25 + 3025 = AC2

3050 = AC2

AC =

√

3050 = 5

√

122

Tangent Segments

Theorem 9-2: If two tangent segments are drawn from the same external point, then they are equal.

BC and DC have C as an endpoint and are tangent; BC DC.

Example 8: Find the perimeter of 4ABC.

223 www.ck12.org

Solution: AE = AD, EB = BF, and CF = CD. Therefore, the perimeter of 4ABC = 6+6+4+4+7+7 = 34.

⊙

G is inscribed in 4ABC. A circle is inscribed in a polygon, if every side of the polygon is tangent to

the circle.

Example 9: If D and A are the centers and AE is tangent to both circles, find DC.

Solution: AE ⊥ DE and AE ⊥ AC and 4ABC ∼ 4DBE.

To find DB, use the Pythagorean Theorem.

102 + 242 = DB2

100 + 576 = 676

DB =

√

676 = 26

To find BC, use similar triangles. 510 = BC26 −→ BC = 13. DC = AB + BC = 26 + 13 = 39

Example 10: Algebra Connection Find the value of x.

Solution: AB CB by Theorem 9-2. Set AB = CB and solve for x.

4x − 9 = 15

4x = 24

x = 6

Know What? Revisited The orange line is a diameter of the smaller circle. Since this line passes

through the center of the larger circle (yellow point), it is part of one of its diameters. The “moon” hand

is a diameter of the larger circle, but a secant of the smaller circle.

Review Questions

• Questions 1-9 are similar to Example 1.

• Questions 10-12 are similar to Example 2.

• Questions 13-17 are similar to Example 3.

• Questions 18-20 are similar to Example 6.

• Questions 21-26 are similar to Example 4, 5, 7, and 10.

• Questions 27-31 are similar to Example 9.

• Questions 32-37 are similar to Example 8.

www.ck12.org 224

• Question 38 and 39 use the proof of Theorem 9-2.

• Question 40 uses Theorem 9-2.

Determine which term best describes each of the following parts of

⊙

P.

1. KG

2. ←→FH

3. KH

4. E

5. ←→BK

6. ←→CF

7. A

8. JG

9. What is the longest chord in any circle?

Copy each pair of circles. Draw in all common tangents.

10.

11.

12.

225 www.ck12.org

Coordinate Geometry Use the graph below to answer the following questions.

13. Find the radius of each circle.

14. Are any circles congruent? How do you know?

15. Find all the common tangents for

⊙

B and

⊙

C.

16.

⊙

C and

⊙

E are externally tangent. What is CE?

17. Find the equation of CE.

Determine whether the given segment is tangent to

⊙

K.

18.

19.

20.

Algebra Connection Find the value of the indicated length(s) in

⊙

C. A and B are points of tangency.

Simplify all radicals.

www.ck12.org 226

21.

22.

23.

24.

25.

26.

A and B are points of tangency for

⊙

C and

⊙

D.

227 www.ck12.org

27. Is 4AEC ∼ 4BED? Why?

28. Find CE.

29. Find BE.

30. Find ED.

31. Find BC and AD.

⊙

A is inscribed in BDFH.

32. Find the perimeter of BDFH.

33. What type of quadrilateral is BDFH? How do you know?

34. Draw a circle inscribed in a square. If the radius of the circle is 5, what is the perimeter of the

square?

35. Can a circle be inscribed in a rectangle? If so, draw it. If not, explain.

36. Draw a triangle with two sides tangent to a circle, but the third side is not.

37. Can a circle be inscribed in an obtuse triangle? If so, draw it. If not, explain.

38. Fill in the blanks in the proof of Theorem 9-2.

Given: AB and CB with points of tangency at A and C.

AD and DC are radii.

Prove: AB CB

www.ck12.org 228

Table 5.1:

Statement Reason

1.

2. AD DC

3. DA ⊥ AB and DC ⊥ CB

4. Definition of perpendicular lines

5. Connecting two existing points

6. 4ADB and 4DCB are right triangles

7. DB DB

8. 4ABD 4CBD

9. AB CB

39. Fill in the blanks, using the proof from #38.

(a) ABCD is a _____________ (type of quadrilateral).

(b) The line that connects the ___________ and the external point B __________ ∠ABC.

40. Points A, B, and C are points of tangency for the three tangent circles. Explain why AT BT CT .

Review Queue Answers

1. y = 25 x + 4

2. y = −2x + 3

3. m = 2−(−1)6−(−3) = 39 = 13

y = 13 x + b→ plug in(6, 2)

2 = 13(6) + b

2 = 2 + b→ b = 0

y = 13 x

4. m⊥ = −3

11 = −3(−8) + b

11 = 24 + b→ b = −13

y = −3x − 13

5.2 Properties of Arcs

Learning Objectives

• Define and measure central angles, minor arcs, and major arcs.

229 www.ck12.org

Review Queue

1. What kind of triangle is 4ABC?

2. How does BD relate to 4ABC?

3. Find m∠ABC and m∠ABD.

Round to the nearest tenth. Use the trig ratios.

4. Find AD.

5. Find AC.

Know What? The Ferris wheel to the right has equally spaced seats, such that the central angle is 20◦.

How many seats are on this ride? Why do you think it is important to have equally spaced seats on a

Ferris wheel?

Central Angles & Arcs

Recall that a straight angle is 180◦. If take two straight angles and put one on top of the other, we would

have a circle. This means that a circle has 360◦, 180◦ + 180◦. This also means that a semicircle, or half

circle, is 180◦.

Arc: A section of the circle.

Semicircle: An arc that measures 180◦.

www.ck12.org 230

To label an arc, place a curve above the endpoints. You may want to use 3 points to clarify.

ÊHG and ̂EJG are semicircles mÊHG = 180◦

Central Angle: The angle formed by two radii and its vertex at the center of the circle.

Minor Arc: An arc that is less than 180◦

Major Arc: An arc that is greater than 180◦. Always use 3 letters to label a major arc.

The central angle is ∠BAC.

The minor arc is ̂BC.

The major arc is B̂DC.

Every central angle divides a circle into two arcs.

An arc can be measured in degrees or in a linear measure (cm, ft, etc.). In this chapter we will use degree

measure. The measure of the minor arc is the same as the measure of the central angle that

corresponds to it. The measure of the major arc is 360◦ minus the measure of the minor arc.

Example 1: Find m̂AB and mÂDB in

⊙

C.

Solution: m̂AB = m ̂ACB. So, m̂AB = 102◦.

mÂDB = 360◦ − m̂AB = 360◦ − 102◦ = 258◦

Example 2: Find the measures of the arcs in

⊙

A. EB is a diameter.

231 www.ck12.org

Solution: Because EB is a diameter, m∠EAB = 180◦. Each arc is the same as its corresponding central

angle.

m̂BF = m∠FAB = 60◦

m̂EF = m∠EAF = 120◦ → 180◦ − 60◦

m̂ED = m∠EAD = 38◦ → 180◦ − 90◦ − 52◦

m̂DC = m∠DAC = 90◦

m̂BC = m∠BAC = 52◦

Congruent Arcs: Two arcs are congruent if their central angles are congruent.

Example 3: List the congruent arcs in

⊙

C below. AB and DE are diameters.

Solution: ∠ACD = ∠ECB because they are vertical angles. ∠DCB = ∠ACE because they are also vertical

angles.

̂AD ̂EB and ̂AE ̂DB

Example 4: Are the blue arcs congruent? Explain why or why not.

a)

b)

www.ck12.org 232

Solution:

a) ̂AD ̂BC because they have the same central angle measure and in the same circle.

b) The two arcs have the same measure, but are not congruent because the circles have different radii.

Arc Addition Postulate

Just like the Angle Addition Postulate and the Segment Addition Postulate, there is an Arc Addition

Postulate.

Arc Addition Postulate: The measure of the arc formed by two adjacent arcs is the sum of the measures

of the two arcs.

m̂AD + m̂DB = mÂDB

Example 5: Find the measure of the arcs in

⊙

A. EB is a diameter.

a) mF̂ED

b) mĈDF

c) mD̂FC

Solution: Use the Arc Addition Postulate.

a) mF̂ED = m̂FE + m̂ED = 120◦ + 38◦ = 158◦

b) mĈDF = m̂CD + m̂DE + m̂EF = 90◦ + 38◦ + 120◦ = 248◦

c) mD̂FC = 38◦ + 120◦ + 60◦ + 52◦ = 270◦

Example 6: Algebra Connection Find the value of x for

⊙

C below.

233 www.ck12.org

Solution:

m̂AB + m̂AD + m̂DB = 360◦

(4x + 15)◦ + 92◦ + (6x + 3)◦ = 360◦

10x + 110◦ = 360◦

10x = 250◦

x = 25◦

Know What? Revisited Because the seats are 20◦ apart, there will be 360◦20◦ = 18 seats. It is important

to have the seats evenly spaced for the balance of the Ferris wheel.

Review Questions

• Questions 1-6 use the definition of minor arc, major arc, and semicircle.

• Question 7 is similar to Example 3.

• Questions 8 and 9 are similar to Example 5.

• Questions 10-15 are similar to Example 1.

• Questions 16-18 are similar to Example 4.

• Questions 19-26 are similar to Example 2 and 5.

• Questions 27-29 are similar to Example 6.

• Question 30 is a challenge.

Determine if the arcs below are a minor arc, major arc, or semicircle of

⊙

G. EB is a diameter.

1. ̂AB

2. ÂBD

3. B̂CE

4. ĈAE

5. ̂ABC

6. ̂EAB

www.ck12.org 234

7. Are there any congruent arcs? If so, list them.

8. If m̂BC = 48◦, find m̂CD.

9. Using #8, find mĈAE.

Find the measure of the minor arc and the major arc in each circle below.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

235 www.ck12.org

Determine if the blue arcs are congruent. If so, state why.

16.

17.

18.

Find the measure of the indicated arcs or central angles in

⊙

A. DG is a diameter.

19. ̂DE

20. ̂DC

21. ̂GAB

22. ̂FG

23. ÊDB

24. ̂EAB

25. D̂CF

26. D̂BE

Algebra Connection Find the measure of x in

⊙

P.

www.ck12.org 236

27.

28.

29.

30. Challenge What can you conclude about

⊙

A and

⊙

B?

Review Queue Answers

1. isosceles

2. BD is the angle bisector of ∠ABC and the perpendicular bisector of AC.

3. m∠ABC = 40◦,m∠ABD = 25◦

4. cos 70◦ = AD9 → AD = 9 · cos 70◦ = 3.1

5. AC = 2 · AD = 2 · 3.1 = 6.2

5.3 Properties of Chords

Learning Objectives

• Find the lengths of chords in a circle.

• Discover properties of chords and arcs.

237 www.ck12.org

Review Queue

1. Draw a chord in a circle.

2. Draw a diameter in the circle from #1. Is a diameter a chord?

3. 4ABC is an equilateral triangle in

⊙

A. Find m̂BC and mB̂DC.

4. 4ABC and 4ADE are equilateral triangles in

⊙

A. List a pair of congruent arcs and chords.

Know What? To the right is the Gran Teatro Falla, in Cadiz, Andalucía, Spain. Notice the five windows,

A − E.

⊙

A

⊙

E and

⊙

B

⊙

C

⊙

D. Each window is topped with a 240◦ arc. The gold chord in

each circle connects the rectangular portion of the window to the circle. Which chords are congruent?

Recall from the first section, a chord is a line segment whose endpoints are on a circle. A diameter is the

longest chord in a circle.

Congruent Chords & Congruent Arcs

From #4 in the Review Queue above, we noticed that BC DE and ̂BC ̂DE.

Theorem 9-3: In the same circle or congruent circles, minor arcs are congruent if and only if their

corresponding chords are congruent.

www.ck12.org 238

In both of these pictures, BE CD and ̂BE ̂CD.

In the second circle, 4BAE 4CAD by SAS.

Example 1: Use

⊙

A to answer the following.

a) If m̂BD = 125◦, find m̂CD.

b) If m̂BC = 80◦, find m̂CD.

Solution:

a) BD = CD, which means the arcs are equal too. m̂CD = 125◦.

b) m̂CD m̂BD because BD = CD.

m̂BC + m̂CD + m̂BD = 360◦

80◦ + 2m̂CD = 360◦

2m̂CD = 280◦

m̂CD = 140◦

Investigation 9-2: Perpendicular Bisector of a Chord

Tools Needed: paper, pencil, compass, ruler

1. Draw a circle. Label the center A.

2. Draw a chord. Label it BC.

239 www.ck12.org

3. Find the midpoint of BC using a ruler. Label it D.

4. Connect A and D to form a diameter. How does AD relate to BC?

Theorem 9-4: The perpendicular bisector of a chord is also a diameter.

If AD ⊥ BC and BD DC then EF is a diameter.

If EF ⊥ BC, then BD DC and ̂BE ̂EC.

Theorem 9-5: If a diameter is perpendicular to a chord, then the diameter bisects the chord and its

corresponding arc.

Example 2: Find the value of x and y.

Solution: The diameter perpendicular to the chord. From Theorem 9-5, x = 6 and y = 75◦.

Example 3: Is the converse of Theorem 9-4 true?

www.ck12.org 240

Solution: The converse of Theorem 9-4 would be: A diameter is also the perpendicular bisector of a chord.

This is not true, a diameter cannot always be a perpendicular bisector to every chord. See the picture.

Example 4: Algebra Connection Find the value of x and y.

Solution: The diameter is perpendicular to the chord, which means it bisects the chord and the arc. Set

up an equation for x and y.

(3x − 4)◦ = (5x − 18)◦ y + 4 = 2y + 1

14◦ = 2x 3 = y

7◦ = x

Equidistant Congruent Chords

Investigation 9-3: Properties of Congruent Chords

Tools Needed: pencil, paper, compass, ruler

1. Draw a circle with a radius of 2 inches and two chords that are both 3 inches. Label like the picture

to the right. This diagram is drawn to scale.

2. From the center, draw the perpendicular segment to AB and CD. You can use Investigation 3-2

241 www.ck12.org

3. Erase the arc marks and lines beyond the points of intersection, leaving FE and EG. Find the

measure of these segments. What do you notice?

Theorem 9-6: In the same circle or congruent circles, two chords are congruent if and only if they are

equidistant from the center.

The shortest distance from any point to a line is the perpendicular line between them.

If FE = EG and EF ⊥ EG, then AB and CD are equidistant to the center and AB CD.

Example 5: Algebra Connection Find the value of x.

Solution: Because the distance from the center to the chords is congruent and perpendicular to the chords,

the chords are equal.

6x − 7 = 35

6x = 42

x = 7

Example 6: BD = 12 and AC = 3 in

⊙

A. Find the radius.

www.ck12.org 242

Solution: First find the radius. AB is a radius, so we can use the right triangle 4ABC, so AB is the

hypotenuse. From Theorem 9-5, BC = 6.

32 + 62 = AB2

9 + 36 = AB2

AB =

√

45 = 3

√

5

Example 7: Find m̂BD from Example 6.

Solution: First, find the corresponding central angle, ∠BAD. We can find m∠BAC using the tangent ratio.

Then, multiply m∠BAC by 2 for m∠BAD and m̂BD.

tan−1

(6

3

)

= m∠BAC

m∠BAC ≈ 63.43◦

m∠BAD ≈ 2 · 63.43◦ ≈ 126.86◦ ≈ m̂BD

Know What? Revisited In the picture, the chords from

⊙

A and

⊙

E are congruent and the chords

from

⊙

B,

⊙

C, and

⊙

D are also congruent. We know this from Theorem 9-3.

Review Questions

• Questions 1-3 use the theorems from this section and similar to Example 3.

• Questions 4-10 use the definitions and theorems from this section.

• Questions 11-16 are similar to Example 1 and 2.

• Questions 17-25 are similar to Examples 2, 4, 5, and 6.

• Questions 26 and 27 are similar to Example 7.

• Questions 28-30 use the theorems from this section.

1. Two chords in a circle are perpendicular and congruent. Does one of them have to be a diameter?

Why or why not?

2. Write the converse of Theorem 9-5. Is it true? If not, draw a counterexample.

3. Write the original and converse statements from Theorem 9-3 and Theorem 9-6.

Fill in the blanks.

243 www.ck12.org

4. DF

5. ̂AC

6. ̂DJ

7. EJ

8. ∠AGH

9. ∠DGF

10. List all the congruent radii in

⊙

G.

Find the value of the indicated arc in

⊙

A.

11. m̂BC

12. m̂BD

13. m̂BC

www.ck12.org 244

14. m̂BD

15. m̂BD

16. m̂BD

Algebra Connection Find the value of x and/or y.

17.

18.

245 www.ck12.org

19.

20. AB = 32

21.

22.

23.

24.

25. AB = 20

www.ck12.org 246

26. Find m̂AB in Question 20. Round your answer to the nearest tenth of a degree.

27. Find m̂AB in Question 25. Round your answer to the nearest tenth of a degree.

In problems 28-30, what can you conclude about the picture? State a theorem that justifies your answer.

You may assume that A is the center of the circle.

28.

29.

30.

Review Queue Answers

1 & 2. Answers will vary

247 www.ck12.org

3. m̂BC = 60◦,mB̂DC = 300◦

4. BC DE and ̂BC ̂DE

5.4 Inscribed Angles

Learning Objectives

• Find the measure of inscribed angles and the arcs they intercept.

Review Queue

We are going to use #14 from the homework in the previous section.

1. What is the measure of each angle in the triangle? How do you know?

2. What do you know about the three arcs?

3. What is the measure of each arc?

Know What? The closest you can get to the White House are the walking trails on the far right. You

want to get as close as you can (on the trail) to the fence to take a picture (you were not allowed to walk

on the grass). Where else can you take a picture from to get the same frame of the White House? Your

line of sight in the camera is marked in the picture as the grey lines.

www.ck12.org 248

Inscribed Angles

In addition to central angles, we will now learn about inscribed angles in circles.

Inscribed Angle: An angle with its vertex on the circle and sides are chords.

Intercepted Arc: The arc that is inside the inscribed angle and endpoints are on the angle.

The vertex of an inscribed angle can be anywhere on the circle as long as its sides intersect the circle to

form an intercepted arc.

Investigation 9-4: Measuring an Inscribed Angle

Tools Needed: pencil, paper, compass, ruler, protractor

1. Draw three circles with three different inscribed angles. Try to make all the angles different sizes.

2. Using your ruler, draw in the corresponding central angle for each angle and label each set of end-

points.

3. Using your protractor measure the six angles and determine if there is a relationship between the

central angle, the inscribed angle, and the intercepted arc.

249 www.ck12.org

m∠LAM = m∠NBP = m∠QCR =

m̂LM = m̂NP = m̂QR =

m∠LKM = m∠NOP = m∠QSR =

Inscribed Angle Theorem: The measure of an inscribed angle is half the measure of its intercepted arc.

m∠ADC = 1

2

m̂AC

m̂AC = 2m∠ADC

Example 1: Find m̂DC and m∠ADB.

Solution: From the Inscribed Angle Theorem:

m̂DC = 2 · 45◦ = 90◦

m∠ADB = 1

2

· 76◦ = 38◦

Example 2: Find m∠ADB and m∠ACB.

Solution: The intercepted arc for both angles is ̂AB. Therefore,

m∠ADB = 1

2

· 124◦ = 62◦

m∠ACB = 1

2

· 124◦ = 62◦

This example leads us to our next theorem.

www.ck12.org 250

Theorem 9-8: Inscribed angles that intercept the same arc are congruent.

∠ADB and ∠ACB intercept ̂AB, so m∠ADB = m∠ACB.

∠DAC and ∠DBC intercept ̂DC, so m∠DAC = m∠DBC.

Example 3: Find m∠DAB in

⊙

C.

Solution: C is the center, so DB is a diameter. ∠DAB endpoints are on the diameter, so the central angle

is 180◦.

m∠DAB = 1

2

· 180◦ = 90◦.

Theorem 9-9: An angle intercepts a semicircle if an only if it is a right angle.

∠DAB intercepts a semicircle, so m∠DAB = 90◦.

∠DAB is a right angle, so ̂DB is a semicircle.

Anytime a right angle is inscribed in a circle, the endpoints of the angle are the endpoints

of a diameter and the diameter is the hypotenuse.

Example 4: Find m∠PMN, m̂PN, m∠MNP, and m∠LNP.

251 www.ck12.org

Solution:

m∠PMN = m∠PLN = 68◦ by Theorem 9 − 8.

m̂PN = 2 · 68◦ = 136◦ from the Inscribed Angle Theorem.

m∠MNP = 90◦ by Theorem 9 − 9.

m∠LNP = 1

2

· 92◦ = 46◦ from the Inscribed Angle Theorem.

Inscribed Quadrilaterals

Inscribed Polygon: A polygon where every vertex is on a circle.

Investigation 9-5: Inscribing Quadrilaterals

Tools Needed: pencil, paper, compass, ruler, colored pencils, scissors

1. Draw a circle. Mark the center point A.

2. Place four points on the circle. Connect them to form a quadrilateral. Color in the 4 angles.

3. Cut out the quadrilateral. Then cut the diagonal CE, making two triangles.

www.ck12.org 252

4. Line up ∠B and ∠D so that they are next to each other. What do you notice?

By cutting the quadrilateral in half, we are able to show that ∠B and ∠D form a linear pair when they are

placed next to each other, making ∠B and ∠D supplementary.

Theorem 9-10: A quadrilateral is inscribed in a circle if and only if the opposite angles are supplementary.

If ABCD is inscribed in

⊙

E, then m∠A + m∠C = 180◦ and m∠B + m∠D = 180◦.

If m∠A + m∠C = 180◦ and m∠B + m∠D = 180◦, then ABCD is inscribed in

⊙

E.

Example 5: Find the value of the missing variables.

a)

b)

Solution:

253 www.ck12.org

a) x + 80◦ = 180◦ y + 71◦ = 180◦

x = 100◦ y = 109◦

b) z + 93◦ = 180◦ x = 12(58◦ + 106◦) y + 82◦ = 180◦

z = 87◦ x = 82◦ y = 98◦

Example 6: Algebra Connection Find x and y in the picture below.

Solution:

(7x + 1)◦ + 105◦ = 180◦ (4y + 14)◦ + (7y + 1)◦ = 180◦

7x + 106◦ = 180◦ 11y + 15◦ = 180◦

7x = 84◦ 11y = 165◦

x = 12◦ y = 15◦

Know What? Revisited You can take the picture from anywhere on the semicircular walking path, the

frame will be the same.

Review Questions

• Questions 1-8 use the vocabulary and theorems learned in this section.

• Questions 9-27 are similar to Examples 1-5.

• Questions 28-33 are similar to Example 6.

• Question 34 is a proof of the Inscribed Angle Theorem.

Fill in the blanks.

1. A(n) _______________ polygon has all its vertices on a circle.

2. An inscribed angle is ____________ the measure of the intercepted arc.

3. A central angle is ________________ the measure of the intercepted arc.

4. An angle inscribed in a ________________ is 90◦.

5. Two inscribed angles that intercept the same arc are _______________.

www.ck12.org 254

6. The _____________ angles of an inscribed quadrilateral are ________________.

7. The sides of an inscribed angle are ___________________.

8. Draw inscribed angle ∠JKL in

⊙

M. Then draw central angle ∠JML. How do the two angles relate?

Quadrilateral ABCD is inscribed in

⊙

E. Find:

9. m∠DBC

10. m̂BC

11. m̂AB

12. m∠ACD

13. m∠ADC

14. m∠ACB

Quadrilateral ABCD is inscribed in

⊙

E. Find:

15. m∠A

16. m∠B

17. m∠C

18. m∠D

Find the value of x and/or y in

⊙

A.

19.

255 www.ck12.org

20.

21.

22.

23.

24.

25.

www.ck12.org 256

26.

27.

Algebra Connection Solve for x.

28.

29.

30.

31.

257 www.ck12.org

32.

33.

34. Fill in the blanks of the Inscribed Angle Theorem proof.

Given: Inscribed ∠ABC and diameter BD

Prove: m∠ABC = 12m̂AC

Table 5.2:

Statement Reason

1. Inscribed ∠ABC and diameter BD

m∠ABE = x◦ and m∠CBE = y◦

2. x◦ + y◦ = m∠ABC

3. All radii are congruent

4. Definition of an isosceles triangle

5. m∠EAB = x◦ and m∠ECB = y◦

6. m∠AED = 2x◦ and m∠CED = 2y◦

7. m̂AD = 2x◦ and m̂DC = 2y◦

8. Arc Addition Postulate

9. m̂AC = 2x◦ + 2y◦

10. Distributive PoE

11. m̂AC = 2m∠ABC

12. m∠ABC = 12m̂AC

www.ck12.org 258

Review Queue Answers

1. 60◦, it is an equilateral triangle.

2. They are congruent because the chords are congruent.

3. 360◦3 = 120◦

5.5 Angles of Chords, Secants, and Tangents

Learning Objectives

• Find the measures of angles formed by chords, secants, and tangents.

Review Queue

1. What is m∠OML and m∠OPL? How do you know?

2. Find m∠MLP.

3. Find mM̂NP.

Know What? The sun’s rays hit the Earth such that the tangent rays determine when daytime and night

time are. If the arc that is exposed to sunlight is 178◦, what is the angle at which the sun’s rays hit the

earth (x◦)?

Angle on a Circle

When an angle is on a circle, the vertex is on the edge of the circle. One type of angle on a circle is the

inscribed angle, from the previous section. Another type of angle on a circle is one formed by a tangent

and a chord.

Investigation 9-6: The Measure of an Angle formed by a Tangent and a Chord

Tools Needed: pencil, paper, ruler, compass, protractor

1. Draw

⊙

A with chord BC and tangent line ←→ED with point of tangency C.

259 www.ck12.org

2. Draw in central angle ∠CAB. Find m∠CAB and m∠BCE.

3. Find m̂BC. How does the measure of this arc relate to m∠BCE?

Theorem 9-11: The measure of an angle formed by a chord and a tangent that intersect on the circle is

half the measure of the intercepted arc.

m∠DBA = 1

2

m̂AB

We now know that there are two types of angles that are half the measure of the intercepted arc; an

inscribed angle and an angle formed by a chord and a tangent.

Example 1: Find:

a) m∠BAD

b) m ̂AEB

www.ck12.org 260

Solution: Use Theorem 9-11.

a) m∠BAD = 12m̂AB = 12 · 124◦ = 62◦

b) m ̂AEB = 2 · m∠DAB = 2 · 133◦ = 266◦

Example 2: Find a, b, and c.

Solution:

50◦ + 45◦ + m∠a = 180◦ straight angle

m∠a = 85◦

m∠b = 1

2

· m̂AC

m̂AC = 2 · m∠EAC = 2 · 45◦ = 90◦

m∠b = 1

2

· 90◦ = 45◦

85◦ + 45◦ + m∠c = 180◦ Triangle Sum Theorem

m∠c = 50◦

From this example, we see that Theorem 9-8 is true for angles formed by a tangent and chord with the

vertex on the circle. If two angles, with their vertices on the circle, intercept the same arc then

the angles are congruent.

Angles inside a Circle

An angle is inside a circle when the vertex anywhere inside the circle, but not on the center.

Investigation 9-7: Find the Measure of an Angle inside a Circle

Tools Needed: pencil, paper, compass, ruler, protractor, colored pencils (optional)

1. Draw

⊙

A with chord BC and DE. Label the point of intersection P.

261 www.ck12.org

2. Draw central angles ∠DAB and ∠CAE. Use colored pencils, if desired.

3. Find m∠DPB, m∠DAB, and m∠CAE. Find m̂DB and m̂CE.

4. Find m̂DB+m̂CE2 .

5. What do you notice?

Theorem 9-12: The measure of the angle formed by two chords that intersect inside a circle is the average

of the measure of the intercepted arcs.

m∠SVR = 1

2

(

m̂SR + m̂TQ

)

= m

̂SR + m̂TQ

2

= m∠TVQ

m∠SVT = 1

2

(

m̂ST + m̂RQ

)

= m

̂ST + m̂RQ

2

= m∠RVQ

Example 3: Find x.

a)

b)

www.ck12.org 262

c)

Solution: Use Theorem 9-12 to write an equation.

a) x = 129◦+71◦2 = 200

◦

2 = 100

◦

b) 40◦ = 52◦+x2

80◦ = 52◦ + x

28◦ = x

c) x is supplementary to the angle that the average of the given intercepted arcs, y.

y = 19

◦ + 107◦

2

= 126

◦

2

= 63◦ x + 63◦ = 180◦; x = 117◦

Angles outside a Circle

An angle is outside a circle if the vertex of the angle is outside the circle and the sides are tangents or

secants. The possibilities are: an angle formed by two tangents, an angle formed by a tangent and a secant,

and an angle formed by two secants.

Investigation 9-8: Find the Measure of an Angle outside a Circle

Tools Needed: pencil, paper, ruler, compass, protractor, colored pencils (optional)

1. Draw three circles and label the centers A, B, and C. In

⊙

A draw two secant rays with the same

endpoint. In

⊙

B, draw two tangent rays with the same endpoint. In

⊙

C, draw a tangent ray and

a secant ray with the same endpoint. Label the points like the pictures below.

2. Draw in all the central angles. Using a protractor, measure the central angles and find the measures

of each intercepted arc.

3. Find m∠EDF, m∠MLN, and m∠RQS .

4. Find m̂EF−m̂GH2 , mM̂PN−m

̂MN

2 , and m

̂RS−m̂RT

2 . What do you notice?

263 www.ck12.org

Theorem 9-13: The measure of an angle formed by two secants, two tangents, or a secant and a tangent

from a point outside the circle is half the difference of the measures of the intercepted arcs.

m∠D = m

̂EF − m̂GH

2

m∠L = mM̂PN − m

̂MN

2

m∠Q = m

̂RS − m̂RT

2

Example 4: Find the measure of x.

a)

b)

c)

Solution: For all of the above problems we can use Theorem 9-13.

a) x = 125◦−27◦2 = 98

◦

2 = 49

◦

b) 40◦ is not the intercepted arc. The intercepted arc is 120◦, (360◦−200◦−40◦). x = 200◦−120◦2 = 80

◦

2 = 40

◦

c) Find the other intercepted arc, 360◦ − 265◦ = 95◦ x = 265◦−95◦2 = 170

◦

2 = 85

◦

Know What? Revisited From Theorem 9-13, we know x = 182◦−178◦2 = 4

◦

2 = 2

◦.

www.ck12.org 264

Review Questions

• Questions 1-3 use the definitions of tangent and secant lines.

• Questions 4-7 use the definition and theorems learned in this section.

• Questions 8-25 are similar to Examples 1-4.

• Questions 26 and 27 are similar to Example 4, but also a challenge.

• Questions 28 and 29 are fill-in-the-blank proofs of Theorems 9-12 and 9-13.

1. Draw two secants that intersect:

(a) inside a circle.

(b) on a circle.

(c) outside a circle.

2. Can two tangent lines intersect inside a circle? Why or why not?

3. Draw a tangent and a secant that intersect:

(a) on a circle.

(b) outside a circle.

Fill in the blanks.

4. If the vertex of an angle is on the _______________ of a circle, then its measure is ____-

___________ to the intercepted arc.

5. If the vertex of an angle is _______________ a circle, then its measure is the average of the

__________________ arcs.

6. If the vertex of an angle is ________ a circle, then its measure is ______________ the

intercepted arc.

7. If the vertex of an angle is ____________ a circle, then its measure is ___________ the

difference of the intercepted arcs.

For questions 8-25, find the value of the missing variable(s).

8.

9.

265 www.ck12.org

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

www.ck12.org 266

16.

17.

18.

19.

20.

21.

267 www.ck12.org

22.

23. y , 60◦

24.

25.

Challenge Solve for x.

26.

27.

28. Fill in the blanks of the proof for Theorem 9-12.

www.ck12.org 268

Given: Intersecting chords AC and BD.

Prove: m∠a = 12

(

m̂DC + m̂AB

)

Table 5.3:

Statement Reason

1. Intersecting chords AC and BD.

2. Draw BC Construction

3. m∠DBC = 12m̂DC

m∠ACB = 12m̂AB

4. m∠a = m∠DBC + m∠ACB

5. m∠a = 12m̂DC + 12m̂AB

29. Fill in the blanks of the proof for Theorem 9-13.

Given: Secant rays −→AB and −→AC

Prove: m∠a = 12

(

m̂BC − m̂DE

)

Table 5.4:

Statement Reason

1. Intersecting secants −→AB and −→AC.

2. Draw BE. Construction

269 www.ck12.org

Table 5.4: (continued)

Statement Reason

3. m∠BEC = 12m̂BC

m∠DBE = 12m̂DE

5. m∠a + m∠DBE = m∠BEC

6. Subtraction PoE

7. Substitution

8. m∠a = 12

(

m̂BC − m̂DE

)

Review Queue Answers

1. m∠OML = m∠OPL = 90◦ because a tangent line and a radius drawn to the point of tangency are

perpendicular.

2. 165◦ + m∠OML + m∠OPL + m∠MLP = 360◦

165◦ + 90◦ + 90◦ + m∠MLP = 360◦

m∠MLP = 15◦

3. mM̂NP = 360◦ − 165◦ = 195◦

5.6 Segments of Chords, Secants, and Tangents

Learning Objectives

• Find the lengths of segments within circles.

Review Queue

1. What do you know about m∠DAC and m∠DBC? Why?

2. What do you know about m∠AED and m∠BEC? Why?

3. Is 4AED ∼ 4BEC? How do you know?

4. If AE = 8, ED = 7, and BE = 6, find EC.

Know What? At a particular time during its orbit, the moon is 238,857 miles from Beijing, China. On

the same line, Yukon is 12,451 miles from Beijing. Drawing another line from the moon to Cape Horn we

see that Jakarta, Indonesia is collinear. If the distance from the moon to Jakarta is 240,128 miles, what is

the distance from Cape Horn to Jakarta?

www.ck12.org 270

Segments from Chords

In the Review Queue above, we have two chords that intersect inside a circle. The two triangles are similar,

making the sides in each triangle proportional.

Theorem 9-14: If two chords intersect inside a circle so that one is divided into segments of length a and

b and the other into segments of length c and d then ab = cd.

The product of the segments of one chord is equal to the product of segments of the second

chord.

ab = cd

Example 1: Find x in each diagram below.

a)

b)

Solution: Use the ratio from Theorem 9-14.

a) 12 · 8 = 10 · x

96 = 10x

9.6 = x

b) x · 15 = 5 · 9

271 www.ck12.org

15x = 45

x = 3

Example 2: Algebra Connection Solve for x.

a)

b)

Solution: Use Theorem 9-13.

a) 8 · 24 = (3x + 1) · 12

192 = 36x + 12

180 = 36x

5 = x

b) (x − 5)21 = (x − 9)24

21x − 105 = 24x − 216

111 = 3x

37 = x

Segments from Secants

In addition to forming an angle outside of a circle, the circle can divide the secants into segments that are

proportional with each other.

Theorem 9-15: If two secants are drawn from a common point outside a circle and the segments are

labeled as below, then a(a + b) = c(c + d).

The product of the outer segment and the whole of one secant equals the product of the outer

segment and the whole of the other secant.

a(a + b) = c(c + d)

Example 3: Find the value of the missing variable.

www.ck12.org 272

a)

b)

Solution: Use Theorem 9-15 to set up an equation.

a) 18 · (18 + x) = 16 · (16 + 24)

324 + 18x = 256 + 384

18x = 316

x = 1759

b) x · (x + x) = 9 · 32

2x2 = 288

x2 = 144

x = 12, x , −12 (length is not negative)

Segments from Secants and Tangents

If a tangent and secant meet at a common point outside a circle, the segments created have a similar

relationship to that of two secant rays in Example 3.

Theorem 9-16: If a tangent and a secant are drawn from a common point outside the circle (and the

segments are labeled like the picture below), then a2 = b(b + c).

The product of the outside segment of the secant and the whole is equal to the square of the

tangent.

a2 = b(b + c)

Example 4: Find the value of the missing segment.

273 www.ck12.org

a)

b)

Solution: Use Theorem 9-16.

a) x2 = 4(4 + 12)

x2 = 4 · 16 = 64

x = 8

b) 202 = y(y + 30)

400 = y2 + 30y

0 = y2 + 30y − 400

0 = (y + 40)(y − 10)

y =XX−40, 10

When you have to factor a quadratic equation to find an answer, always eliminate the negative answer

because length is never negative.

Example 5: Ishmael found a broken piece of a CD in his car. He places a ruler across two points on the

rim, and the length of the chord is 9.5 cm. The distance from the midpoint of this chord to the nearest

point on the rim is 1.75 cm. Find the diameter of the CD.

Solution: Think of this as two chords intersecting each other. If we were to extend the 1.75 cm segment,

it would be a diameter. So, if we find x, in the diagram to the left, and add it to 1.75 cm, we would find

the diameter.

4.25 · 4.25 = 1.75 · x

18.0625 = 1.75x

x ≈ 10.3 cm, making the diameter 12 cm, which is the

actual diameter of a CD.

www.ck12.org 274

Know What? Revisited The given information is to the left. Let’s set up an equation using Theorem

9-15.

238857 · 251308 = 240128(240128 + x)

60026674956 = 57661456380 + 240128x

2365218572 = 240128x

x ≈ 9849.8 miles

Review Questions

• Questions 1-25 are similar to Examples 1, 3, and 4.

• Questions 26-28 are similar to Example 2.

• Questions 29 is similar to Example 5.

• Questions 30 and 31 are proofs of Theorem 9-14 and 9-15.

Fill in the blanks for each problem below. Then, solve for the missing segment.

1.

· 4 = · x

275 www.ck12.org

2.

3( + ) = 2(2 + 7)

3.

20x =

4.

x · = 8( + )

5.

= (4 + 5)

6.

102 = x( + )

Find x in each diagram below. Simplify any radicals.

www.ck12.org 276

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

277 www.ck12.org

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

www.ck12.org 278

19.

20.

21.

22.

23.

24.

25. Error Analysis Describe and correct the error in finding y.

279 www.ck12.org

10 · 10 = y · 15y

100 = 15y2

20

3

= y2

2

√

15

3

= y ←− y in not correct

Algebra Connection Find the value of x.

26.

27.

28.

29. Suzie found a piece of a broken plate. She places a ruler across two points on the rim, and the length

of the chord is 6 inches. The distance from the midpoint of this chord to the nearest point on the

rim is 1 inch. Find the diameter of the plate.

30. Fill in the blanks of the proof of Theorem 9-14.

www.ck12.org 280

Given: Intersecting chords AC and BE.

Prove: ab = cd

Table 5.5:

Statement Reason

1. Intersecting chords AC and BE with segments

a, b, c, and d.

2. Theorem 9-8

3. 4ADE ∼ 4BDC

4. Corresponding parts of similar triangles are pro-

portional

5. ab = cd

31. Fill in the blanks of the proof of Theorem 9-15.

Given: Secants PR and RT

Prove: a(a + b) = c(c + d)

Table 5.6:

Statement Reason

1. Secants PR and RT with segments a, b, c, and

d.

given

2. ∠R ∠R Reflexive PoC

3. ∠QPS ∠STQ Theorem 9-8

4. 4RPS ∼ 4RTQ AA Similarity Postulate

5. ac+d = ca+b Corresponding parts of similar triangles are pro-

portional

6. a(a + b) = c(c + d) Cross multiplication

Review Queue Answers

1. m∠DAC = m∠DBC by Theorem 9-8, they are inscribed angles and intercept the same arc.

2. m∠AED = m∠BEC by the Vertical Angles Theorem.

3. Yes, by AA Similarity Postulate.

4. 86 = 7EC

8 · EC = 42

EC = 214 = 5.25

281 www.ck12.org

5.7 Extension: Writing and Graphing the Equa-

tions of Circles

Learning Objectives

• Graph a circle.

• Find the equation of a circle in the x − y plane.

• Find the radius and center, given the equation of a circle and vice versa.

• Find the equation of a circle, given the center and a point on the circle.

Graphing a Circle in the Coordinate Plane

Recall that the definition of a circle is the set of all points that are the same distance from the center. This

definition can be used to find an equation of a circle in the coordinate plane.

Let’s start with the circle centered at (0, 0). If (x, y) is a point on the circle, then the distance from the

center to this point would be the radius, r. x is the horizontal distance y is the vertical distance. This

forms a right triangle. From the Pythagorean Theorem, the equation of a circle, centered at the origin is

x2 + y2 = r2.

Example 1: Graph x2 + y2 = 9.

Solution: The center is (0, 0). It’s radius is the square root of 9, or 3. Plot the center, and then go out 3

units in every direction and connect them to form a circle.

The center does not always have to be on (0, 0). If it is not, then we label the center (h, k) and would use

the distance formula to find the length of the radius.

www.ck12.org 282

r =

√

(x − h)2 + (y − k)2

If you square both sides of this equation, then we would have the standard equation of a circle.

Standard Equation of a Circle: The standard equation of a circle with center (h, k) and radius r is

r2 = (x − h)2 + (y − k)2.

Example 2: Find the center and radius of the following circles.

a) (x − 3)2 + (y − 1)2 = 25

b) (x + 2)2 + (y − 5)2 = 49

Solution:

a) Rewrite the equation as (x − 3)2 + (y − 1)2 = 52. The center is (3, 1) and r = 5.

b) Rewrite the equation as (x − (−2))2 + (y − 5)2 = 72. The center is (-2, 5) and r = 7.

When finding the center of a circle always take the opposite sign of what the value is in the equation.

Example 3: Find the equation of the circle below.

Solution: First locate the center. Draw in the horizontal and vertical diameters to see where they intersect.

283 www.ck12.org

From this, we see that the center is (-3, 3). If we count the units from the center to the circle on either of

these diameters, we find r = 6. Plugging this into the equation of a circle, we get: (x−(−3))2+(y−3)2 = 62

or (x + 3)2 + (y − 3)2 = 36.

Finding the Equation of a Circle

Example 4: Determine if the following points are on (x + 1)2 + (y − 5)2 = 50.

a) (8, -3)

b) (-2, -2)

Solution: Plug in the points for x and y in (x + 1)2 + (y − 5)2 = 50.

a) (8 + 1)2 + (−3 − 5)2 = 50

92 + (−8)2 = 50

81 + 64 , 50

(8, -3) is not on the circle

b) (−2 + 1)2 + (−2 − 5)2 = 50

(−1)2 + (−7)2 = 50

1 + 49 = 50

(-2, -2) is on the circle

Example 5: Find the equation of the circle with center (4, -1) and passes through (-1, 2).

Solution: First plug in the center to the standard equation.

(x − 4)2 + (y − (−1))2 = r2

(x − 4)2 + (y + 1)2 = r2

Now, plug in (-1, 2) for x and y and solve for r.

(−1 − 4)2 + (2 + 1)2 = r2

(−5)2 + (3)2 = r2

25 + 9 = r2

34 = r2

Substituting in 34 for r2, the equation is (x − 4)2 + (y + 1)2 = 34.

Review Questions

• Questions 1-4 are similar to Examples 1 and 2.

• Questions 5-8 are similar to Example 3.

• Questions 9-11 are similar to Example 4.

• Questions 12-15 are similar to Example 5.

Find the center and radius of each circle. Then, graph each circle.

1. (x + 5)2 + (y − 3)2 = 16

2. x2 + (y + 8)2 = 4

www.ck12.org 284

3. (x − 7)2 + (y − 10)2 = 20

4. (x + 2)2 + y2 = 8

Find the equation of the circles below.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9. Is (-7, 3) on (x + 1)2 + (y − 6)2 = 45?

10. Is (9, -1) on (x − 2)2 + (y − 2)2 = 60?

285 www.ck12.org

11. Is (-4, -3) on (x + 3)2 + (y − 3)2 = 37?

12. Is (5, -3) on (x + 1)2 + (y − 6)2 = 45?

Find the equation of the circle with the given center and point on the circle.

13. center: (2, 3), point: (-4, -1)

14. center: (10, 0), point: (5, 2)

15. center: (-3, 8), point: (7, -2)

16. center: (6, -6), point: (-9, 4)

5.8 Chapter 9 Review

Keywords & Theorems

Parts of Circles & Tangent Lines

• Circle

• Center

• Radius

• Chord

• Diameter

• Secant

• Tangent

• Point of Tangency

• Congruent Circles

• Concentric Circles

• Externally Tangent Circles

• Internally Tangent Circles

• Common Internal Tangent

• Common External Tangent

• Tangent to a Circle Theorem

• Theorem 9-2

Properties of Arcs

• Central Angle

• Arc

• Semicircle

• Minor Arc

• Major Arc

• Congruent Arcs

• Arc Addition Postulate

Properties of Chords

• Theorem 9-3

• Theorem 9-4

www.ck12.org 286

• Theorem 9-5

• Theorem 9-6

Inscribed Angles

• Inscribed Angle

• Intercepted Arc

• Inscribed Angle Theorem

• Theorem 9-8

• Theorem 9-9

• Inscribed Polygon

• Theorem 9-10

Angles from Chords, Secants and Tangents

• Theorem 9-11

• Theorem 9-12

• Theorem 9-13

Segments from Secants and Tangents

• Theorem 9-14

• Theorem 9-15

• Theorem 9-16

Extension: Equations of Circles

• Standard Equation of a Circle

Vocabulary

Match the description with the correct label.

1. minor arc - A. CD

2. chord - B. AD

3. tangent line - C. ←→CB

4. central angle - D. ←→EF

287 www.ck12.org

5. secant - E. A

6. radius - F. D

7. inscribed angle - G. ∠BAD

8. center - H. ∠BCD

9. major arc - I. ̂BD

10. point of tangency - J. B̂CD

Texas Instruments Resources

In the CK-12 Texas Instruments Geometry FlexBook, there are graphing calculator activities

designed to supplement the objectives for some of the lessons in this chapter. See http:

//www.ck12.org/flexr/chapter/9694.

5.9 Study Guide

Keywords: Define, write theorems, and/or draw a diagram for each word below.

1st Section: Parts of Circles & Tangent Lines

Circle

Radius

Diameter

Tangent

Congruent Circles

Concentric Circles

Externally Tangent Circles

Internally Tangent Circles

Common Internal Tangent

www.ck12.org 288

Common External Tangent

Tangent to a Circle Theorem

Theorem 9-2

Center

Chord

Secant

Point of Tangency

Homework:

2nd Section: Properties of Arcs

Central Angle

Arc

Semicircle

Minor Arc

Major Arc

Congruent Arcs

Arc Addition Postulate

Homework:

3rd Section: Properties of Chords

Theorem 9-3

289 www.ck12.org

Theorem 9-4

Theorem 9-5

Theorem 9-6

Homework:

4th Section: Inscribed Angles

Inscribed Angle

Intercepted Arc

Inscribed Angle Theorem

Theorem 9-8

Theorem 9-9

Inscribed Polygon

www.ck12.org 290

Theorem 9-10

Homework:

5th Section: Angles from Chords, Secants and Tangents

Theorem 9-11

Theorem 9-12

Theorem 9-13

Homework:

6th Section: Segments from Secants and Tangents

Theorem 9-14

Theorem 9-15

291 www.ck12.org

Theorem 9-16

Homework:

Extension: Equations of Circles

Standard Equation of a Circle

Homework:

www.ck12.org 292

Chapter 6

Perimeter and Area

Now that we have explored triangles, quadrilaterals, polygons, and circles, we are going to learn how to

find the perimeter and area of each.

6.1 Triangles and Parallelograms

Learning Objectives

• Understand the basic concepts of area.

• Use formulas to find the area of triangles and parallelograms.

Review Queue

1. Define perimeter and area, in your own words.

2. Solve the equations below. Simplify any radicals.

(a) x2 = 121

(b) 4x + 6 = 80

(c) x2 − 6x + 8 = 0

(d) 12 x − 3 = 5

(e) x2 + 2x − 15 = 0

(f) x2 − x − 12 = 0

Know What? Ed’s parents are getting him a new king bed. Upon further research, Ed discovered there

are two types of king beds, and Eastern (or standard) King and a California King. The Eastern King has

76” × 80” dimensions, while the California King is 72” × 84” (both dimensions are width × length). Which

bed has a larger area to lie on?

293 www.ck12.org

Areas and Perimeters of Squares and Rectangles

Perimeter: The distance around a shape.

The perimeter of any figure must have a unit of measurement attached to it. If no specific units are given

(feet, inches, centimeters, etc), write “units.”

Example 1: Find the perimeter of the figure to the left.

Solution: Here, we can use the grid as our units. Count around the figure to find the perimeter.

5 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 5 + 1 + 3 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 2 + 4 + 7 = 34 units

You are probably familiar with the area of squares and rectangles from a previous math class. Recall that

you must always establish a unit of measure for area. Area is always measured in square units, square feet

( f t.2), square inches (in.2). square centimeters (cm.2), etc. If no specific units are given, write “units2.”

Example 2: Find the area of the figure from Example 1.

Solution: Count the number of squares within the figure. If we start on the left and count each column.

5 + 6 + 1 + 4 + 3 + 4 + 4 = 27 units2

Area of a Rectangle: A = bh, where b is the base (width) and h is the height (length).

Example 3: Find the area and perimeter of a rectangle with sides 4 cm by 9 cm.

Solution: The perimeter is 4 + 9 + 4 + 9 = 36 cm. The area is A = 9 · 4 = 26 cm2.

Perimeter of a Rectangle: P = 2b + 2h.

If a rectangle is a square, with sides of length s, the formulas are as follows:

Perimeter of a Square: Psquare = 2s + 2s = 4s

www.ck12.org 294

Area of a Square: Asqaure = s · s = s2

Example 4: The area of a square is 75 in2. Find the perimeter.

Solution: To find the perimeter, we need to find the length of the sides.

A = s2 = 75 in2

s =

√

75 = 5

√

3 in

From this, P = 4

(

5

√

3

)

= 20

√

3 in.

Area Postulates

Congruent Areas Postulate: If two figures are congruent, they have the same area.

Example 5: Draw two different rectangles with an area of 36 cm2.

Solution: Think of all the different factors of 36. These can all be dimensions of the different rectangles.

Other possibilities could be 6 × 6, 2 × 18, and 1 × 36.

Example 5 shows two rectangles with the same area and are not congruent. This tells us that the converse

of the Congruent Areas Postulate is not true.

Area Addition Postulate: If a figure is composed of two or more parts that do not overlap each other,

then the area of the figure is the sum of the areas of the parts.

Example 6: Find the area of the figure below. You may assume all sides are perpendicular.

295 www.ck12.org

Solution: Split the shape into two rectangles and find the area of each.

Atop rectangle = 6 · 2 = 12 f t2

Abottom square = 3 · 3 = 9 f t2

The total area is 12 + 9 = 21 f t2.

Area of a Parallelogram

Recall that a parallelogram is a quadrilateral whose opposite sides are parallel.

To find the area of a parallelogram, make it into a rectangle.

From this, we see that the area of a parallelogram is the same as the area of a rectangle.

Area of a Parallelogram: The area of a parallelogram is A = bh.

The height of a parallelogram is always perpendicular to the base. This means that the sides are not the

height.

www.ck12.org 296

Example 7: Find the area of the parallelogram.

Solution: A = 15 · 8 = 120 in2

Example 8: If the area of a parallelogram is 56 units2 and the base is 4 units, what is the height?

Solution: Solve for the height in A = bh.

56 = 4h

14 = h

Area of a Triangle

If we take parallelogram and cut it in half, along a diagonal, we would have two congruent triangles. The

formula for the area of a triangle is half the area of a parallelogram.

Area of a Triangle: A = 12 bh or A = bh2 .

Example 9: Find the area of the triangle.

Solution: To find the area, we need to find the height of the triangle. We are given the two sides of the

297 www.ck12.org

small right triangle, where the hypotenuse is also the short side of the obtuse triangle.

32 + h2 = 52

9 + h2 = 25

h2 = 16

h = 4

A = 1

2

(4)(7) = 14 units2

Example 10: Find the perimeter of the triangle in Example 9.

Solution: To find the perimeter, we need to find the longest side of the obtuse triangle. If we used the

black lines in the picture, we would see that the longest side is also the hypotenuse of the right triangle

with legs 4 and 10.

42 + 102 = c2

16 + 100 = c2

c =

√

116 ≈ 10.77

The perimeter is 7 + 5 + 10.77 = 22.77 units

Example 11: Find the area of the figure below.

Solution: Divide the figure into a triangle and a rectangle with a small rectangle cut out of the lower

right-hand corner.

www.ck12.org 298

A = Atop triangle + Arectangle − Asmall triangle

A =

(1

2

· 6 · 9

)

+ (9 · 15) +

(1

2

· 3 · 6

)

A = 27 + 135 + 9

A = 171 units2

Know What? Revisited The area of an Eastern King is 6080 in2 and the California King is 6048 in2.

Review Questions

• Questions 1-12 are similar to Examples 3-5, 7-9.

• Questions 13-18 are similar to Examples 9 and 10.

• Questions 19-24 are similar to Examples 7 and 9.

• Questions 25-30 are similar to Examples 6 and 11.

• Questions 31-36 use the formula for the area of a triangle.

1. Find the area and perimeter of a square with sides of length 12 in.

2. Find the area and perimeter of a rectangle with height of 9 cm and base of 16 cm.

3. Find the area of a parallelogram with height of 20 m and base of 18 m.

4. Find the area and perimeter of a rectangle if the height is 8 and the base is 14.

5. Find the area and perimeter of a square if the sides are 18 ft.

6. If the area of a square is 81 f t2, find the perimeter.

7. If the perimeter of a square is 24 in, find the area.

8. Find the area of a triangle with base of length 28 cm and height of 15 cm.

9. What is the height of a triangle with area 144 m2 and a base of 24 m?

10. The perimeter of a rectangle is 32. Find two different dimensions that the rectangle could be.

11. Draw two different rectangles that haven an area of 90 mm2.

12. Write the converse of the Congruent Areas Postulate. Determine if it is a true statement. If not,

write a counterexample. If it is true, explain why.

Use the triangle to answer the following questions.

13. Find the height of the triangle by using the geometric mean.

14. Find the perimeter.

15. Find the area.

Use the triangle to answer the following questions.

299 www.ck12.org

16. Find the height of the triangle.

17. Find the perimeter.

18. Find the area.

Find the area of the following shapes.

19.

20.

21.

22.

23.

24.

25. (a) Divide the shape into two triangles and one rectangle.

(b) Find the area of the two triangles and rectangle.

(c) Find the area of the entire shape.

www.ck12.org 300

26. (a) Divide the shape into two rectangles and one triangle.

(b) Find the area of the two rectangles and triangle.

(c) Find the area of the entire shape (you will need to subtract the area of the small triangle in the

lower right-hand corner).

Use the picture below for questions 27-30. Both figures are squares.

27. Find the area of the outer square.

28. Find the area of one grey triangle.

29. Find the area of all four grey triangles.

30. Find the area of the inner square.

In questions 31-36 we are going to derive a formula for the area of an equilateral triangle.

31. What kind of triangle is 4ABD? Find AD and BD.

32. Find the area of 4ABC.

33. If each side is x, what is AD and BD?

34. If each side is x, find the area of 4ABC.

35. Using your formula from #34, find the area of an equilateral triangle with 12 inch sides.

36. Using your formula from #34, find the area of an equilateral triangle with 5 inch sides.

301 www.ck12.org

Review Queue Answers

1. Possible Answers

Perimeter: The distance around a shape.

Area: The space inside a shape.

2. (a) x = ±11

(b) x = 18.5

(c) x = 4, 2

(d) x = 16

(e) x = 3,−5

(f) x = 4,−3

6.2 Trapezoids, Rhombi, and Kites

Learning Objectives

• Derive and use the area formulas for trapezoids, rhombi, and kites.

Review Queue

Find the area of the shaded regions in the figures below.

1.

2. ABCD is a square.

3. ABCD is a square.

www.ck12.org 302

Know What? The Brazilian flag is to the right. The flag has dimensions of 20×14 (units vary depending

on the size, so we will not use any here). The vertices of the yellow rhombus in the middle are 1.7 units

from the midpoint of each side.

Find the area of the rhombus (including the circle). Do not round your answer.

Area of a Trapezoid

Recall that a trapezoid is a quadrilateral with one pair of parallel sides. The lengths of the parallel sides

are the bases and the perpendicular distance between the parallel sides is the height of the trapezoid.

To find the area of the trapezoid, make a copy of the trapezoid and then rotate the copy 180◦. Now, this

is a parallelogram with height h and base b1 + b2. The area of this shape is A = h(b1 + b2).

Because the area of this parallelogram is two congruent trapezoids, the area of one trapezoid would be

A = 12h(b1 + b2).

Area of a Trapezoid: A = 12h(b1 + b2)

h is always perpendicular to the bases.

303 www.ck12.org

You could also say the area of a trapezoid is the average of the bases times the height.

Example 1: Find the area of the trapezoids below.

a)

b)

Solution:

a) A = 12(11)(14 + 8)

A = 12(11)(22)

A = 121 units2

b) A = 12(9)(15 + 23)

A = 12(9)(38)

A = 171 units2

Example 2: Find the perimeter and area of the trapezoid.

Solution: Even though we are not told the length of the second base, we can find it using special right

triangles. Both triangles at the ends of this trapezoid are isosceles right triangles, so the hypotenuses are

4

√

2 and the other legs are of length 4.

P = 8 + 4

√

2 + 16 + 4

√

2 A = 1

2

(4)(8 + 16)

P = 24 + 8

√

2 ≈ 35.3 units A = 48 units2

www.ck12.org 304

Area of a Rhombus and Kite

Recall that a rhombus is an equilateral quadrilateral and a kite has adjacent congruent sides.

Both of these quadrilaterals have perpendicular diagonals, which is how we are going to find their areas.

Notice that the diagonals divide each quadrilateral into 4 triangles. If we move the two triangles on the

bottom of each quadrilateral so that they match up with the triangles above the horizontal diagonal, we

would have two rectangles.

So, the height of these rectangles is half of one of the diagonals and the base is the length of the other

diagonal.

Area of a Rhombus: A = 12d1d2

The area is half the product of the diagonals.

Area of a Kite: A = 12d1d2

Example 3: Find the perimeter and area of the rhombi below.

a)

305 www.ck12.org

b)

Solution: In a rhombus, all four triangles created by the diagonals are congruent.

a) To find the perimeter, you must find the length of each side, which would be the hypotenuse of one of

the four triangles. Use the Pythagorean Theorem.

122 + 82 = side2 A = 1

2

· 16 · 24

144 + 64 = side2 A = 192

side =

√

208 = 4

√

13

P = 4

(

4

√

13

)

= 16

√

13

b) Here, each triangle is a 30-60-90 triangle with a hypotenuse of 14. From the special right triangle ratios

the short leg is 7 and the long leg is 7

√

3.

P = 4 · 14 = 56 A = 1

2

· 14 · 14

√

3 = 98

√

3

Example 4: Find the perimeter and area of the kites below.

a)

b)

Solution: In a kite, there are two pairs of congruent triangles. Use the Pythagorean Theorem in both

problems to find the length of sides or diagonals.

a) Shorter sides of kite Longer sides of kite

62 + 52 = s21 12

2 + 52 = s22

36 + 25 = s21 144 + 25 = s

2

2

s1 =

√

61 s2 =

√

169 = 13

P = 2

(√

61

)

+ 2(13) = 2

√

61 + 26 ≈ 41.6 A = 1

2

(10)(18) = 90

www.ck12.org 306

b) Smaller diagonal portion Larger diagonal portion

202 + d2s = 252 202 + d2l = 35

2

d2s = 225 d2l = 825

ds = 15 dl = 5

√

33

A = 1

2

(

15 + 5

√

33

)

(40) ≈ 874.5 P = 2(25) + 2(35) = 120

Example 5: The vertices of a quadrilateral are A(2, 8), B(7, 9),C(11, 2), and D(3, 3). Show ABCD is a kite

and find its area.

Solution: After plotting the points, it looks like a kite. AB = AD and BC = DC. The diagonals are

perpendicular if the slopes are opposite signs and flipped.

mAC =

2 − 8

11 − 2 = −

6

9

= −2

3

mBD =

9 − 3

7 − 3 =

6

4

= 3

2

The diagonals are perpendicular, so ABCD is a kite. To find the area, we need to find the length of the

diagonals.

d1 =

√

(2 − 11)2 + (8 − 2)2 d2 =

√

(7 − 3)2 + (9 − 3)2

=

√

(−9)2 + 62 =

√

42 + 62

=

√

81 + 36 =

√

117 = 3

√

13 =

√

16 + 36 =

√

52 = 2

√

13

Plug these lengths into the area formula for a kite. A = 12

(

3

√

13

) (

2

√

13

)

= 39 units2

Know What? Revisited To find the area of the rhombus, we need to find the length of the diagonals.

One diagonal is 20− 1.7− 1.7 = 16.6 and the other is 14− 1.7− 1.7 = 10.6. The area is A = 12(16.6)(10.6) =

87.98 units2.

Review Questions

• Question 1 uses the formula of the area of a kite and rhombus.

• Questions 2-16 are similar to Examples 1-4.

307 www.ck12.org

• Questions 17-23 are similar to Example 5.

• Questions 24-27 use the area formula for a kite and rhombus and factors.

• Questions 28-30 are similar to Example 4.

1. Do you think all rhombi and kites with the same diagonal lengths have the same area? Explain your

answer.

Find the area of the following shapes. Round your answers to the nearest hundredth.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

www.ck12.org 308

7.

8.

9.

10.

Find the area and perimeter of the following shapes. Round your answers to the nearest hundredth.

11.

12.

309 www.ck12.org

13.

14.

15.

16.

Quadrilateral ABCD has vertices A(−2, 0), B(0, 2),C(4, 2), and D(0,−2). Leave your answers in simplest

radical form.

17. Find the slopes of AB and DC. What type of quadrilateral is this? Plotting the points will help you

find the answer.

18. Find the slope of AD. Is it perpendicular to AB and DC?

19. Find AB, AD, and DC.

20. Use #19 to find the area of the shape.

Quadrilateral EFGH has vertices E(2,−1), F(6,−4),G(2,−7), and H(−2,−4).

21. Find the slopes of all the sides and diagonals. What type of quadrilateral is this? Plotting the points

will help you find the answer.

22. Find HF and EG.

23. Use #22 to find the area of the shape.

For Questions 24 and 25, the area of a rhombus is 32 units2.

24. What would the product of the diagonals have to be for the area to be 32 units2?

25. List two possibilities for the length of the diagonals, based on your answer from #24.

For Questions 26 and 27, the area of a kite is 54 units2.

www.ck12.org 310

26. What would the product of the diagonals have to be for the area to be 54 units2?

27. List two possibilities for the length of the diagonals, based on your answer from #26.

Sherry designed the logo for a new company, made up of 3 congruent kites.

28. What are the lengths of the diagonals for one kite?

29. Find the area of one kite.

30. Find the area of the entire logo.

Review Queue Answers

1. A = 9(8) +

[

1

2(9)(8)

]

= 72 + 36 = 108 units2

2. A = 12(6)(12)2 = 72 units2

3. A = 4

[

1

2(6)(3)

]

= 36 units2

6.3 Areas of Similar Polygons

Learning Objectives

• Understand the relationship between the scale factor of similar polygons and their areas.

• Apply scale factors to solve problems about areas of similar polygons.

Review Queue

1. Are two squares similar? Are two rectangles?

2. Find the scale factor of the sides of the similar shapes. Both figures are squares.

3. Find the area of each square.

4. Find the ratio of the smaller square’s area to the larger square’s area. Reduce it.

Know What? One use of scale factors and areas is scale drawings. This technique takes a small object,

like the handprint to the right, divides it up into smaller squares and then blows up the individual squares.

311 www.ck12.org

In this Know What? you are going to make a scale drawing of your own hand. Trace your hand on a piece

of paper. Then, divide your hand into 9 squares, like the one to the right, 2 in×2 in. Take a larger piece of

paper and blow up each square to be 6 in×6 in (you will need at least an 18 in square piece of paper). Once

you have your 6 in× 6 in squares drawn, use the proportions and area to draw in your enlarged handprint.

Areas of Similar Polygons

In Chapter 7, we learned about similar polygons. Polygons are similar when the corresponding angles are

equal and the corresponding sides are in the same proportion.

Example 1: The two rectangles below are similar. Find the scale factor and the ratio of the perimeters.

Solution: The scale factor is 1624 = 23 .

Psmall = 2(10) + 2(16) = 52 units

Plarge = 2(15) + 2(24) = 78 units

The ratio of the perimeters is 5278 = 23 .

The ratio of the perimeters is the same as the scale factor. In fact, the ratio of any part of two

similar shapes (diagonals, medians, midsegments, altitudes, etc.) is the same as the scale factor.

Example 2: Find the area of each rectangle from Example 1. Then, find the ratio of the areas.

Solution:

Asmall = 10 · 16 = 160 units2

Alarge = 15 · 24 = 360 units2

The ratio of the areas would be 160360 = 49 .

The ratio of the sides, or scale factor was 23 and the ratio of the areas is 49 . Notice that the ratio of the

areas is the square of the scale factor.

www.ck12.org 312

Area of Similar Polygons Theorem: If the scale factor of the sides of two similar polygons is mn , then

the ratio of the areas would be

(

m

n

)2.

If the scale factor is mn , then the ratio of the areas is

(

m

n

)2.

Example 3: Find the ratio of the areas of the rhombi below. The rhombi are similar.

Solution: Find the ratio of the sides and square it.

(3

5

)2

= 9

25

Example 4: Two trapezoids are similar. If the scale factor is 34 and the area of the smaller trapezoid is

81 cm2, what is the area of the larger trapezoid?

Solution: First, the ratio of the areas would be

(

3

4

)2

= 916 . Now, we need the area of the larger trapezoid.

To find this, set up a proportion using the area ratio.

9

16

= 81

A

→ 9A = 1296

A = 144 cm2

Example 5: Two triangles are similar. The ratio of the areas is 2564 . What is the scale factor?

Solution: The scale factor is

√

25

64 =

5

8 .

Example 6: Using the ratios from Example 5, find the length of the base of the smaller triangle if the

length of the base of the larger triangle is 24 units.

Solution: Set up a proportion using the scale factor.

5

8

= b

24

→ 8b = 120

b = 15 units

Know What? Revisited You should end up with an 18 in × 18 in drawing of your handprint.

Review Questions

• Questions 1-4 are similar to Example 3.

313 www.ck12.org

• Questions 5-8 are similar to Example 5.

• Questions 9-18 are similar to Examples 1-3, and 5.

• Questions 19-22 are similar to Examples 4 and 6.

• Questions 23-26 are similar to Examples 5 and 6.

Determine the ratio of the areas, given the ratio of the sides of a polygon.

1. 35

2. 14

3. 72

4. 611

Determine the ratio of the sides of a polygon, given the ratio of the areas.

5. 136

6. 481

7. 499

8. 25144

This is an equilateral triangle made up of 4 congruent equilateral triangles.

9. What is the ratio of the areas of the large triangle to one of the small triangles?

10. What is the scale factor of large to small triangle?

11. If the area of the large triangle is 20 units2, what is the area of a small triangle?

12. If the length of the altitude of a small triangle is 2

√

3, find the perimeter of the large triangle.

13. Find the perimeter of the large square and the blue square.

14. Find the scale factor of the blue square and large square.

15. Find the ratio of their perimeters.

16. Find the area of the blue and large squares.

17. Find the ratio of their areas.

18. Find the length of the diagonals of the blue and large squares. Put them into a ratio. Which ratio

is this the same as?

19. Two rectangles are similar with a scale factor of 47 . If the area of the larger rectangle is 294 in2, find

the area of the smaller rectangle.

20. Two triangles are similar with a scale factor of 13 . If the area of the smaller triangle is 22 f t2, find

the area of the larger triangle.

www.ck12.org 314

21. The ratio of the areas of two similar squares is 1681 . If the length of a side of the smaller square is 24

units, find the length of a side in the larger square.

22. The ratio of the areas of two right triangles is 49 . If the length of the hypotenuse of the larger triangle

is 48 units, find the length of the smaller triangle’s hypotenuse.

Questions 23-26 build off of each other. You may assume the problems are connected.

23. Two similar rhombi have areas of 72 units2 and 162 units2. Find the ratio of the areas.

24. Find the scale factor.

25. The diagonals in these rhombi are congruent. Find the length of the diagonals and the sides.

26. What type of rhombi are these quadrilaterals?

Review Queue Answers

1. Two squares are always similar. Two rectangles can be similar as long as the sides are in the same

proportion.

2. 1025 = 25

3. Asmall = 100, Alarge = 625

6.4 Circumference and Arc Length

Learning Objectives

• Find the circumference of a circle.

• Define the length of an arc and find arc length.

Review Queue

1. Find a central angle in that intercepts ̂CE

2. Find an inscribed angle that intercepts ̂CE.

3. How many degrees are in a circle? Find mÊCD.

4. If m̂CE = 26◦, find m̂CD and m∠CBE.

Know What? A typical large pizza has a diameter of 14 inches and is cut into 8 pieces. Think of the

crust as the circumference of the pizza. Find the length of the crust for the entire pizza. Then, find the

length of the crust for one piece of pizza if the entire pizza is cut into 8 pieces.

315 www.ck12.org

Circumference of a Circle

Circumference: The distance around a circle.

The circumference can also be called the perimeter of a circle. However, we use the term circumference for

circles because they are round. In order to find the circumference of a circle, we need to explore pi (pi).

Investigation 10-1: Finding pi (pi)

Tools Needed: paper, pencil, compass, ruler, string, and scissors

1. Draw three circles with radii of 2 in, 3 in, and 4 in. Label the centers of each A, B, and C.

2. Draw in the diameters and determine their lengths.

3. Take the string and outline each circle with it. Cut the string so that it perfectly outlines the circle.

Then, lay it out straight and measure it in inches. Round your answer to the nearest 18 -inch. Repeat

this for the other two circles.

4. Find circum f erencediameter for each circle. Record your answers to the nearest thousandth.

You should see that circum f erencediameter approaches 3.14159... We call this number pi, the Greek letter “pi.” When

finding the circumference and area of circles, we must use pi.

pi, or “pi”: The ratio of the circumference of a circle to its diameter. It is approximately equal to

3.14159265358979323846...

To see more digits of pi, go to http://www.eveandersson.com/pi/digits/.

From Investigation 10-1, we found that circum f erencediameter = pi. Let’s solve for the circumference, C.

www.ck12.org 316

C

d

= pi

C = pid

We can also say C = 2pir because d = 2r.

Circumference Formula: C = pid or C = 2pir

d = 2r

Example 1: Find the circumference of a circle with a radius of 7 cm.

Solution: Plug the radius into the formula.

C = 2pi(7) = 14pi ≈ 44 cm

Example 2: The circumference of a circle is 64pi. Find the diameter.

Solution: Again, you can plug in what you know into the circumference formula and solve for d.

64pi = pid

64 = d

Example 3: A circle is inscribed in a square with 10 in. sides. What is the circumference of the circle?

Leave your answer in terms of pi.

Solution: From the picture, we can see that the diameter of the circle is equal to the length of a side.

C = 10pi in.

Example 4: Find the perimeter of the square. Is it more or less than the circumference of the circle?

Why?

Solution: The perimeter is P = 4(10) = 40 in. In order to compare the perimeter with the circumference

we should change the circumference into a decimal.

C = 10pi ≈ 31.42 in. This is less than the perimeter of the square, which makes sense because the circle is

inside the square.

317 www.ck12.org

Arc Length

In Chapter 9, we measured arcs in degrees. This was called the “arc measure” or “degree measure.” Arcs

can also be measured in length, as a portion of the circumference.

Arc Length: The length of an arc or a portion of a circle’s circumference.

The arc length is directly related to the degree arc measure.

Example 5: Find the length of ̂PQ. Leave your answer in terms of pi.

Solution: In the picture, the central angle that corresponds with ̂PQ is 60◦. This means that m̂PQ = 60◦.

Think of the arc length as a portion of the circumference. There are 360◦ in a circle, so 60◦ would be 16 of

that

(

60◦

360◦ =

1

6

)

. Therefore, the length of ̂PQ is 16 of the circumference. length of ̂PQ = 16 · 2pi(9) = 3pi

Arc Length Formula: The length of ̂AB = m̂AB360◦ · pid or m

̂AB

360◦ · 2pir.

Another way to write this could be x◦360◦ · 2pir, where x is the central angle.

Example 6: The arc length of ̂AB = 6pi and is 14 the circumference. Find the radius of the circle.

Solution: If 6pi is 14 the circumference, then the total circumference is 4(6pi) = 24pi. To find the radius,

plug this into the circumference formula and solve for r.

24pi = 2pir

12 = r

Example 7: Find the measure of the central angle or ̂PQ.

Solution: Let’s plug in what we know to the Arc Length Formula.

www.ck12.org 318

15pi = m

̂PQ

360◦

· 2pi(18)

15 = m

̂PQ

10◦

150◦ = m̂PQ

Example 8: The tires on a compact car are 18 inches in diameter. How far does the car travel after the

tires turn once? How far does the car travel after 2500 rotations of the tires?

Solution: One turn of the tire is the circumference. This would be C = 18pi ≈ 56.55 in. 2500 rotations

would be 2500 · 56.55 in = 141371.67 in, 11781 ft, or 2.23 miles.

Know What? Revisited The entire length of the crust, or the circumference of the pizza is 14pi ≈ 44 in.

In 18 of the pizza, one piece would have 448 ≈ 5.5 inches of crust.

Review Questions

• Questions 1-10 are similar to Examples 1 and 2.

• Questions 11-14 are similar to Examples 3 and 4.

• Questions 15-20 are similar to Example 5.

• Questions 21-23 are similar to Example 6.

• Questions 24-26 are similar to Example 7.

• Questions 27-30 are similar to Example 8.

Fill in the following table. Leave all answers in terms of pi.

Table 6.1:

diameter radius circumference

1. 15

2. 4

3. 6

4. 84pi

5. 9

6. 25pi

7. 2pi

8. 36

9. Find the radius of circle with circumference 88 in.

319 www.ck12.org

10. Find the circumference of a circle with d = 20

pi

cm.

Square PQSR is inscribed in

⊙

T . RS = 8

√

2.

11. Find the length of the diameter of

⊙

T .

12. How does the diameter relate to PQSR?

13. Find the perimeter of PQSR.

14. Find the circumference of

⊙

T .

Find the arc length of ̂PQ in

⊙

A. Leave your answers in terms of pi.

15.

16.

17.

18.

www.ck12.org 320

19.

20.

Find PA (the radius) in

⊙

A. Leave your answer in terms of pi.

21.

22.

23.

Find the central angle or m̂PQ in

⊙

A. Round any decimal answers to the nearest tenth.

24.

321 www.ck12.org

25.

26.

For questions 27-30, a truck has tires with a 26 in diameter.

27. How far does the truck travel every time a tire turns exactly once? What is this the same as?

28. How many times will the tire turn after the truck travels 1 mile? (1 mile = 5280 feet)

29. The truck has travelled 4072 tire rotations. How many miles is this?

30. The average recommendation for the life of a tire is 30,000 miles. How many rotations is this?

Review Queue Answers

1. ∠CAE

2. ∠CBE

3. 360◦, 180◦

4. m̂CD = 180◦ − 26◦ = 154◦,m∠CBE = 13◦

6.5 Areas of Circles and Sectors

Learning Objectives

• Find the area of circles, sectors, and segments.

Review Queue

1. Find the area of both squares.

2. Find the area of the shaded region.

3. The triangle to the right is an equilateral triangle.

www.ck12.org 322

(a) Find the height of the triangle.

(b) Find the area of the triangle.

Know What? Back to the pizza. In the previous section, we found the length of the crust for a 14

in pizza. However, crust typically takes up some area on a pizza. Round your answers to the nearest

hundredth.

a) Find the area of the crust of a deep-dish 16 in pizza. A typical deep-dish pizza has 1 in of crust around

the toppings.

b) A thin crust pizza has 12 -in of crust around the edge of the pizza. Find the area of a thin crust 16 in

pizza.

Area of a Circle

Take a circle and divide it into several wedges. Then, unfold the wedges so they are in a line, with the

points at the top.

The height of the wedges is the radius and the length is the circumference of the circle. Now, take half of

these wedges and flip them upside-down and place them so they all fit together.

323 www.ck12.org

Now our circle looks like a parallelogram. The area of this parallelogram is A = bh = pir · r = pir2.

To see an animation of this derivation, see http://www.rkm.com.au/ANIMATIONS/animation-Circle-Area-Derivation.

html, by Russell Knightley.

Area of a Circle: If r is the radius of a circle, then A = pir2.

Example 1: Find the area of a circle with a diameter of 12 cm.

Solution: If d = 12 cm, then r = 6 cm. The area is A = pi

(

62

)

= 36pi cm2.

Example 2: If the area of a circle is 20pi, what is the radius?

Solution: Plug in the area and solve for the radius.

20pi = pir2

20 = r2

r =

√

20 = 2

√

5

Just like the circumference, we will leave our answers in terms of pi, unless otherwise specified.

Example 3: A circle is inscribed in a square. Each side of the square is 10 cm long. What is the area of

the circle?

Solution: The diameter of the circle is the same as the length of a side of the square. Therefore, the

radius is 5 cm.

A = pi52 = 25pi cm2

Example 4: Find the area of the shaded region.

Solution: The area of the shaded region would be the area of the square minus the area of the circle.

A = 102 − 25pi = 100 − 25pi ≈ 21.46 cm2

Area of a Sector

Sector of a Circle: The area bounded by two radii and the arc between the endpoints of the radii.

www.ck12.org 324

Area of a Sector: If r is the radius and ̂AB is the arc bounding a sector, then A = m̂AB360◦ · pir2.

Example 5: Find the area of the blue sector. Leave your answer in terms of pi.

Solution: In the picture, the central angle that corresponds with the sector is 60◦. 60◦ would be 16 of

360◦, so this sector is 16 of the total area. area o f blue sector = 16 · pi82 = 323 pi

Another way to write the sector formula is A = central angle360◦ · pir2.

Example 6: The area of a sector is 8pi and the radius of the circle is 12. What is the central angle?

Solution: Plug in what you know to the sector area formula and then solve for the central angle, we will

call it x.

8pi = x

360◦

· pi122

8pi = x

360◦

· 144pi

8 = 2x

5◦

x = 8 · 5

◦

2

= 20◦

Example 7: The area of a sector is 135pi and the arc measure is 216◦. What is the radius of the circle?

Solution: Plug in what you know to the sector area formula and solve for r.

325 www.ck12.org

135pi = 216

◦

360◦

· pir2

135 = 3

5

· r2

5

3

· 135 = r2

225 = r2 → r =

√

225 = 15

Example 8: Find the area of the shaded region. The quadrilateral is a square.

Solution: The radius of the circle is 16, which is also half of the diagonal of the square. So, the diagonal

is 32 and the sides would be 32√

2

·

√

2√

2

= 16

√

2 because each half of a square is a 45-45-90 triangle.

Acircle = 162pi = 256pi

Asquare =

(

16

√

2

)2

= 256 · 2 = 512

The area of the shaded region is 256pi − 512 ≈ 292.25

Segments of a Circle

The last part of a circle that we can find the area of is called a segment, not to be confused with a line

segment.

Segment of a Circle: The area of a circle that is bounded by a chord and the arc with the same endpoints

as the chord.

Asegment = Asector − A4ABC

Example 9: Find the area of the blue segment below.

www.ck12.org 326

Solution: The area of the segment is the area of the sector minus the area of the isosceles triangle made

by the radii. If we split the isosceles triangle in half, each half is a 30-60-90 triangle, where the radius is

the hypotenuse. The height of 4ABC is 12 and the base would be 2

(

12

√

3

)

= 24

√

3.

Asector =

120

360

pi · 242 A4 =

1

2

(

24

√

3

)

(12)

= 192pi = 144

√

3

The area of the segment is A = 192pi − 144

√

3 ≈ 353.8.

Know What? Revisited The area of the crust for a deep-dish pizza is 82pi − 72pi = 15pi. The area of the

crust of the thin crust pizza is 82pi − 7.52pi = 314 pi.

Review Questions

• Questions 1-10 are similar to Examples 1 and 2.

• Questions 11-16 are similar to Example 5.

• Questions 17-19 are similar to Example 7.

• Questions 20-22 are similar to Example 6.

• Questions 23-25 are similar to Examples 3, 4, and 8.

• Questions 26-31 are similar to Example 9.

Fill in the following table. Leave all answers in terms of pi.

Table 6.2:

radius Area circumference

1. 2

2. 16pi

3. 10pi

4. 24pi

5. 9

6. 90pi

7. 35pi

8. 7

pi

9. 60

10. 36

Find the area of the blue sector or segment in

⊙

A. Leave your answers in terms of pi. Round any decimal

answers to the nearest hundredth.

11.

327 www.ck12.org

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

Find the radius of the circle. Leave your answer in terms of pi.

17.

www.ck12.org 328

18.

19.

Find the central angle of each blue sector. Round any decimal answers to the nearest tenth.

20.

21.

22.

Find the area of the shaded region. Round your answer to the nearest hundredth.

23.

329 www.ck12.org

24.

25.

26. Find the area of the sector in

⊙

A. Leave your answer in terms of pi.

27. Find the area of the equilateral triangle.

28. Find the area of the segment. Round your answer to the nearest hundredth.

29. Find the area of the sector in

⊙

A. Leave your answer in terms of pi.

30. Find the area of the right triangle.

31. Find the area of the segment. Round your answer to the nearest hundredth.

Review Queue Answers

1. 82 − 42 = 64 − 16 = 48

2. 6(10) − 12(7)(3) = 60 − 10.5 = 49.5

3. 12(6)

(

3

√

3

)

= 9

√

3

4. 12(s)

(

1

2 s

√

3

)

= 14 s

2 √3

www.ck12.org 330

6.6 Chapter 10 Review

Keywords, Theorems and Formulas

Triangles and Parallelograms

• Perimeter

• Area of a Rectangle: A = bh

• Perimeter of a Rectangle P = 2b + 2h

• Perimeter of a Square: P = 4s

• Area of a Square: A = s2

• Congruent Areas Postulate

• Area Addition Postulate

• Area of a Parallelogram: A = bh

• Area of a Triangle: A = 12 bh or A = bh2

Trapezoids, Rhombi, and Kites

• Area of a Trapezoid: A = 12h(b1 + b2)

• Area of a Rhombus: A = 12d1d2

• Area of a Kite: A = 12d1d2

Area of Similar Polygons

• Area of Similar Polygons Theorem

Circumference and Arc Length

• pi

• Circumference: C = pid or C = 2pir

• Arc Length

• Arc Length Formula: length of ̂AB = m̂AB360◦ · pid or m

̂AB

360◦ · 2pir

Area of Circles and Sectors

• Area of a Circle: A = pir2

• Sector

• Area of a Sector: A = m̂AB360◦ · pir2

• Segment of a Circle

Review Questions

Find the area and perimeter of the following figures. Round your answers to the nearest hundredth.

331 www.ck12.org

1. square

2. rectangle

3. rhombus

4. equilateral triangle

5. parallelogram

6. kite

Find the area of the following figures. Leave your answers in simplest radical form.

7. triangle

www.ck12.org 332

8. kite

9. isosceles trapezoid

10. Find the area and circumference of a circle with radius 17.

11. Find the area and circumference of a circle with diameter 30.

12. Two similar rectangles have a scale factor 43 . If the area of the larger rectangle is 96 units2, find the

area of the smaller rectangle.

Find the area of the following figures. Round your answers to the nearest hundredth.

13.

14.

15. find the shaded area

333 www.ck12.org

(figure is a rhombus)

Texas Instruments Resources

In the CK-12 Texas Instruments Geometry FlexBook, there are graphing calculator activities

designed to supplement the objectives for some of the lessons in this chapter. See http:

//www.ck12.org/flexr/chapter/9695.

6.7 Study Guide

Keywords: Define, write theorems, and/or draw a diagram for each word below.

1st Section: Triangles and Parallelograms

Perimeter

Area of a Rectangle: A = bh

Perimeter of a Rectangle P = 2b + 2h

Perimeter of a Square: P = 4s

Area of a Square: A = s2

Congruent Areas Postulate

Area Addition Postulate

Area of a Parallelogram: A = bh

Area of a Triangle: A = 12 bh or A = bh2

www.ck12.org 334

Homework:

2nd Section: Trapezoids, Rhombi, and Kites

Area of a Trapezoid: A = 12h(b1 + b2)

Area of a Rhombus: A = 12d1d2

Area of a Kite: A = 12d1d2

Homework:

3rd Section: Area of Similar Polygons

Area of Similar Polygons Theorem

Homework:

4th Section: Circumference and Arc Length

pi

Circumference: C = pid or C = 2pir

Arc Length

Arc Length Formula: length of ̂AB = m̂AB360◦ · pid or m

̂AB

360◦ · 2pir

335 www.ck12.org

Homework:

5th Section: Area of Circles and Sectors

Area of a Circle: A = pir2

Sector

Area of a Sector: A = m̂AB360◦ · pir2

Segment of a Circle

Homework:

www.ck12.org 336

Chapter 7

Surface Area and Volume

In this chapter we extend what we know about two-dimensional figures to three-dimensional shapes. First,

we will define the different types of 3D shapes and their parts. Then, we will find the surface area and

volume of prisms, cylinders, pyramids, cones, and spheres.

7.1 Exploring Solids

Learning Objectives

• Identify different types of solids and their parts.

• Use Euler’s formula and nets.

Review Queue

1. Draw an octagon and identify the edges and vertices of the octagon. How many of each are there?

2. Find the area of a square with 5 cm sides.

3. Draw the following polygons.

(a) A convex pentagon.

(b) A concave nonagon.

Know What? Until now, we have only talked about two-dimensional, or flat, shapes. Copy the equilateral

triangle to the right onto a piece of paper and cut it out. Fold on the dotted lines. What shape do these

four equilateral triangles make?

337 www.ck12.org

Polyhedrons

Polyhedron: A 3-dimensional figure that is formed by polygons that enclose a region in space.

Each polygon in a polyhedron is a face.

The line segment where two faces intersect is an edge.

The point of intersection of two edges is a vertex.

Examples of polyhedrons include a cube, prism, or pyramid. Non-polyhedrons are cones, spheres, and

cylinders because they have sides that are not polygons.

Prism: A polyhedron with two congruent bases, in parallel planes, and the lateral sides are rectangles.

Pyramid: A polyhedron with one base and all the lateral sides meet at a common vertex.

All prisms and pyramids are named by their bases. So, the first prism would be a triangular prism and

the first pyramid would be a hexagonal pyramid.

Example 1: Determine if the following solids are polyhedrons. If the solid is a polyhedron, name it and

find the number of faces, edges and vertices each has.

a)

www.ck12.org 338

b)

c)

Solution:

a) The base is a triangle and all the sides are triangles, so this is a triangular pyramid. There are 4 faces,

6 edges and 4 vertices.

b) This solid is also a polyhedron. The bases are both pentagons, so it is a pentagonal prism. There are 7

faces, 15 edges, and 10 vertices.

c) The bases that are circles. Circles are not polygons, so it is not a polyhedron.

Euler’s Theorem

Let’s put our results from Example 1 into a table.

Table 7.1:

Faces Vertices Edges

Triangular Pyramid 4 4 6

Pentagonal Prism 7 10 15

Notice that faces + vertices is two more that the number of edges. This is called Euler’s Theorem, after

the Swiss mathematician Leonhard Euler.

Euler’s Theorem: F + V = E + 2.

Faces + Vertices = Edges + 2

5 + 6 = 9 + 2

Example 2: Find the number of faces, vertices, and edges in the octagonal prism.

339 www.ck12.org

Solution: There are 10 faces and 16 vertices. Use Euler’s Theorem, to solve for E.

F + V = E + 2

10 + 16 = E + 2

24 = E

Example 3: In a six-faced polyhedron, there are 10 edges. How many vertices does the polyhedron have?

Solution: Solve for V in Euler’s Theorem.

F + V = E + 2

6 + V = 10 + 2

V = 6

Example 4: A three-dimensional figure has 10 vertices, 5 faces, and 12 edges. Is it a polyhedron?

Solution: Plug in all three numbers into Euler’s Theorem.

F + V = E + 2

5 + 10 = 12 + 2

15 , 14

Because the two sides are not equal, this figure is not a polyhedron.

Regular Polyhedra

Regular Polyhedron: A polyhedron where all the faces are congruent regular polygons.

All regular polyhedron are convex.

A concave polyhedron “caves in.”

There are only five regular polyhedra, called the Platonic solids.

Regular Tetrahedron: A 4-faced polyhedron and all the faces are equilateral triangles.

Cube: A 6-faced polyhedron and all the faces are squares.

Regular Octahedron: An 8-faced polyhedron and all the faces are equilateral triangles.

www.ck12.org 340

Regular Dodecahedron: A 12-faced polyhedron and all the faces are regular pentagons.

Regular Icosahedron: A 20-faced polyhedron and all the faces are equilateral triangles.

Cross-Sections

One way to “view” a three-dimensional figure in a two-dimensional plane, like in this text, is to use

cross-sections.

Cross-Section: The intersection of a plane with a solid.

The cross-section of the peach plane and the tetrahedron is a triangle.

Example 5: What is the shape formed by the intersection of the plane and the regular octahedron?

a)

b)

c)

341 www.ck12.org

Solution:

a) Square

b) Rhombus

c) Hexagon

Nets

Net: An unfolded, flat representation of the sides of a three-dimensional shape.

Example 6: What kind of figure does this net create?

Solution: The net creates a rectangular prism.

Example 7: Draw a net of the right triangular prism below.

Solution: The net will have two triangles and three rectangles. The rectangles are different sizes and the

two triangles are the same.

www.ck12.org 342

There are several different nets of any polyhedron. For example, this net could have the triangles anywhere

along the top or bottom of the three rectangles. Click the site http://www.cs.mcgill.ca/~sqrt/unfold/

unfolding.html to see a few animations of other nets.

Know What? Revisited The net of the shape is a regular tetrahedron.

Review Questions

• Questions 1-8 are similar to Examples 2-4.

• Questions 9-14 are similar to Example 1.

• Questions 15-17 are similar to Example 5.

• Questions 18-23 are similar to Example 7.

• Questions 24-29 are similar to Example 6.

• Question 30 uses Euler’s Theorem.

Complete the table using Euler’s Theorem.

Table 7.2:

Name Faces Edges Vertices

1. Rectangular Prism 6 12

2. Octagonal Pyra-

mid

16 9

3. Regular Icosahe-

dron

20 12

4. Cube 12 8

5. Triangular Pyra-

mid

4 4

6. Octahedron 8 12

7. Heptagonal Prism 21 14

8. Triangular Prism 5 9

Determine if the following figures are polyhedra. If so, name the figure and find the number of faces, edges,

and vertices.

9.

10.

343 www.ck12.org

11.

12.

13.

14.

Describe the cross section formed by the intersection of the plane and the solid.

15.

16.

17.

Draw the net for the following solids.

www.ck12.org 344

18.

19.

20.

21.

22.

23.

Determine what shape is formed by the following nets.

24.

345 www.ck12.org

25.

26.

27.

28.

29.

30. A truncated icosahedron is a polyhedron with 12 regular pentagonal faces and 20 regular hexagonal

faces and 90 edges. This icosahedron closely resembles a soccer ball. How many vertices does it have?

Explain your reasoning.

www.ck12.org 346

Review Queue Answers

1. There are 8 vertices and 8 edges in an octagon.

2. 52 = 25 cm2

3. (a)

(b)

7.2 Surface Area of Prisms and Cylinders

Learning Objectives

• Find the surface area of a prism and cylinder.

Review Queue

1. Find the area of a rectangle with sides:

(a) 6 and 9

(b) 11 and 4

(c) 5

√

2 and 8

√

6

2. If the area of a square is 36 units2, what are the lengths of the sides?

3. If the area of a square is 45 units2, what are the lengths of the sides?

Know What? Your parents decide they want to put a pool in the backyard. The shallow end will be 4

ft. and the deep end will be 8 ft. The pool will be 10 ft. by 25 ft. How much siding do they need to cover

the sides and bottom of the pool?

347 www.ck12.org

Parts of a Prism

Prism: A 3-dimensional figure with 2 congruent bases, in parallel planes, and the other faces are rectangles.

The non-base faces are lateral faces.

The edges between the lateral faces are lateral edges.

This is a pentagonal prism.

Right Prism: A prism where all the lateral faces are perpendicular to the bases.

Oblique Prism: A prism that leans to one side and the height is outside the prism.

Surface Area of a Prism

Surface Area: The sum of the areas of the faces.

S ur f ace Area = B1 + B2 + L1 + L2 + L3

Lateral Area = L1 + L2 + L3

Lateral Area: The sum of the areas of the lateral faces.

www.ck12.org 348

Example 1: Find the surface area of the prism below.

Solution: Draw the net of the prism.

Using the net, we have:

S Aprism = 2(4)(10) + 2(10)(17) + 2(17)(4)

= 80 + 340 + 136

= 556 cm2

Surface Area of a Right Prism: The surface area of a right prism is the sum of the area of the bases

and the area of each rectangular lateral face.

Example 2: Find the surface area of the prism below.

Solution: This is a right triangular prism. To find the surface area, we need to find the length of the

hypotenuse of the base because it is the width of one of the lateral faces.

72 + 242 = c2

49 + 576 = c2

625 = c2 c = 25

Looking at the net, the surface area is:

349 www.ck12.org

S A = 28(7) + 28(24) + 28(25) + 2

(1

2

· 7 · 24

)

S A = 196 + 672 + 700 + 168 = 1736 units2

Cylinders

Cylinder: A solid with congruent circular bases that are in parallel planes. The space between the circles

is enclosed.

A cylinder has a radius and a height.

A cylinder can also be oblique, like the one on the far right.

Surface Area of a Right Cylinder

Let’s find the net of a right cylinder. One way to do this is to take the label off of a soup can. The label

is a rectangle where the height is the height of the cylinder and the base is the circumference of the circle.

Surface Area of a Right Cylinder: S A = 2pir2 + 2pirh.

www.ck12.org 350

2pir2

︸︷︷︸

+ 2pir

︸︷︷︸

h

area of length

both of

circles rectangle

To see an animation of the surface area, click http://www.rkm.com.au/ANIMATIONS/animation-Cylinder-Surface-Area-Derivation.

html, by Russell Knightley.

Example 3: Find the surface area of the cylinder.

Solution: r = 4 and h = 12.

S A = 2pi(4)2 + 2pi(4)(12)

= 32pi + 96pi

= 128pi units2

Example 4: The circumference of the base of a cylinder is 16pi and the height is 21. Find the surface area

of the cylinder.

Solution: We need to solve for the radius, using the circumference.

2pir = 16pi

r = 8

Now, we can find the surface area.

S A = 2pi(8)2 + (16pi)(21)

= 128pi + 336pi

= 464pi units2

Example 5: Algebra Connection The total surface area of the triangular prism is 540 units2. What is

x?

351 www.ck12.org

Solution: The total surface area is equal to:

A2 triangles + A3 rectangles = 540

The hypotenuse of the triangle bases is 13,

√

52 + 122. Let’s fill in what we know.

A2 triangles = 2

(1

2

· 5 · 12

)

= 60

A3 triangles = 5x + 12x + 13x = 30x

60 + 30x = 540

30x = 480

x = 16 units The height is 16 units.

Know What? Revisited To the right is the net of the pool (minus the top). From this, we can see that

your parents would need 670 square feet of siding.

Review Questions

• Questions 1-9 are similar to Examples 1 and 2.

• Question 10 uses the definition of lateral and total surface area.

• Questions 11-18 are similar to Examples 1-3.

• Questions 19-21 are similar to Example 5.

• Questions 22-24 are similar to Example 4.

• Questions 25-30 use the Pythagorean Theorem and are similar to Examples 1-3.

1. What type of prism is this?

2. Draw the net of this prism.

3. Find the area of the bases.

4. Find the area of lateral faces, or the lateral surface area.

5. Find the total surface area of the prism.

www.ck12.org 352

Use the right triangular prism to answer questions 6-9.

6. What shape are the bases of this prism? What are their areas?

7. What are the dimensions of each of the lateral faces? What are their areas?

8. Find the lateral surface area of the prism.

9. Find the total surface area of the prism.

10. Writing Describe the difference between lateral surface area and total surface area.

11. Fuzzy dice are cubes with 4 inch sides.

(a) What is the surface area of one die?

(b) Typically, the dice are sold in pairs. What is the surface area of two dice?

12. A right cylinder has a 7 cm radius and a height of 18 cm. Find the surface area.

Find the surface area of the following solids. Round your answer to the nearest hundredth.

13. bases are isosceles trapezoids

14.

353 www.ck12.org

15.

16.

17.

18.

Algebra Connection Find the value of x, given the surface area.

19. S A = 432 units2

20. S A = 1536pi units2

21. S A = 1568 units2

www.ck12.org 354

22. The area of the base of a cylinder is 25pi in2 and the height is 6 in. Find the lateral surface area.

23. The circumference of the base of a cylinder is 80pi cm and the height is 36 cm. Find the total surface

area.

24. The lateral surface area of a cylinder is 30pi m2 and the height is 5m. What is the radius?

Use the diagram below for questions 25-30. The barn is shaped like a pentagonal prism with dimensions

shown in feet.

25. What is the width of the roof? (HINT: Use the Pythagorean Theorem)

26. What is the area of the roof? (Both sides)

27. What is the floor area of the barn?

28. What is the area of the rectangular sides of the barn?

29. What is the area of the two pentagon sides of the barn? (HINT: Find the area of two congruent

trapezoids for each side)

30. Find the total surface area of the barn (Roof and sides).

Review Queue Answers

1. (a) 54

(b) 44

(c) 80

√

3

2. s = 6

3. s = 3

√

5

7.3 Surface Area of Pyramids and Cones

Learning Objectives

• Find the surface area of pyramids and cones.

Review Queue

1. A rectangular prism has sides of 5 cm, 6 cm, and 7 cm. What is the surface area?

2. A cylinder has a diameter of 10 in and a height of 25 in. What is the surface area?

3. A cylinder has a circumference of 72pi f t. and a height of 24 ft. What is the surface area?

4. Draw the net of a square pyramid.

355 www.ck12.org

Know What? A typical waffle cone is 6 inches tall and has a diameter of 2 inches. What is the surface

area of the waffle cone? (You may assume that the cone is straight across at the top)

Parts of a Pyramid

Pyramid: A solid with one base and the lateral faces meet at a common vertex.

The edges between the lateral faces are lateral edges.

The edges between the base and the lateral faces are base edges.

Regular Pyramid: A pyramid where the base is a regular polygon.

All regular pyramids also have a slant height which is the height of a lateral face. A non-regular pyramid

does not have a slant height.

Example 1: Find the slant height of the square pyramid.

www.ck12.org 356

Solution: The slant height is the hypotenuse of the right triangle formed by the height and half the base

length. Use the Pythagorean Theorem.

82 + 242 = l2

640 = l2

l =

√

640 = 8

√

10

Surface Area of a Regular Pyramid

Using the slant height, which is labeled l, the area of each triangular face is A = 12bl.

Example 2: Find the surface area of the pyramid from Example 1.

Solution: The four triangular faces are 4

(

1

2bl

)

= 2(16)

(

8

√

10

)

= 256

√

10. To find the total surface area, we

also need the area of the base, which is 162 = 256. The total surface area is 256

√

10+256 ≈ 1065.54 units2.

From this example, we see that the formula for a square pyramid is:

S A = (area o f the base) + 4(area o f triangular f aces)

S A = B + n

(1

2

bl

)

B is the area of the base and n is the number of triangles.

Surface Area of a Regular Pyramid: If B is the area of the base, then S A = B + 12nbl.

The net shows the surface area of a pyramid. If you ever forget the formula, use the net.

Example 3: Find the area of the regular triangular pyramid.

357 www.ck12.org

Solution: “Regular” tells us the base is an equilateral triangle. Let’s draw it and find its area.

B = 12 · 8 · 4

√

3 = 16

√

3

The surface area is:

S A = 16

√

3 + 12 · 3 · 8 · 18 = 16

√

3 + 216 ≈ 243.71

Example 4: If the lateral surface area of a square pyramid is 72 f t2 and the base edge is equal to the

slant height. What is the length of the base edge?

Solution: In the formula for surface area, the lateral surface area is 12nbl. We know that n = 4 and b = l.

Let’s solve for b.

1

2

nbl = 72 f t2

1

2

(4)b2 = 72

2b2 = 72

b2 = 36

b = 6

Surface Area of a Cone

Cone: A solid with a circular base and sides taper up towards a vertex.

A cone has a slant height, just like a pyramid.

A cone is generated from rotating a right triangle, around one leg, in a circle.

Surface Area of a Right Cone: S A = pir2 + pirl.

www.ck12.org 358

Area of the base: pir2

Area of the sides: pirl

Example 5: What is the surface area of the cone?

Solution: First, we need to find the slant height. Use the Pythagorean Theorem.

l2 = 92 + 212

= 81 + 441

l =

√

522 ≈ 22.85

The surface area would be S A = pi92 + pi(9)(22.85) ≈ 900.54 units2.

Example 6: The surface area of a cone is 36pi and the radius is 4 units. What is the slant height?

Solution: Plug in what you know into the formula for the surface area of a cone and solve for l.

36pi = pi42 + pi4l

36 = 16 + 4l When each term has a pi, they cancel out.

20 = 4l

5 = l

Know What? Revisited The standard cone has a surface area of pi +

√

35pi ≈ 21.73 in2.

Review Questions

• Questions 1-10 use the definitions of pyramids and cones.

• Questions 11-19 are similar to Example 1.

• Questions 20-26 are similar to Examples 2, 3, and 5.

• Questions 27-31 are similar to Examples 4 and 6.

• Questions 32-25 are similar to Example 5.

Fill in the blanks about the diagram to the left.

359 www.ck12.org

1. x is the ___________.

2. The slant height is ________.

3. y is the ___________.

4. The height is ________.

5. The base is _______.

6. The base edge is ________.

Use the cone to fill in the blanks.

7. v is the ___________.

8. The height of the cone is ______.

9. x is a __________ and it is the ___________ of the cone.

10. w is the _____________ ____________.

For questions 11-13, sketch each of the following solids and answer the question. Your drawings should be

to scale, but not one-to-one. Leave your answer in simplest radical form.

11. Draw a right cone with a radius of 5 cm and a height of 15 cm. What is the slant height?

12. Draw a square pyramid with an edge length of 9 in and a 12 in height. Find the slant height.

13. Draw an equilateral triangle pyramid with an edge length of 6 cm and a height of 6 cm. What is the

height of the base?

Find the slant height, l, of one lateral face in each pyramid or of the cone. Round your answer to the

nearest hundredth.

www.ck12.org 360

14.

15.

16.

Find the area of a lateral face of the regular pyramid. Round your answers to the nearest hundredth.

17.

18.

19.

361 www.ck12.org

Find the surface area of the regular pyramids and right cones. Round your answers to 2 decimal places.

20.

21.

22.

23.

24.

25.

26. A regular tetrahedron has four equilateral triangles as its faces.

(a) Find the height of one of the faces if the edge length is 6 units.

(b) Find the area of one face.

(c) Find the total surface area of the regular tetrahedron.

www.ck12.org 362

27. If the lateral surface area of a cone is 30pi cm2 and the radius is 5 cm, what is the slant height?

28. If the surface area of a cone is 105pi cm2 and the slant height is 8 cm, what is the radius?

29. If the surface area of a square pyramid is 40 f t2 and the base edge is 4 ft, what is the slant height?

30. If the lateral area of a square pyramid is 800 in2 and the slant height is 16 in, what is the length of

the base edge?

31. If the lateral area of a regular triangle pyramid is 252 in2 and the base edge is 8 in, what is the slant

height?

The traffic cone is cut off at the top and the base is a square with 24 in sides. Round answers to the

nearest hundredth.

32. Find the area of the entire square. Then, subtract the area of the base of the cone.

33. Find the lateral area of the cone portion (include the 4 inch cut off top of the cone).

34. Subtract the cut-off top of the cone, to only have the lateral area of the cone portion of the traffic

cone.

35. Combine your answers from #27 and #30 to find the entire surface area of the traffic cone.

Review Queue Answers

1. 2(5 · 6) + 2(5 · 7) + 2(6 · 7) = 214 cm2

2. 2(15 · 18) + 2(15 · 21) + 2(18 · 21) = 1926 cm2

3. 2 · 25pi + 250pi = 300pi in2

4. 362(2pi) + 72pi(24) = 4320pi f t2

5.

7.4 Volume of Prisms and Cylinders

Learning Objectives

• Find the volume of prisms and cylinders.

363 www.ck12.org

Review Queue

1. Define volume in your own words.

2. What is the surface area of a cube with 3 inch sides?

3. A regular octahedron has 8 congruent equilateral triangles as the faces.

(a) If each edge is 4 cm, what is the slant height for one face?

(b) What is the surface area of one face?

(c) What is the total surface area?

Know What? Let’s fill the pool it with water. The shallow end is 4 ft. and the deep end is 8 ft. The

pool is 10 ft. wide by 25 ft. long. How many cubic feet of water is needed to fill the pool?

Volume of a Rectangular Prism

Volume: The measure of how much space a three-dimensional figure occupies.

Another way to define volume would be how much a three-dimensional figure can hold. The basic unit of

volume is the cubic unit: cubic centimeter (cm3), cubic inch (in3), cubic meter (m3), cubic foot ( f t3).

Volume of a Cube Postulate: V = s3.

V = s · s · s = s3

What this postulate tells us is that every solid can be broken down into cubes. For example, if we wanted

to find the volume of a cube with 9 inch sides, it would be 93 = 729 in3.

Volume Congruence Postulate: If two solids are congruent, then their volumes are congruent.

These prisms are congruent, so their volumes are congruent.

www.ck12.org 364

Example 1: Find the volume of the right rectangular prism below.

Solution: Count the cubes. The bottom layer has 20 cubes, or 4× 5, and there are 3 layers. There are 60

cubes. The volume is also 60 units3.

Each layer in Example 1 is the same as the area of the base and the number of layers is the same as the

height. This is the formula for volume.

Volume of a Rectangular Prism: V = l · w · h.

Example 2: A typical shoe box is 8 in by 14 in by 6 in. What is the volume of the box?

Solution: We can assume that a shoe box is a rectangular prism.

V = (8)(14)(6) = 672 in2

Volume of any Prism

Notcie that l · w is equal to the area of the base of the prism, which we will re-label B.

Volume of a Prism: V = B · h.

“B” is not always going to be the same. So, to find the volume of a prism, you would first find the area of

the base and then multiply it by the height.

Example 3: You have a small, triangular prism shaped tent. How much volume does it have, once it is

set up?

365 www.ck12.org

Solution: First, we need to find the area of the base.

B = 1

2

(3)(4) = 6 f t2.

V = Bh = 6(7) = 42 f t3

Even though the height in this problem does not look like a “height,” it is, according to the formula.

Usually, the height of a prism is going to be the last length you need to use.

Oblique Prisms

Recall that oblique prisms are prisms that lean to one side and the height is outside the prism. What

would be the volume of an oblique prism? Consider to piles of books below.

Both piles have 15 books, which means they will have the same volume. Cavalieri’s Principle says that

leaning does not matter, the volumes are the same.

Cavalieri’s Principle: If two solids have the same height and the same cross-sectional area at every level,

then they will have the same volume.

If an oblique prism and a right prism have the same base area and height, then they will have the same

volume.

Example 4: Find the area of the oblique prism below.

www.ck12.org 366

Solution: This is an oblique right trapezoidal prism. Find the area of the trapezoid.

B = 1

2

(9)(8 + 4) = 9(6) = 54 cm2

V = 54(15) = 810 cm3

Volume of a Cylinder

If we use the formula for the volume of a prism, V = Bh, we can find the volume of a cylinder. In the case

of a cylinder, the base is the area of a circle. Like a prism, Cavalieri’s Principle holds.

Volume of a Cylinder: V = pir2h.

Example 5: Find the volume of the cylinder.

Solution: If the diameter is 16, then the radius is 8.

V = pi82(21) = 1344pi units3

Example 6: Find the volume of the cylinder.

Solution: V = pi62(15) = 540pi units3

Example 7: If the volume of a cylinder is 484pi in3 and the height is 4 in, what is the radius?

Solution: Solve for r.

484pi = pir2(4)

121 = r2

11 = r

Example 8: Find the volume of the solid below.

367 www.ck12.org

Solution: This solid is a parallelogram-based prism with a cylinder cut out of the middle.

Vprism = (25 · 25)30 = 18750 cm3

Vcylinder = pi(4)2(30) = 480pi cm3

The total volume is 18750 − 480pi ≈ 17242.04 cm3.

Know What? Revisited Even though it doesn’t look like it, the trapezoid is the base of this prism. The

area of the trapezoids are 12(4 + 8)25 = 150 f t2. V = 150(10) = 1500 f t3

Review Questions

• Question 1 uses the volume formula for a cylinder.

• Questions 2-4 are similar to Example 1.

• Questions 5-18 are similar to Examples 2-6.

• Questions 19-24 are similar to Example 7.

• Questions 25-30 are similar to Example 8.

1. Two cylinders have the same surface area. Do they have the same volume? How do you know?

2. How many one-inch cubes can fit into a box that is 8 inches wide, 10 inches long, and 12 inches tall?

Is this the same as the volume of the box?

3. A cereal box in 2 inches wide, 10 inches long and 14 inches tall. How much cereal does the box hold?

4. A can of soda is 4 inches tall and has a diameter of 2 inches. How much soda does the can hold?

Round your answer to the nearest hundredth.

5. A cube holds 216 in3. What is the length of each edge?

6. A cube has sides that are 8 inches. What is the volume?

7. A cylinder has r = h and the radius is 4 cm. What is the volume?

8. A cylinder has a volume of 486pi f t.3. If the height is 6 ft., what is the diameter?

Use the right triangular prism to answer questions 9 and 10.

9. What is the length of the third base edge?

10. Find the volume of the prism.

www.ck12.org 368

11. Fuzzy dice are cubes with 4 inch sides.

(a) What is the volume of one die?

(b) What is the volume of both dice?

12. A right cylinder has a 7 cm radius and a height of 18 cm. Find the volume.

Find the volume of the following solids. Round your answers to the nearest hundredth.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

369 www.ck12.org

18.

Algebra Connection Find the value of x, given the surface area.

19. V = 504 units3

20. V = 6144pi units3

21. V = 2688 units3

22. The area of the base of a cylinder is 49pi in2 and the height is 6 in. Find the volume.

23. The circumference of the base of a cylinder is 80pi cm and the height is 15 cm. Find the volume.

24. The lateral surface area of a cylinder is 30pi m2 and the circumference is 10pi m. What is the volume

of the cylinder?

The bases of the prism are squares and a cylinder is cut out of the center.

25. Find the volume of the prism.

www.ck12.org 370

26. Find the volume of the cylinder in the center.

27. Find the volume of the figure.

This is a prism with half a cylinder on the top.

28. Find the volume of the prism.

29. Find the volume of the half-cylinder.

30. Find the volume of the entire figure.

Review Queue Answers

1. The amount a three-dimensional figure can hold.

2. 54 in2

3. (a) 2

√

3

(b) 12 · 4 · 2

√

3 = 4

√

3

(c) 8 · 4

√

3 = 32

√

3

7.5 Volume of Pyramids and Cones

Learning Objectives

• Find the volume of pyramids and cones.

Review Queue

1. Find the volume of a square prism with 8 inch base edges and a 12 inch height.

2. Find the volume of a cylinder with a diameter of 8 inches and a height of 12 inches.

3. Find the surface area of a square pyramid with 10 inch base edges and a height of 12 inches.

Know What? The Khafre Pyramid is a pyramid in Giza, Egypt. It is a square pyramid with a base edge

of 706 feet and an original height of 407.5 feet. What was the original volume of the Khafre Pyramid?

371 www.ck12.org

Volume of a Pyramid

The volume of a pyramid is closely related to the volume of a prism with the same sized base.

Investigation 11-1: Finding the Volume of a Pyramid

Tools needed: pencil, paper, scissors, tape, ruler, dry rice.

1. Make an open net (omit one base) of a cube, with 2 inch sides.

2. Cut out the net and tape up the sides to form an open cube.

3. Make an open net (no base) of a square pyramid, with lateral edges of 2.5 inches and base edges of

2 inches.

4. Cut out the net and tape up the sides to form an open pyramid.

www.ck12.org 372

5. Fill the pyramid with dry rice and dump the rice into the open cube. Repeat this until you have

filled the cube?

Volume of a Pyramid: V = 13Bh.

Example 1: Find the volume of the pyramid.

Solution: V = 13(122)12 = 576 units3

Example 2a: Find the height of the pyramid.

Solution: In this example, we are given the slant height. Use the Pythagorean Theorem.

72 + h2 = 252

h2 = 576

h = 24

Example 2b: Find the volume of the pyramid in Example 2a.

Solution: V = 13(142)(24) = 1568 units3.

Example 3: Find the volume of the pyramid.

373 www.ck12.org

Solution: The base of the pyramid is a right triangle. The area of the base is 12(14)(8) = 56 units2.

V = 13(56)(17) ≈ 317.33 units3

Example 4: A rectangular pyramid has a base area of 56 cm2 and a volume of 224 cm3. What is the

height of the pyramid?

Solution:

V = 1

3

Bh

224 = 1

3

· 56h

12 = h

Volume of a Cone

Volume of a Cone: V = 13pir2h.

This is the the same relationship as a pyramid’s volume with a prism’s volume.

Example 5: Find the volume of the cone.

Solution: First, we need the height. Use the Pythagorean Theorem.

52 + h2 = 152

h =

√

200 = 10

√

2

V = 1

3

(52)

(

10

√

2

)

pi ≈ 370.24

Example 6: Find the volume of the cone.

www.ck12.org 374

Solution: We can use the same volume formula. Find the radius.

V = 1

3

pi(32)(6) = 18pi ≈ 56.55

Example 7: The volume of a cone is 484pi cm3 and the height is 12 cm. What is the radius?

Solution: Plug in what you know to the volume formula.

484pi = 1

3

pir2(12)

121 = r2

11 = r

Composite Solids

Example 8: Find the volume of the composite solid. All bases are squares.

Solution: This is a square prism with a square pyramid on top. First, we need the height of the pyramid

portion. Using the Pythagorean Theorem, we have, h =

√

252 − 242 = 7.

Vprism = (48)(48)(18) = 41472 cm3

Vpyramid =

1

3

(482)(7) = 5376 cm3

The total volume is 41472 + 5376 = 46, 848 cm3.

Know What? Revisited The original volume of the pyramid is 13(7062)(407.5) ≈ 67, 704, 223.33 f t3.

Review Questions

• Questions 1-13 are similar to Examples 1-3, 5 and 6.

• Questions 14-22 are similar to Examples 4 and 7.

375 www.ck12.org

• Questions 23-31 are similar to Example 8.

Find the volume of each regular pyramid and right cone. Round any decimal answers to the nearest

hundredth. The bases of these pyramids are either squares or equilateral triangles.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

www.ck12.org 376

6.

7.

Find the volume of the following non-regular pyramids and cones. Round any decimal answers to the

nearest hundredth.

8.

9.

10.

11. base is a rectangle

377 www.ck12.org

12.

13.

A regular tetrahedron has four equilateral triangles as its faces. Use the diagram to answer questions

14-16. Round your answers to the nearest hundredth.

14. What is the area of the base of this regular tetrahedron?

15. What is the height of this figure? Be careful!

16. Find the volume.

A regular octahedron has eight equilateral triangles as its faces. Use the diagram to answer questions

17-21. Round your answers to the nearest hundredth.

17. Describe how you would find the volume of this figure.

18. Find the volume.

www.ck12.org 378

19. The volume of a square pyramid is 72 square inches and the base edge is 4 inches. What is the

height?

20. If the volume of a cone is 30pi cm3 and the radius is 5 cm, what is the height?

21. If the volume of a cone is 105pi cm3 and the height is 35 cm, what is the radius?

22. The volume of a triangle pyramid is 170 in3 and the base area is 34 in2. What is the height of the

pyramid?

For questions 23-31, round your answer to the nearest hundredth.

23. Find the volume of the base prism.

24. Find the volume of the pyramid.

25. Find the volume of the entire solid.

The solid to the right is a cube with a cone cut out.

26. Find the volume of the cube.

27. Find the volume of the cone.

28. Find the volume of the entire solid.

The solid to the left is a cylinder with a cone on top.

29. Find the volume of the cylinder.

30. Find the volume of the cone.

31. Find the volume of the entire solid.

379 www.ck12.org

Review Queue Answers

1. (82)(12) = 768 in3

2. (42)(12)pi = 192pi ≈ 603.19

3. Find slant height, l = 13. S A = 100 + 12(40)(13) = 360 in2

7.6 Surface Area and Volume of Spheres

Learning Objectives

• Find the surface area of a sphere.

• Find the volume of a sphere.

Review Queue

1. List three spheres you would see in real life.

2. Find the area of a circle with a 6 cm radius.

3. Find the volume of a cylinder with the circle from #2 as the base and a height of 5 cm.

Know What? A regulation bowling ball is a sphere with a circumference of 27 inches. Find the radius

of a bowling ball, its surface area and volume. You may assume the bowling ball does not have any finger

holes. Round your answers to the nearest hundredth.

Defining a Sphere

A sphere is the last of the three-dimensional shapes that we will find the surface area and volume of. Think

of a sphere as a three-dimensional circle.

Sphere: The set of all points, in three-dimensional space, which are equidistant from a point.

The radius has an endpoint on the sphere and the other endpoint is the center.

The diameter must contain the center.

www.ck12.org 380

Great Circle: A cross section of a sphere that contains the diameter.

A great circle is the largest circle cross section in a sphere. The circumference of a sphere is the

circumference of a great circle.

Every great circle divides a sphere into two congruent hemispheres.

Example 1: The circumference of a sphere is 26pi f eet. What is the radius of the sphere?

Solution: The circumference is referring to the circumference of a great circle. Use C = 2pir.

2pir = 26pi

r = 13 f t.

Surface Area of a Sphere

The best way to understand the surface area of a sphere is to watch the link by Russell Knightley, http:

//www.rkm.com.au/ANIMATIONS/animation-Sphere-Surface-Area-Derivation.html.

Surface Area of a Sphere: S A = 4pir2.

Example 2: Find the surface area of a sphere with a radius of 14 feet.

Solution:

S A = 4pi(14)2

= 784pi f t2

Example 3: Find the surface area of the figure below.

Solution: Be careful when finding the surface area of a hemisphere because you need to include the area

of the base.

381 www.ck12.org

S A = pir2 + 1

2

4pir2

= pi(62) + 2pi(62)

= 36pi + 72pi = 108pi cm2

Example 4: The surface area of a sphere is 100pi in2. What is the radius?

Solution:

S A = 4pir2

100pi = 4pir2

25 = r2

5 = r

Example 5: Find the surface area of the following solid.

Solution: This solid is a cylinder with a hemisphere on top. It is one solid, so do not include the bottom

of the hemisphere or the top of the cylinder.

S A = LAcylinder + LAhemisphere + Abase circle

= pirh + 1

2

4pir2 + pir2

= pi(6)(13) + 2pi62 + pi62

= 78pi + 72pi + 36pi

= 186pi in2 “LA” stands for lateral area.

Volume of a Sphere

To see an animation of the volume of a sphere, see http://www.rkm.com.au/ANIMATIONS/animation-Sphere-Volume-Derivation.

html by Russell Knightley.

Volume of a Sphere: V = 43pir3.

www.ck12.org 382

Example 6: Find the volume of a sphere with a radius of 9 m.

Solution:

V = 4

3

pi63

= 4

3

pi(216)

= 288pi m3

Example 7: A sphere has a volume of 14137.167 f t3, what is the radius?

Solution:

V = 4

3

pir3

14137.167 = 4

3

pir3

3

4pi

· 14137.167 = r3

3375 = r3

At this point, you will need to take the cubed root of 3375. Ask your teacher how to do this on your

calculator.

3√3375 = 15 = r

Example 8: Find the volume of the following solid.

Solution:

Vcylinder = pi62(13) = 78pi

Vhemisphere =

1

2

(4

3

pi63

)

= 36pi

Vtotal = 78pi + 36pi = 114pi in3

Know What? Revisited The radius would be 27 = 2pir, or r = 4.30 inches. The surface area would be

4pi4.32 ≈ 232.35 in2, and the volume would be 43pi4.33 ≈ 333.04 in3.

Review Questions

• Questions 1-3 look at the definition of a sphere.

383 www.ck12.org

• Questions 4-17 are similar to Examples 1, 2, 4, 6 and 7.

• Questions 18-21 are similar to Example 3 and 5.

• Questions 22-25 are similar to Example 8.

• Question 26 is a challenge.

• Questions 27-29 are similar to Example 8.

• Question 30 analyzes the formula for the surface area of a sphere.

1. Are there any cross-sections of a sphere that are not a circle? Explain your answer.

2. List all the parts of a sphere that are the same as a circle.

3. List any parts of a sphere that a circle does not have.

Find the surface area and volume of a sphere with: (Leave your answer in terms of pi)

4. a radius of 8 in.

5. a diameter of 18 cm.

6. a radius of 20 ft.

7. a diameter of 4 m.

8. a radius of 15 ft.

9. a diameter of 32 in.

10. a circumference of 26pi cm.

11. a circumference of 50pi yds.

12. The surface area of a sphere is 121pi in2. What is the radius?

13. The volume of a sphere is 47916pi m3. What is the radius?

14. The surface area of a sphere is 4pi f t2. What is the volume?

15. The volume of a sphere is 36pi mi3. What is the surface area?

16. Find the radius of the sphere that has a volume of 335 cm3. Round your answer to the nearest

hundredth.

17. Find the radius of the sphere that has a surface area 225pi f t2.

Find the surface area of the following shapes. Leave your answers in terms of pi.

18.

19.

www.ck12.org 384

20.

21. You may assume the bottom is open.

Find the volume of the following shapes. Round your answers to the nearest hundredth.

22.

23.

24.

25.

385 www.ck12.org

26. A sphere has a radius of 5 cm. A right cylinder has the same radius and volume. Find the height of

the cylinder.

Tennis balls with a 3 inch diameter are sold in cans of three. The can is a cylinder. Round your answers

to the nearest hundredth.

27. What is the volume of one tennis ball?

28. What is the volume of the cylinder?

29. Assume the balls touch the can on the sides, top and bottom. What is the volume of the space not

occupied by the tennis balls?

30. How does the formula of the surface area of a sphere relate to the area of a circle?

Review Queue Answers

1. Answers will vary. Possibilities are any type of ball, certain lights, or the 76/Unical orb.

2. 36pi

3. 180pi

7.7 Extension: Exploring Similar Solids

Learning Objectives

• Find the relationship between similar solids and their surface areas and volumes.

Similar Solids

Recall that two shapes are similar if all the corresponding angles are congruent and the corresponding sides

are proportional.

Similar Solids: Two solids are similar if they are the same type of solid and their corresponding radii,

heights, base lengths, widths, etc. are proportional.

www.ck12.org 386

Example 1: Are the two rectangular prisms similar? How do you know?

Solution: Match up the corresponding heights, widths, and lengths.

small prism

large prism

= 3

4.5

= 4

6

= 5

7.5

The congruent ratios tell us the two prisms are similar.

Example 2: Determine if the two triangular pyramids similar.

Solution: Just like Example 1, let’s match up the corresponding parts.

6

8 =

3

4 =

12

16 however, 812 = 23 .

These triangle pyramids are not similar.

Surface Areas of Similar Solids

If two shapes are similar, then the ratio of the area is a square of the scale factor.

For example, the two rectangles are similar because their sides are in a ratio of 5:8. The area of the larger

rectangle is 8(16) = 128 units2. The area of the smaller rectangle is 5(10) = 50 units2.

Comparing the areas in a ratio, it is 50 : 128 = 25 : 64 = 52 = 82.

So, what happens with the surface areas of two similar solids?

Example 3: Find the surface area of the two similar rectangular prisms.

387 www.ck12.org

Solution:

S Asmaller = 2(4 · 3) + 2(4 · 5) + 2(3 · 5)

= 24 + 40 + 30 = 94 units2

S Alarger = 2(6 · 4.5) + 2(4.5 · 7.5) + 2(6 · 7.5)

= 54 + 67.5 + 90 = 211.5 units2

Now, find the ratio of the areas. 94211.5 = 49 = 2

2

32 . The sides are in a ratio of 46 = 23 , so the surface areas are

in a ratio of 2232 .

Surface Area Ratio: If two solids are similar with a scale factor of ab , then the surface areas are in a

ratio of

(

a

b

)2.

Example 4: Two similar cylinders are below. If the ratio of the areas is 16:25, what is the height of the

taller cylinder?

Solution: First, we need to take the square root of the area ratio to find the scale factor,

√

16

25 =

4

5 . Set

up a proportion to find h.

4

5

= 24

h

4h = 120

h = 30

Example 5: Using the cylinders from Example 4, if the area of the smaller cylinder is 1536pi cm2, what is

the area of the larger cylinder?

Solution: Set up a proportion using the ratio of the areas, 16:25.

16

25

= 1536pi

A

16A = 38400pi

A = 2400pi cm2

www.ck12.org 388

Volumes of Similar Solids

Let’s look at what we know about similar solids so far.

Table 7.3:

Ratios Units

Scale Factor ab in, ft, cm, m, etc.

Ratio of the Surface Areas

(

a

b

)2

in2, f t2, cm2,m2, etc.

Ratio of the Volumes ?? in3, f t3, cm3,m3, etc.

If the ratio of the volumes follows the pattern from above, it should be the cube of the scale factor.

Example 6: Find the volume of the following rectangular prisms. Then, find the ratio of the volumes.

Solution:

Vsmaller = 3(4)(5) = 60

Vlarger = 4.5(6)(7.5) = 202.5

The ratio is 60202.5 , which reduces to 827 = 2

3

33 .

Volume Ratio: If two solids are similar with a scale factor of ab , then the volumes are in a ratio of

(

a

b

)3.

Example 7: Two spheres have radii in a ratio of 3:4. What is the ratio of their volumes?

Solution: If we cube 3 and 4, we will have the ratio of the volumes. 33 : 43 = 27 : 64.

Example 8: If the ratio of the volumes of two similar prisms is 125:8, what is the scale factor?

Solution: Take the cubed root of 125 and 8 to find the scale factor.

3√125 : 3

√

8 = 5 : 2

Example 9: Two similar right triangle prisms are below. If the ratio of the volumes is 343:125, find the

missing sides in both triangles.

Solution: The scale factor is 7:5, the cubed root. With the scale factor, we can now set up several

proportions.

389 www.ck12.org

7

5

= 7

y

7

5

= x

10

7

5

= 35

w

72 + x2 = z2 7

5

= z

v

y = 5 x = 14 w = 25 72 + 142 = z2

z =

√

245 = 7

√

5 7

5

= 7

√

5

v

→ v = 5

√

5

Example 10: The ratio of the surface areas of two similar cylinders is 16:81. What is the ratio of the

volumes?

Solution: First, find the scale factor. If we take the square root of both numbers, the ratio is 4:9. Now,

cube this to find the ratio of the volumes, 43 : 93 = 64 : 729.

Review Questions

• Questions 1-4 are similar to Examples 1 and 2.

• Questions 5-14 are similar to Examples 3-8 and 10.

• Questions 15-18 are similar to Example 9.

• Questions 19 and 20 are similar to Example 1.

Determine if each pair of right solids are similar.

1.

2.

3.

www.ck12.org 390

4.

5. Are all cubes similar? Why or why not?

6. Two prisms have a scale factor of 1:4. What is the ratio of their surface areas?

7. Two pyramids have a scale factor of 2:7. What is the ratio of their volumes?

8. Two spheres have radii of 5 and 9. What is the ratio of their volumes?

9. The surface area of two similar cones is in a ratio of 64:121. What is the scale factor?

10. The volume of two hemispheres is in a ratio of 125:1728. What is the scale factor?

11. A cone has a volume of 15pi and is similar to another larger cone. If the scale factor is 5:9, what is

the volume of the larger cone?

12. The ratio of the volumes of two similar pyramids is 8:27. What is the ratio of their total surface

areas?

13. The ratio of the volumes of two tetrahedrons is 1000:1. The smaller tetrahedron has a side of length

6 cm. What is the side length of the larger tetrahedron?

14. The ratio of the surface areas of two cubes is 64:225. What is the ratio of the volumes?

Below are two similar square pyramids with a volume ratio of 8:27. The base lengths are equal to the

heights. Use this to answer questions 15-18.

18. What is the scale factor?

19. What is the ratio of the surface areas?

20. Find h, x and y.

21. Find the volume of both pyramids.

Use the hemispheres below to answer questions 19-20.

1. Are the two hemispheres similar? How do you know?

2. Find the ratio of the surface areas and volumes.

391 www.ck12.org

7.8 Chapter 11 Review

Keywords, Theorems, & Formulas

Exploring Solids

• Polyhedron

• Face

• Edge

• Vertex

• Prism

• Pyramid

• Euler’s Theorem

• Regular Polyhedron

• Regular Tetrahedron

• Cube

• Regular Octahedron

• Regular Dodecahedron

• Regular Icosahedron

• Cross-Section

• Net

Surface Area of Prisms & Cylinders

• Lateral Face

• Lateral Edge

• Base Edge

• Right Prism

• Oblique Prism

• Surface Area

• Lateral Area

• Surface Area of a Right Prism

• Cylinder

• Surface Area of a Right Cylinder

Surface Area of Pyramids & Cones

• Surface Area of a Regular Pyramid

• Cone

• Slant Height

• Surface Area of a Right Cone

Volume of Prisms & Cylinders

• Volume

• Volume of a Cube Postulate

• Volume Congruence Postulate

• Volume of a Rectangular Prism

www.ck12.org 392

• Volume of a Prism

• Cavalieri’s Principle

• Volume of a Cylinder

Volume of Pyramids & Cones

• Volume of a Pyramid

• Volume of a Cone

Surface Area and Volume of Spheres

• Sphere

• Great Circle

• Surface Area of a Sphere

• Volume of a Sphere

Extension: Similar Solids

• Similar Solids

• Surface Area Ratio

• Volume Ratio

Review Questions

Match the shape with the correct name.

1. Triangular Prism

2. Icosahedron

3. Cylinder

4. Cone

393 www.ck12.org

5. Tetrahedron

6. Pentagonal Prism

7. Octahedron

8. Hexagonal Pyramid

9. Octagonal Prism

10. Sphere

11. Cube

12. Dodecahedron

Match the formula with its description.

13. Volume of a Prism - A. 13pir2h

14. Volume of a Pyramid - B. pir2h

15. Volume of a Cone - C. 4pir2

16. Volume of a Cylinder - D. 43pir3

17. Volume of a Sphere - E. pir2 + pirl

18. Surface Area of a Prism - F. 2pir2 + 2pirh

19. Surface Area of a Pyramid - G. 13Bh

20. Surface Area of a Cone - H. Bh

21. Surface Area of a Cylinder - I. B + 12Pl

22. Surface Area of a Sphere - J. The sum of the area of the bases and the area of each rectangular lateral

face.

Texas Instruments Resources

In the CK-12 Texas Instruments Geometry FlexBook, there are graphing calculator activities

designed to supplement the objectives for some of the lessons in this chapter. See http:

//www.ck12.org/flexr/chapter/9696.

7.9 Study Guide

Keywords: Define, write theorems, and/or draw a diagram for each word below.

1st Section: Exploring Solids

Polyhedron

Face

Edge

Vertex

Prism

www.ck12.org 394

Pyramid

Euler’s Theorem

Regular Polyhedron

Regular Tetrahedron

Cube

Regular Octahedron

Regular Dodecahedron

Regular Icosahedron

Cross-Section

Net

Homework:

2nd Section: Surface Area of Prisms & Cylinders

Lateral Face

Lateral Edge

Base Edge

Right Prism

Oblique Prism

Surface Area

Lateral Area

395 www.ck12.org

Surface Area of a Right Prism

Cylinder

Surface Area of a Right Cylinder

Homework:

3rd Section: Surface Area of Pyramids & Cones

Surface Area of a Regular Pyramid

Cone

Slant Height

Surface Area of a Right Cone

Homework:

4th Section: Volume of Prisms & Cylinders

Volume

Volume of a Cube Postulate

www.ck12.org 396

Volume Congruence Postulate

Volume Addition Postulate

Volume of a Rectangular Prism

Volume of a Prism

Cavalieri’s Principle

Volume of a Cylinder

Homework:

5th Section: Volume of Pyramids & Cones

Volume of a Pyramid

Volume of a Cone

Homework:

6th Section: Surface Area and Volume of Spheres

Sphere

Great Circle

Surface Area of a Sphere

Volume of a Sphere

Homework:

Extension: Similar Solids

Similar Solids

Surface Area Ratio

Volume Ratio

Homework:

397 www.ck12.org

Chapter 8

Analyzing Conic Sections

8.1 Introduction to Conic Sections

Learning Objectives

• Consider the results when two simple mathematical objects are intersected.

• Be comfortable working with an infinite two-sided cone.

• Know the basic types of figures that result from intersecting a plane and a cone.

• Know some of the history of the study of conic sections.

Introduction: Intersections of Figures

Some of the best mathematical shapes come from intersecting two other important shapes. Two spheres

intersect to form a circle:

Two planes intersect to form a line:

www.ck12.org 398

While simple and beautiful, for these two examples of intersections there isn’t much else to investigate.

For the spheres, no matter how we put them together, their intersection is always either nothing, a point

(when they just touch), a circle of various sizes, or a sphere if they happen to be exactly the same size and

coincide. Once we’ve exhausted this list, the inquiry is over. Planes are even simpler: the intersection of

two distinct planes is either nothing (if the planes are parallel) or a line.

But some intersections yield more complex results. For instance a plane can intersect with a cube in

numerous ways. Below a plane intersects a cube to form an equilateral triangle.

Here a plane intersects a cube and forms a regular hexagon.

Review Questions

1. Describe all the types of shapes that can be produced by the intersection of a plane and a cube.

2. What is the side-length of the regular hexagon that is produced in the above diagram when the cube

399 www.ck12.org

has side-length 1?

Review Answers

1. Square, rectangle, pentagon, others.

2. length =

√

2

2

Intersections with Cones

One class of intersections is of particular interest: The intersection of a plane and a cone. These intersections

are called conic sections and the first person known to have studied them extensively is the Ancient Greek

mathematician Menaechmus in the 3rd Century B. C. E. Part of his interest in the conic sections came

from his work on a classic Greek problem called “doubling the cube,” and we will describe this problem

and Menaechmus’ approach that uses conic sections in section three. The intersections of the cone and the

plane are so rich that the resulting shapes have continued to be of interest and generate new ideas from

Menaechmus’ time until the present.

Before we really delve into what we mean by a plane and a cone, we can look at an intuitive example.

Suppose by a cone we just mean an ice-cream cone. And by a plane we mean a piece of paper. Well, if

you sliced through an upright ice-cream cone with a horizontal piece of paper you would find that the two

objects intersect at a circle.

That’s very nice. But unlike the intersection of two spheres, which also resulted in a circle, that’s not all

we get. If we tilt the paper (or the ice cream cone) things start to get tricky.

First things first, we better make sure we know what we mean by “plane” and “cone”. Let’s use the simplest

definitions possible. So by “plane”, we mean the infinitely thin flat geometric object that extends forever

in all directions. Even though infinity is a tricky concept, this plane is in some sense simpler than one that

ends arbitrarily. There is no boundary to think about with the infinite plane. And what do we mean by

a cone? An ice-cream cone is a good start. In fact, it’s very similar to how the ancient Greeks defined a

cone, as a right triangle rotated about one if its legs.

www.ck12.org 400

Like we do with the infinite geometric plane, we want to idealize this object a bit too. As with the plane,

to avoid having to deal with a boundary, let’s suppose it continues infinitely in the direction of its open

end.

But the Greek mathematician Apollonius noticed that it helps even more to have it go to infinity in the

other direction. This way, a cone can be thought of as an infinite collection of lines, and since geometric

lines go on forever in both directions, a cone also extends to infinity in both directions. Here is a picture

of what we will call a cone in this chapter (remember it extends to infinity in both directions).

A cone can be formally defined as a three-dimensional collection of lines, all forming an equal angle with

a central line or axis. In the above picture, the central line is vertical.

Review Questions

3. What other mathematical objects can be generated by a collection of lines?

Review Answers

3. Cylinder (infinite), plane, three-sided infinite pyramids, others.

401 www.ck12.org

Intersections of an Infinite Cone and Plane

Like with the ice cream cone and the piece of paper, some intersections of this infinite cone with an infinite

plane yield a circle.

Other intersections yield something a bit less tidy. In the picture below, the plane is parallel to the axis of

the cone.

But it turns out that the set of intersections of a cone and a plane forms a beautiful, mathematically

consistent, set of shapes that have interesting properties. So in this chapter we embark on a study of these

intersections called conic sections.

Note: Although we will not prove it here, it doesn’t matter if the cone is asymmetrical or tilted to one

side (also called “oblique”). If you include “tilted cones” the same conic sections result. So, for simplicity’s

sake let’s stick with non-tilted, or “right” cones and focus on what happens

www.ck12.org 402

Let’s begin by doing a rough tally of the kinds of shapes it seems we can generate by slicing planes through

our cone. First of all, we have the circle, as we discovered with the ice cream cone above. A circle is

formed when the plane is perpendicular to the line in the middle of the cone.

If we tilt the plane a little, but not so much that it intersects both cones, we get something more oval

shaped. This is called an ellipse. Later you will learn many of the fascinating properties of the ellipse.

If really tilt the plane more so that it only intersects one side of the cone, but we get a big infinite “U”.

This shape is called a parabola and like the ellipse it has a number of surprising properties.

Then if we tilt it even further, we intersect both sides of the cone and get two big “U’s” going in opposite

403 www.ck12.org

directions.

This pair of objects is called a hyperbola, and, like the parabola and ellipse, the hyperbola has a number

of interesting properties that we will discuss.

Finally, in a few cases we get what are called “degenerate” conics. For instance, if we line up a vertical

plane with the vertex of the cone, we get two crossing lines.

Review Questions

4. Are there any other types of intersections between a plane and a cone besides the ones illustrated

above?

5. Is it possible for a plane to miss a cone entirely?

Review Answers

4. Yes, the plane could meet the vertex, resulting in an intersection of a single point.

5. It is not possible for a plane to miss a cone entirely since both of the objects extend infinitely.

Applications and Importance

The intersections of cones and planes produce an interesting set of shapes, which we will study in the

upcoming sections. We will also see numerous applications of these shapes to the physical world. Why is

it that the intersection of a cone and a plane would produce so many applications? We don’t seem to see

www.ck12.org 404

a lot of cones or planes in our daily life. But at closer inspection they are everywhere. Point sources of

light, approximated by such sources as a flashlight or the sun, shine in cone-shaped array, so for instance

the image of a flashlight against a slanted wall is an ellipse.

The geometric properties of conics, such as the focal property of the ellipse, turn out to have many physical

ramifications, such as the design of telescopes. And, when we inspect the algebraic representations of conic

sections, we will see that there are similarities with the law of gravity, which in turn has ramifications for

planetary motion.

Lesson Summary

In summary, here are some of the ways that a plane can intersect a cone.

A circle

an “oval” called the ellipse

A big infinite “U” called a parabola.

405 www.ck12.org

Two big, infinite “U”s called a hyperbola.

Strange “degenerate” shapes like two crossing lines, as well as other examples you may have found in

Review Question 1.

This array of shapes has a surprising amount of mathematical coherence, as well as a large number of

interesting properties.

Vocabulary

Cone A three-dimensional collection of lines, all forming an equal angle with a central line or axis.

Conic section The points of intersection between a cone and a plane.

8.2 Circles and Ellipses

Learning Objectives

• Understand the difference between an “oval” and an ellipse.

• Recognize and work with equations for ellipses.

• Derive the focal property of ellipses.

www.ck12.org 406

• Understand the equivalence of different definitions of ellipses.

• Reconstruct Dandelin’s sphere construction.

• Know some of the different ways people have approached ellipses throughout history.

• Understand some of the important applications of ellipses.

Introduction

Let’s begin with the first class of shapes discussed in the last section. When the plane makes a finite

intersection with one side of the cone, we get either a circle or the “oval-shaped” object illustrated in the

previous section. It turns out that this is no ordinary oval, but something called an ellipse, a shape with

special properties.

Like parallelograms, or any other shape with lots of interesting properties, ellipses can be defined by some

of these properties, and then the other properties necessarily follow from the definition. For example,

a parallelogram is typically defined as a quadrilateral with each pair of opposite pairs of sides parallel.

Once you define it this way, it follows that the opposite sides must also be equal in length, and that the

diagonals must bisect each other. Well, if you instead started by defining a parallelogram by one of these

other properties, for instance opposite sides having equal lengths, then you would end up with the same

class of shapes. The same thing happens for ellipses. One way to define an ellipse is as a “stretched out

circle”. It’s the shape you would get if you sketched a circle on a deflated balloon and then stretched out

the balloon evenly in two opposite directions:

It’s also the shape of the surface of water that results when you tilt a round glass:

Or an ellipse could be thought of as the shape of a circle drawn on a piece of paper when it is viewed at

an angle.

Equations of Ellipses

This “stretching” can be represented algebraically. For simplicity, take the circle of radius 1 centered at

the origin (0,0). The distance formula tells us that this is the set of points (x, y) that is a distance 1 unit

away from the origin.

D =

√

(x1 − x2)2 + (y1 − y2)2

1 =

√

(x − 0)2 + (y − 0)2

1 = x2 + y2

407 www.ck12.org

This equation, x2 + y2 = 1, can be altered to stretch the circle in the horizontal (i.e. x−axis) direction by

dividing the x variable by a constant a > 1,

( x

a

)2

+ y2 = 1

Why does this stretch the circle horizontally? Well, the effect of dividing x by a is that for each y−value

in an ordered pair (x, y) that satisfies the original equation, the corresponding x value must be multiplied

by a in order for the pair to make a solution to the altered equation. So solutions (x, y) of the circle are in

one-to-one correspondence with solutions (ax, y) of the altered equation, hence stretching the corresponding

graph to the left and right by a factor of a. For example, here is the graph of

(

x

2

)2

+ y2 = 1:

Generalizing the equation by allowing a stretch in the vertical direction, we get the following.

( x

a

)2

+

( y

b

)2

= 1

The factor a stretches the circle in the horizontal direction and the factor b stretches the circle in the

vertical direction. If a = b, this is just a circle. When a , b, this equation represents an ellipse. The ellipse

is stretched in the horizontal direction if b < a and it is stretched in the vertical direction if a < b. Often

the above equation is written as follows.

x2

a2

+ y

2

b2

= 1

This is called the standard form of the equation of an ellipse, assuming that the ellipse is centered at (0,0).

To sketch a graph of an ellipse with the equation x2a2 +

y2

b2 = 1, start by plotting the four axes intercepts,

which are easy to find by plugging in 0 for x and then for y. Then sketch the ellipse freehand, or with a

graphing program or calculator.

Example 1 Sketch the graph of x24 +

y2

9 = 1.

www.ck12.org 408

Solution: This equation can be rewritten as x222 +

y2

32 = 1. After setting x = 0 and y = 0 to find the y− and

x−intercepts, (0,3), (0,-3), (2,0), and (-2,0), we sketch the ellipse about these points:

Example 2 Sketch the graph of x216 + y2 = 1.

Solution: This can be rewritten as x242 +

y2

12 = 1. After finding the intercepts and sketching the graph, we

have:

The segment spanning the long direction of the ellipse is called the major axis, and the segment spanning

the short direction of the ellipse is called the minor axis. So in the last example the major axis is the

segment from (-4,0) to (4,0) and the minor axis is the segment from (0,-1) to (0,1).

The major and minor axes are examples of what are sometimes called reference lines. Apollonius, the

Ancient Greek mathematician who wrote an early treatise on conics, used these and other reference lines to

orient conic sections. Though the Greeks did not use a coordinate plane to discuss geometry, these reference

lines offer a framing perspective that is similar to the Cartesian plane that we use today. Apollonius’ way of

framing conics with reference lines was the closest mathematics came to the system of coordinate geometry

that you know so well until Descartes’ and Fermat’s systematic work in the seventeenth century.

Example 3 Not all equations for ellipses start off in the standard form above. For example, 25x2+9y2 = 225

is an ellipse. Put it in the proper form and graph it.

Solution: First, divide both sides by 225, to get: x29 +

y2

25 = 1, or x

2

32 +

y2

52 = 1. Finding the intercepts and

graphing, we have:

409 www.ck12.org

Review Questions

1. It was mentioned above that when a round glass of water is tilted, the surface of the water is an

ellipse. Using our working definition of an ellipse as “stretched out circle”, explain why you think

the water takes this shape.

2. Sketch the following ellipse: 36x2 + 25y2 = 900

3. Now try sketching this ellipse where the numbers don’t turn out to be so neat: 3x2 + 4y2 = 12

Review Answers

1. Answers may vary, but should explain why the shape that results stretches a circle in one direction

because the width of the glass is constant.

2.

www.ck12.org 410

3.

The Focal Property

In every ellipse there are two special points called the foci (foci is plural, focus is singular), which lie

inside the ellipse and which can be used to define the shape. For an ellipse centered at (0,0) that is wider

than it is tall, its major axis is horizontal and its foci are at

(√

a2 − b2, 0

)

and

(

−

√

a2 − b2, 0

)

.

What is the significance of these points? The ellipse has a geometric property relating to these points that

is similar to a circle’s relationship with its center. Remember a circle can be thought of as the set of points

in a plane that are a certain distance from the center point. In fact, that is typically the definition of a

circle. Well, the foci act like the center except that there are two of them. An ellipse is the set of points

where the sum of the distance between each point on the ellipse and each of the two foci is a constant

number. In the diagram below, for any point P on the ellipse, F1P + F2P = d, where F1 and F2 are the

foci and d is a constant.

411 www.ck12.org

Technology

This definition using the sum of the focal distance gives us a great way to draw ellipses. Sure, you can just

graph them on your calculator. But why not utilize a simpler technology that does the job just as well?

As you know, a circle could be drawn by fixing a string to a piece of paper, tying the other end to a pencil,

and then drawing the curve that keeps the string taut.

Similarly, an ellipse can be drawn by taking a string that is longer than the distance between two points,

fixing the two ends of the string to the two points. Then drawing all points that can be drawn when the

string is taut and the pencil is touching it. In the diagram above, the dotted line represents the string of

fixed length, which is attached at the foci F1 and F2. The string is looped around the pencil at P, and

then the pencil is moved, keeping the string taut, drawing all the points whose sum of distances between

F1 and F2 is the length of the string.

Review Questions

4. Use string and tacks to draw ellipses that

(a) are nearly circles

(b) are very different than circles

For each of these, what can you say about how the distance between the foci and the length of the string

compare?

Review Answers

4. Drawings may vary. For ellipses that are nearly circles, the distance between the foci is small

compared to the length of string.

The foci can also be used to measure how far an ellipse is “stretched” from a circle. The symbol ε stands

for the eccentricity of an ellipse, and it is defined by the distance between the foci divided by the length

of the major axis, or

√

a2−b2

a for horizontally oriented ellipses and

√

b2−a2

b for vertically oriented ellipses.

Since a circle is an ellipse where a = b, circles have an eccentricity of 0.

www.ck12.org 412

Review Questions

5. What is the full range of the eccentricity of an ellipse? What does it look like near the extremes of

this range?

Review Answers

5. The interval of possible values is ε ∈ [0, 1). At ε = 0, the ellipse is a circle; as the eccentricity

approaches 1 it becomes more and more elongated.

Turning the Definition of Ellipses on its Head

Often, this focal property is not though of as a property of ellipses, but rather a defining feature. To see

that these are equivalent, we have some to work to do. Let’s start by proving that stretched out circles

actually have this focal property. We want to prove that for a “stretched out circle” defined by the equation

x2

a2 +

y2

b2 = 1, where a and b are two positive numbers, the sum of the distance between every point on

the stretched circle and the two foci

(√

a2 − b2, 0

)

and

(

−

√

a2 − b2, 0

)

is the same. So we need to prove

that for every point on the shape defined by x2a2 +

y2

b2 = 1, the sum of the distances to

(√

a2 − b2, 0

)

and

(

−

√

a2 − b2, 0

)

is the same number.

Proof: Suppose a point (x, y) is on the curve defined by x2a2 +

y2

b2 = 1. Then we can solve for y in the

equation and express the point in terms of x:

y2

b2

= 1 − x

2

a2

y2 = a

2b2 − b2x2

a2

y =

√

a2b2 − b2x2

a2

Now, using the distance formula to compute the sum of the distance between the pairs of points:

(

x,

√

a2b2−b2x2

a2

)

and

(√

a2 − b2, 0

)

; and,

(

x,

√

a2b2−b2x2

a2

)

and

(

−

√

a2 − b2, 0

)

We have:

√

(

x −

√

a2 − b2

)2

+ a

2b2 − b2x2

a2

+

√

(

x +

√

a2 − b2

)2

+ a

2b2 − b2x2

a2

This algebraic equation looks daunting, but simplifying the expressions inside these square roots results in

a surprising result. This becomes

413 www.ck12.org

√

a2

(

x −

√

a2 − b2

)2

+ a2b2 − b2x2

a2

+

√

a2

(

x +

√

a2 − b2

)2

+ a2b2 − b2x2

a2

= 1

a

√

a2

(

x −

√

a2 − b2

)2

+ a2b2 − b2x2 +

√

a2

(

x +

√

a2 − b2

)2

+ a2b2 − b2x2

= 1

a

(

√

a2x2 − 2a2x

√

a2 − b2 + a4 − a2b2 + a2b2 − b2x2 +

√

a2x2 − 2a2x

√

a2 − b2 + a4 − a2b2 + a2b2 − b2x2

)

= 1

a

(

√

a2x2 − 2a2x

√

a2 − b2 + a4 − b2x2 +

√

a2x2 − 2a2x

√

a2 − b2 + a4 − b2x2

)

= 1

a

√

(

a2 − x

√

a2 − b2

)2

+

√

(

a2 + x

√

a2 − b2

)2

= 1

a

(

a2 − x

√

a2 − b2 + a2 + x

√

a2 − b2

)

= 1

a

(2a2)

= 2a

What a miraculous collapse! One of the gnarliest algebraic expressions that I have ever encountered turned

into the simple expression 2a. Most importantly, this reduced expression is merely a constant—it doesn’t

depend on x or y. This is exactly what we were hoping for. The sum of the distances between every point

on the ellipse and the two foci is always 2a. If you every find yourself needing to remember what this sum

is, the number 2a can be remembered most easily by computing it from an easy point such as one of the

shape’s x−intercepts, say (a, 0).

Review Questions

6. Compute the distance from the x−intercept (a, 0) and the two foci and show that it is in fact 2a.

7. What is the sum of the distances to the foci of the points on a vertically-oriented ellipse?

Review Answers

6. The distance between the x−intercept (a, 0) and

(√

a2 − b2, 0

)

is: a−

√

a2 − b2. The distance between

the x−intercept (a, 0) and

(

−

√

a2 − b2, 0

)

is: a +

√

a2 − b2.

Together these add to: a −

√

a2 − b2 + a +

√

a2 − b2 = 2a

7. 2b

Defining an Ellipse by Focal Distance

So all this computing simply means that “stretched-out circles”—what we’ve been calling ellipses—satisfy

the focal property. What would be great is if we could define ellipses by the focal property. This would be

a nice generalization of the way we define circles.

Recall that circles are defined as the set of points in a plane that are a constant distance from a center

point. Analogously, ellipses could be defined as a set of points in a plane for which the sum of the distances

www.ck12.org 414

to two focus points is a constant. In other words, this definition would yield the exact same set of shapes

as the “stretched out circle” definition that we started with.

Before proceeding we need to make sure of one thing. We’ve already proved that stretched out circles

satisfy the focal property, but how do we know that any shape satisfying the focal property is in turn a

stretched out circle? Well, the calculation above can simply be read backwards. In other words, suppose

you have a set of points that satisfy the focal property, that each point whose sum of the distances to the

points ( f , 0) and (− f , 0) is a fixed distance d. Now note that for any two positive numbers d and f with

2 f < d, there exist positive numbers a and b such that d = 2a and f =

√

a2 − b2. (this fact is a bit subtle

and is part of an exercise below.) So now we have a shape where every point (x, y) has a sum of distances

to the points

(√

a2 − b2, 0

)

and

(

−

√

a2 − b2, 0

)

which equals 2a. Using these expressions, the algebraic steps

of the proof above can simply be read backwards.

Review Questions

8. Explain why for any two positive numbers d and f with 2 f < d, there exist positive numbers a and

b such that d = 2a and f =

√

a2 − b2.

9. We just told you that the above proof could be read backwards. But you need to be careful when

following algebraic steps backwards, especially ones involving squares or square roots.

(a) For example, what happens when you follow this argument backwards?x = −2

x2 = 4

(b) Write a convincing argument that it is okay to follow the steps backwards in the above proof

that every stretched circle has the focal property.

Review Answers

8. Set a = d2 . Then we need to show that for f satisfying 2 f < d, there exists a number b such that

f =

√

a2 − b2. Since 2 f < d, 2 f < 2a by the definition of a (using the assumption d > 0). So f < a.

We can find b geometrically. Since f < a, there is a right triangle with one leg having length f and

hypotenuse a. Call the other leg of the triangle b.

Then the Pythagorean Theorem tells us that f 2 + b2 = a2, or equivalently f =

√

a2 − b2. So a and b

satisfy the necessary requirements.

9. (a) Taking the square root of both sides of x2 = 4 yields two solutions, x = ±2, instead of the one

value we already know (x = −2). The problem is that the operation of squaring a number is not

a one-to-one function. Both (−2)2 and 22 yield the same number. So some information is lost

during this step, and it cannot be perfectly “undone”, like other algebraic maneuvers.

(b) The student’s reason should include the fact no information is lost (through squaring both sides

or other operations) in any of these steps, so that each step is completely reversible.

Equation of an Ellipse Not Centered at the Origin

All the ellipses we’ve looked at so far are centered around the origin (0,0). To find an equation for ellipses

centered around another point, say (h, k), simply replace x with x − h and y with y − k. This will shift all

415 www.ck12.org

the points of the ellipse to the right h units (or left if h < 0) and to up k units (or down if k < 0). So the

general form for a horizontally- or vertically-oriented ellipse is:

(x − h)2

a2

+

(y − k)2

b2

= 1

It is centered about the point (h, k). If b < a, the ellipse is horizontally oriented and has foci

(

h +

√

a2 − b2, k

)

and

(

h −

√

a2 − b2, k

)

on its horizontal major axis. If a < b, it is vertically oriented and has foci

(

h, k +

√

a2 − b2

)

and

(

h, k −

√

a2 − b2

)

on its vertical major axis.

Example 4

Graph the equation 4x2 + 8x + 9y2 − 36y + 4 = 0.

Solution : We need to get the equation into the form of general equation above. The first step is to group

all the x terms and y terms, factor our the leading coefficients of x2 and y2, and move the constants to the

other side of the equation:

4(x2 + 2x) + 9(y2 − 4y) = −4

Now, we “complete the square” by adding the appropriate terms to the x expressions and the y expressions

to make a perfect square. (See http://authors.ck12.org/wiki/index.php/Algebra_I-Chapter-10#

Solving_Quadratic_Equations_by_Completing_the_Square for more on completing the square.)

4(x2 + 2x + 1) + 9(y2 − 4y + 4) = −4 + 4 + 36

Now we factor and divide by the coefficients to get:

(x + 1)2

9

+

(y − 2)2

4

= 1

And there we have it. Once it’s in this form, we see this is an ellipse is centered around the point (-1,2), it

has a horizontal major axis of length 3 and a vertical minor axis of length 2, and from this we can make a

sketch of the ellipse:

www.ck12.org 416

Review Questions

10. Explain why subtracting h from the x−term and k from the y−term in the equation for an ellipse

shifter the ellipse h horizontally and k vertically.

11. Graph this ellipse. x2 − 6x + 5y2 − 10y − 66 = 0

12. Now try this one that doesn’t have such nice numbers!

16x2 − 48x + 125y2 + 150y + 61 = 0

13. Now try this one. 3x2 − 12x + 5y2 + 10y − 3 = 0. What goes wrong? Explain what you think the

graph of this equation might look like.

14. What about this one. 5x2 − 15x− 2y2 +8y− 50 = 0? What goes wrong here? Explain what you think

the graph of this equation might look like.

Review Answers

10. If (x, y) is a solution to (x−h)2a2 +

(y−k)2

b2 = 1 then (x + h, y + k) is a solution to

(x−h)2

a2 +

(y−k)2

b2 = 1. This

produces a graph that is shifted horizontally by h and vertically by k.

11.

12.

13. After completing the square, we have the sum of positive numbers equaling a negative number. This

is an impossibility, so the equation has no solutions.

14. After completing the square, the x term and the y term are opposite signs. If you plot some points you

will see that the graph has two disconnected sections. This class of conic sections will be discussed

in the next section.

417 www.ck12.org

Difference Between an Ellipse and an Oval or Proving the Sliced

Cone Definition of an Ellipse

There is still one critical step missing in our exploration of ellipses. We showed that “stretched-out circles”

satisfy the focal property, and that any shape satisfying this property is in fact a “stretched-out circle”.

So these are actually the same class of shapes, and they are called ellipses. But not any oval-shaped curve

is an ellipse. Draw a random oval and you’re not likely to be able to find two points that satisfy the focal

property. In particular, when we cut a cone with a tilted plane, how do we know that the oval-shaped

curve that results is a “stretched out circle” satisfying the focal property?

Amazingly, the Ancient Greeks had an argument for this fact over two millennia ago. While it is impressive

that this problem was solved so long ago, the argument itself involves an intricate construction that isn’t as

illuminating as a more modern the one I’m going to show you instead. Most mathematicians prefer to use

a more modern argument that is simply stunning in its simplicity. This modern argument isn’t fancy—the

Greeks had all the tools they need to understand it—they just didn’t happen to think of it. It wasn’t until

1822 that the French mathematician Germinal Dandelin thought of this very clever construction. Dandelin

found a way to find the foci and prove the focal property in one fell swoop. Here’s what he said.

Take the conic section in question. Then choose a sphere that is just the right size so that when it’s dropped

into the conic, it touches the intersecting plane, as well as being snug against the cone on all sides. If you

prefer, you can think of the sphere as a perfectly round balloon that is blown up until it “just fits” inside

the cone, still touching the plane. Then do the same on the other side of the plane. fter we’ve drawn both

of these spheres we have this picture:

www.ck12.org 418

or

These spheres are often called “Dandelin spheres”, named after their discoverer. It turns out that not only

is our shape an ellipse (which, like all ellipses satisfies the focal property). But these spheres touch the

ellipse exactly at the two foci. To see this, consider this geometric argument.

The first thing to notice is that the circles C1 and C2 shown on the diagram below, where each sphere lies

snug against the cone, lie in parallel planes to one another. In particular, each line passing through these

circles and the vertex of the cone, such as the line l drawn below, cuts off equal segments between the

two circles. Let’s call d the shortest distance along the cone between circles C1 and C2. This can also be

thought of as the shortest distance between C1 and C2 that passes through the vertex of the cone.

The next thing to remember is a property of tangents to spheres that you may have learned in geometry.

If two segments are drawn between a point and a sphere, and if the line containing each segment is tangent

to the sphere, then the two segments are equal. In the diagram below, AB = AC. (This follows from the

fact that tangents are perpendicular to the radii of a sphere and that two congruent triangles are formed

in this configuration. See this description for more about this property.)

419 www.ck12.org

Now consider the point P on the ellipse drawn below. Let QR be the segment of length d between C1 and

C2 that passes through P. The distances between the two foci are marked d1 and d2. But d1 = RP and

d2 = PQ by the property of tangents to spheres discussed above. So d1 + d2 = RP + PQ = QR = d. And

this sum will always equal d, no matter what point P on the ellipse is chosen. So this proves the focal

property of ellipses: that the sum of the distances between any point on the ellipse and the two foci is

constant.

Review Questions

15. What do the Dandelin spheres look like in the case of a circle?

16. What is the area of an ellipse with the equation (x−h)2a2 +

(y−k)2

b2 = 1 ? (Hint: use a geometric argument

starting with the area of a circle.)

17. What is the perimeter of an ellipse with the equation (x−h)2a2 +

(y−k)2

b2 = 1 ?

Review Answers

15. The Dandelin spheres for a circle lie directly above one another, and both touch the circle at the

center point.

16. The area of an ellipse is abpi. To see why this is true, start with a circle of radius 1, which has an

area of pi. Then imagine an approximation with rectangles of the circle. Then stretch the rectangles

by a factor of a in the x−direction and by a factor of b in the y−direction to obtain an approximation

of the ellipse. This makes the rectangles a times wider and b times taller, giving an area that is ab

multiplied by the area of the approximation of the circle. Since this is true of any approximation of

www.ck12.org 420

the circle, the area of the ellipse must be abpi.

17. This is actually a much more difficult question than the previous one. You’re on your own! Even

the great Indian mathematician Ramanujan could only come up with an approximation: p ≈

pi

[

3(a + b) −

√

(3a + b)(a + 3b)

]

.

Applications

The number of places ellipses appear in the natural world is immense. Consider, for instance, how often

the simplest kind of ellipse, the circle, appears in your life. You see circles emanating as waves when you

throw a rock into a pond. You see circular pupils when you look at a set of eyes. You see what is roughly

a circle as the image of the sun or moon in the sky. The path of an object swung around on a string is a

circle. When any of these circles are viewed at an angle you see an elongated circle, or an ellipse. So it is

important to keep in mind that the discussion that follows covers only a few of the instances of ellipses in

our daily lives.

Planetary Motion

When a planet orbits the sun (or when any object orbits any other), it takes an elliptical path and the

sun lies at one of the two foci of the ellipse. Johannes Kepler first proposed this at the beginning of the

seventeenth century as one of three laws of planetary motions, after analyzing observational data of Tycho

Brahe. His law is accurate enough to produce modern computations which are still used to predict the

motion of artificial satellites. A century later, Newton’s law of gravity offers an explanation of why this

law might be true.

Figure 8.1

Review Questions

18. Though planets take an elliptical path around the sun, these ellipses often have a very low eccentricity,

meaning they are close to being circles. The diagram above exaggerates the elliptical shape of a

planet’s orbit. The Earth’s orbit has an eccentricity of 0.0167. Its minimum distance from the sun

is 146 million km. What is its maximum distance from the sun? If the sun’s diameter is 1.4 million

kilometers. Do both foci of the Earth’s orbit lie within the sun? Recall that the eccentricity of an

ellipse is ε =

√

a2−b2

a .

19. While the elliptical paths of planets are ellipses that are closely approximated by circles, comets

and asteroids often have orbits that are ellipses with very high eccentricity. Halley’s comet has an

421 www.ck12.org

eccentricity of 0.967, and comes within 54.6 million miles of the sun at its closest point, or “perihelion”.

What is the furthest point it reaches from the sun?

Review Answers

18. Assume that the orbit of the sun is an ellipse centered at (0,0). Then we can use the distance from the

origin to the focus

√

a2 − b2 to set up the equations 146 + 146 + 2

√

a2 − b2 = 2a and 0.167 =

√

a2−b2

a .

Solving we get a = 175.270, b = 175.245, and the distance from (0,0) to the foci, c = 2.927 (all units

are in millions of km). Finally the maximum distance from the earth to the sun is approximately 152

million km. From Kepler’s law, we know one of the foci of its orbit is at the center of the sun. The

other foci is 2(2.927) = 5.854 million kilometers away, so it is outside the sun (but not by very far!).

19. ∼ 3.25 billion miles.

Echo Rooms

The National Statuary Hall in the United States Capital Building is an example of an ellipse-shaped room,

sometimes called an “echo room”, which provide an interesting application to a property of ellipses. If a

person whispers very quietly at one of the foci, the sound echoes in a way such that a person at the other

focus can often hear them very clearly. Rumor has it that John Quincy Adams took advantage of this

property to eavesdrop on conversations in this room.

The property of ellipses that makes echo rooms work is called the “optical property.” So why echoes, if this

is an optical property? Well, light rays and sound waves bounce around in similar ways. In particular,

they both bounce off walls at equal angles. In the diagram below, α = β.

For a curved wall, they bounce at equal angles to the tangent line at that point:

So the “optical property” of ellipses is that lines between a point on the ellipse and the two foci form equal

angles to the tangent at that point, or in other words, whispers coming from one foci bounce directly to

the other foci. In the diagram below, for each Q on the ellipse, ∠α ∠β.

www.ck12.org 422

This seems reasonable, given the symmetry of the ellipse, but how do we know it is true? First, let’s prove

an important property that is a bit more general. Suppose you have two points, P1 and P2, and a line l,

and you are interested in the shortest possible path between two P1 and P2, that intersects with l.

A nice way to find this is to reflect P2 across L, obtaining the point P′2 in the diagram below:

Since l lies between P1 and P′2, it’s much easier to find the shortest distance between P1 and P′2 that passes

through l. It’s simply the shortest path between P1 and P′2: a straight line! But for every path between

P1 and P2, we can reflect the part from l to P2 to get a path equal in length between P1 and P′2. So the

shortest path between P1 and P2 is simply the shortest path between P1 and P′2 (the straight line), with

the part between l and P′2 reflected to get a path between l and P2. So the shortest path from P1 to P2

that intersects with l is P1Q followed by QP2.

The part of the above diagram that is going to help us prove the optical property is that since ∠1 ∠2

(vertical angles) and ∠2 ∠3 (reflected angles), then ∠1 ∠3 (transitive property). Thus the shortest path

from P1 to P2 that intersects with l consists of two segments that meet the line at equal angles.

Now to prove the optical property of the ellipse, apply the above situation to the ellipse. In the picture

below, P1 and P2 are foci of the ellipse and Q is the intersection with tangent line l.

423 www.ck12.org

The optical property states that ∠α ∠β. This is true because all points other than Q on line l lie outside

the ellipse. Points outside the ellipse have a combined distance to the two foci that is greater than points

on the ellipse. So Q is the point on line l with the smallest combined distance to points P1 to P2. Thus,

like we showed in general above, ∠α ∠β. So the optical property has been proved.

Review Questions

20. Design the largest possible echo room with the following constraints: You would like to spy on

someone who will be 3 m from the tip of the ellipse. The room cannot be more than 100 m wide in

any direction. How far from the person you’re spying on will you be standing.

Review Answers

20. The echo room has a major axis of 100 m and a minor axis of 34.12 m. Situating the room in the

coordinate plane, the room can be represented by the equation: x22500 +

y2

291 = 1. You will be 94 m

from the person you are spying on.

Sundials:

Figure 8.2

Conic sections help us solve the problem of making a sundial. Depending on the season, the sun shines at a

different angle. However, due to the elliptical nature of the Earth’s orbit about the sun, a shadow-casting

stick can be placed in such a way that the shadow always tells the correct time of day, no matter what the

time of year, as long as the stick is lined up with the earth’s pole of rotation.

www.ck12.org 424

Review Questions

21. No matter what the orientation of a stick, if you trace out the path that the shadow of the tip makes

on a flat surface, you will find it is an ellipse. Describe why this is true.(HINT: for simplicity, you

can assume that you are making the measurements throughout the course of one day and that with

the exception of the earth rotating about a pole, the sun and the earth are fixed with respect to one

another.)

22. It was mentioned earlier in the chapter that when a round glass of water is tilted, the surface of the

water is an ellipse. Or, in other words, this statement is claiming that the cross section of a cylinder

is an ellipse. Prove that this is true. (Hint: to prove that this is an ellipse all you need to do is show

that for any cross section of a cylinder there exists a cone that has the same cross section.)

23. From the exercise above, it appears that there is some overlap between “conic sections” and “cylin-

drical sections”. Are any of the classes of conic sections we found in the last section not cylindrical

sections? Are there any cylindrical sections that are not conic sections?

Review Answers

21. Answers may vary.

22. Answers may vary.

23. Answers may vary.

Vocabulary

Ellipse A conic section that can be equivalently defined as: 1) any finite conic section, 2) a circle which

has been dilated (or “stretched”) in one direction, 3) the set of points in which the sum of distances

to two special points called the foci is constant.

Major axis The segment spanning an ellipse in the longest direction.

Minor axis The segment spanning an ellipse in the shortest direction.

Focus One of two points that defines an ellipse in the above definition.

Eccentricity A measure of how “stretched out” an ellipse is. Formally, it is the distance between the two

foci divided by the length of the major axis. The eccentricity ranges from 0 (a circle) to points close

to 1, which are very elongated ellipses.

8.3 Parabolas

Learning Objectives

• Understand what results when a cone is intersected by a plane parallel to one side of the cone.

• Understand the focal-directrix property for parabolas.

• Recognize and work with equations for parabolas.

• Understand that all parabolas are self-similar.

• Understand the equivalence of different definitions of parabolas.

425 www.ck12.org

Introduction

We’ve examined ellipses and circles, the two cases when a plane intersects only one side of the cone and

creates a finite cross-section. Is it possible for a plane to intersect only one side of the cone, but create

an infinite cross-section? It turns out that this is possible if and only if the plane is parallel to one of the

lines making up the cone. Or, in other words, the angle θ between the plane and the horizon, is equal to

the angle formed by a side of the cone and the horizontal plane.

In the image above, if you till the plane a little bit to the left it will cut off a finite ellipse (possibly a very

large one if you only tilt it a little.) Tilt the plane to the right and it will intersect both sides of the cone,

making a two-part conic section called a hyperbola, which will be discussed in the next section.

When the plane is parallel to from the side of the cone, the infinite shape that results from the intersection

of the plane and the cone is called a parabola. Like the ellipse, it has a number of interesting geometric

properties.

Focus-Directrix Property

Like the ellipse, the parabola has a focal property. And, also like the ellipse, a construction similar to

Dandelin’s with the spheres can show us what it is. Dandelin himself didn’t prove the focal property for

parabolas that we are about to discuss, but Pierce Morton used a sphere construction similar to Dandelin’s

to prove the focal property of parabolas in 1829. We’ll look at Morton’s argument here.

In contrast with the argument we made for the ellipse, for a parabola we can only fit one tangent sphere

inside the cone. That is, only one sphere can be tangent to both the cone and the cutting plane. In the

diagram below, the sphere fits underneath the cutting plane, but there is no room for a sphere to lie on

top of the cutting plane and still be tangent to the cone.

As with the ellipse, the point where the sphere intersects the plane is called a focus. But because there is

only one sphere in this construction, and this is related to the fact that a parabola has only one focus. The

other geometric object of interest is called the directrix. This is the line that results from the intersection

between the cutting plane and the plane that contains the circle of contact between the sphere and the

cone. In the diagram below, the directrix is labeled l and is found by intersecting the plane defined by

www.ck12.org 426

circle C and the cutting plane (the planes are shown in dashed lines for clarity). Finally, we will call the

angle between the planes θ.

In the above diagram, we have labeled the point where the sphere contacts the cutting plane with F, and

we’ll call that point the focus of the parabola. Suppose P is an arbitrarily chosen point on the parabola.

Then, let Q be the point on circle c such that PQ is tangent to the sphere. In other words Q is chosen

so that PQ lies on the cone itself. Let L be the point on the directrix l such that PL is perpendicular to

l. Then PF = PQ since both segments are tangents to the sphere from the same point P. We can also

show that PQ = PL. This follows from the fact that the cutting plane is parallel to one side of the cone.

Consider the point P’ that is the projection of P onto the plane containing circle C. Then PP′Q and

PP′L are both right angles by the definition of a projection. PQP′ and PLP′ are both equal to the

angle 90 − θ , where θ is the angle defined above, because the cutting plane and the cone both have an

angle of θ with the horizon. Since they also share a side, triangles 4PQP′ and 4PLP′ are congruent by

AAS . So the corresponding sides PQ and PL are congruent. By the transitive property we have PF = PL,

so the distance between the point P on the parabola to the focus is the same as the distance between P

and the directrix l. We have just proven the focus-directrix property of parabolas.

Equations and Graphs of Parabolas

The equation of a parabola is simpler than that of the ellipse. We will arrive at the equation for a parabola

in two ways.

Method 1: Using the Distance formula

The first method arises directly from the focus-directrix property discussed in the previous section. Suppose

we have a line and a point not on that line in a plane, and we want to find the equation of the set of points

in the plane that is equidistant to these two objects. Without losing any generality, we can orient the line

427 www.ck12.org

horizontally and the point on the y−axis, with the origin halfway between them. Since the parabola is the

set of points equidistant from the line and the point, The parabola passes through the origin, (0,0). The

picture below shows this configuration. The point directly between the directrix and the focus (the origin

in this case) is called the vertex of the parabola. Suppose the focus is located at (0, b). Then the directrix

must be y = −b.

Thus, the parabola is the set of points (x, y) equidistant from the line y = −b and the focus point (0, b). The

distance to the line is the vertical segment from (x, y) down to (0,−b), which has length y − (−b) = y + b.

The distance from (x, y) to the focus (0, b) is distance =

√

(x − 0)2 + (y − b)2 by the distance formula. So

the equation of the parabola is the set of points where these two distances equal.

y + b =

√

(x − 0)2 + (y − b)2

Since distances are always positive, we can square both sides without losing any information, obtaining

the following.

y2 + 2by + b2 = x2 + y2 − 2by + b2

2by = x2 − 2by

4by = x2

y = 1

4b

x2

But b was chosen arbitrarily and could have been any positive number. And for any positive number, a,

there always exists a number b such that a = 14b , so we can rewrite this equation as:

y = ax2

where a is any constant.

This is the general form of a parabola with a horizontal directrix, with a focus lying above it, and with a

vertex at the origin. If a is negative, the parabola is reflected about the x−axis, resulting in a parabola

with a horizontal directrix, with a focus lying below it, and with a vertex at the origin. The equation can

be shifted horizontally or vertically by moving the vertex, resulting in the general form of a parabola with

a horizontal directrix and passing through a vertex of (h, k):

y − k = a(x − h)2

Switching x and y, the equation for a parabola with a vertical directrix and with a vertex at (h, k) is:

x − h = a(y − k)2

Example 1

www.ck12.org 428

Sketch a graph of the parabola y = 3x2 + 12x + 17.

Solution: First, we need to factor out the coefficient of the x2 term and complete the square:

y = 3(x2 + 4x) + 17

y = 3(x2 + 4x + 4) + 17 − 12

y = 3(x + 2)2 + 5

Now we write it in the form x − h = a(y − k)2:

y − 5 = 3(x + 2)2

So the vertex is at (-2,5) and plotting a few x−values on either side of x = −2, we can draw the following

sketch of the parabola:

Review Questions

1. Sketch a graph of the following parabola: y = 2x2 − 2x − 3

2. Sketch a graph of the following parabola: 3x2 + 12x + 11 − y = 0

3. Sketch a graph of the following parabola: 0 = x2 − y + 3x + 5

4. Identify which of the following equations are parabolas: y − 5x + x2 = 3, x2 − 3y2 + 3y − 2x + 15 = 0,

x − 6y2 + 20x − 100 = 0

5. Draw a sketch of the following parabola. Also identify its directrix and focus. 3x2 + 6x − y = 0

6. Find the equation for a parabola with directrix y = −2 and focus (3,8).

429 www.ck12.org

Review Answers

1.

2.

3.

4. y − 5x + x2 = 3 and x − 6y2 + 20x − 100 = 0

www.ck12.org 430

5.

6. y − 3 = 120(x − 3)2

Method 2: Using Three Dimensional Analytical Geometry

Alternatively, we could have arrived at the above equation for a parabola without the argument of Pierce

Morton or the use of Dandelin’s spheres. The following argument is closer to Apollonius’ approach to

parabolas in Ancient Greece, though the closed equation forms and the coordinate grid that I will use are

modern conventions.

Consider a cone oriented in space as pictured below:

If the cone opens at an angle such that at any point its radius to height ratio is a, then the cone could

be defined as the set of points such that the distance from the z−axis is a times the z−coordinate. Or, in

other words, the set of points (x, y, z) satisfying:

√

(x − 0)2 + (y − 0)2 = az

Or:

x2 + y2 = a2z2

This equation works for negative values of x, y, and z, giving the general equation for a two-sided cone.

431 www.ck12.org

To consider the intersection of this cone with a plane that is parallel to the line marked l marked in the

diagram above, it is most convenient to rotate the entire cone about the y axis until the left side of the

cone is vertical, then intersect it with a vertical plane perpendicular to the x−axis. Such a rotation leaves

the y−variable unchanged. To see what it does to the x and z variables, let’s see what happens to the point

(x, z) on the xz−plane when it is rotated by an angle of θ.

In the above diagram, P(x, z) is rotated by an angle of θ to the point P′. We have marked the side lengths

QP = x and SQ = z. By the Pythagorean Theorem, S P =

√

x2 + z2. We also have S P′ =

√

x2 + z2, since

rotation leaves the distance from the origin unchanged. To find the x−coordinates of our rotated point P′,

we can use the fact that cos(90 − α − θ) = SQ′√

x2+z2

. But by properties of cosine we have:

cos(90 − α − θ) = sin(α + θ),

and substituting with the sine addition formula gives us:

SQ′

√

x2 + z2

= sin(α) cos(θ) + cos(α) sin(θ),

which we can use our diagram to change to:

SQ′

√

x2 + z2

= x√

x2 + z2

cos(θ) + z√

x2 + z2

sin(θ)

which simplifies to:

SQ′ = x cos(θ) + z sin(θ)

To find the x−coordinates of our rotated point P′, we can use the fact that sin(90 − α − θ) = P′Q′√

x2+z2

. But

by properties of sine we have:

sin(90 − α − θ) = cos(α + θ)

and substituting with the cosine addition formula gives us:

P′Q′

√

x2 + z2

= cos(α) cos(θ) − sin(α) sin(θ),

www.ck12.org 432

which we can use our diagram to change to:

P′Q′

√

x2 + z2

= z√

x2 + z2

cos(θ) − x√

x2 + z2

sin(θ)

which simplifies to:

P′Q′ = z cos(θ) − x sin(θ)

Looking back at the picture, this means that the coordinates of P′ are (x cos(θ)+z sin(θ), z cos(θ)− x sin(θ)).

In other words, in rotating from P to P′, the x−coordinate changes to x cos(θ)+z sin(θ) and the z− coordinate

changes to z cos(θ) − x sin(θ).

If this rotation happens to every point on the cone, we can substitute x cos(θ)+ z sin(θ) for x and z cos(θ)−

x sin(θ) for z into our equation of the cone, resulting in a new equation for the cone after rotating by θ.

(x cos(θ) + z sin(θ))2 + y2 = a2(z cos(θ) − x sin(θ))2

x2 cos2(θ) + 2xz cos(θ) sin(θ) + z2 sin2(θ) + y2 = a2(x2 sin2(θ) − 2xz cos(θ) sin(θ) + z2 cos2(θ))

x2 cos2(θ) + 2xz cos(θ) sin(θ) + z2 sin2(θ) + y2 = a2x2 sin2(θ) − 2a2xz cos(θ) sin(θ) + a2z2 cos2(θ))

x2 cos2(θ) + 2xz cos(θ) sin(θ) + z2 sin2(θ) + y2 = a2x2 sin2(θ) − 2a2xz cos(θ) sin(θ) + a2z2 cos2(θ))

Now in the case of the tilted cone, we want to tilt the cone such that the left side becomes vertical. Since

the factor a determines how tilted the cone is, we can see from the triangle below that sin(θ) = a√

1+a2

and

cos(θ) = 1√

1+a2

.

So the equation becomes:

x2

1

1 + a2

+ 2xz a

1 + a2

+ z2 a

2

1 + a2

+ y2 = a2x2 a

2

1 + a2

− 2a2xz a

1 + a2

+ a2z2 1

1 + a2

x2 + 2xza + z2a2 + y2(1 + a2) = a4x2 − 2a3xz + a2z2

x2 + 2xza + y2(1 + a2) = a4x2 − 2a3xz

Now that we have tilted our cone, to take a cross section that is parallel to the left side of the cone,

we can simply cut it with a vertical plane. The equation of a vertical plane going through (b, 0, 0) and

433 www.ck12.org

perpendicular to the x−axis is x = b. Therefore, setting x equal to the constant in the equation above will

give us the intersection of the tilted cone and a plane parallel to one side of the cone. b. Here is a picture

of the rotation and the cross-section, which lies in an xz−plane.

Setting x equal to the constant b, we have:

b2 + 2abz + y2(1 + a2) = a4b2 − 2a3bz

z(2ab + 2a3b) = −y2(1 + a2) + a4b2 − b2

z =

(

−1 − a2

2ab + 2a3b

)

y2 + (a4b2 − b2)

Although this coefficient and constant term seem complicated, a and b can be chosen so that the coefficient

of the y2 term can be equal to any number (you will explore this fact in an exercise). The constant term

can be ignored since any parabola can be shifted vertically by any amount.

So the general form of a parabola is:

z = Ay2

where A is any constant.

Or, using the more standard x− and y−coordinates the form of a parabola is

y = ax2

As before, this equation can be adapted to produce the shifted and horizontally oriented forms.

Review Questions

7. Explain why cos(90 − α − θ) = sin(α + θ) in the above argument.

8. Show that for any A there exist constants a and b such that A = −1−a22ab+2a3b .

Review Answers

7. There are many arguments that work. One route is to use the fact that cos(α) = cos(−α) for any α,

and then the fact that cos(α − 90) = sin(α) for any α.

www.ck12.org 434

8. Solving for b in terms of A and a, we have:

A(2ab + 2a3b) = −1 − a2

2Aab(1 + a2) = −(1 + a2)

2Aab = −1

2Aab = −1

b = − 1

2Aa

So we can set b = 2Aa and the relationship will hold.

All Parabolas are the Same

There is a subtle point in the above two arguments that reveals a very interesting property of parabolas.

This is the fact that all parabolas have the same shape. Or, in the language of geometry, any two parabolas

are similar to one another. This means that one parabola can be scaled in or out to produce another

parabola of exactly the same shape. This may come across as surprising, because parabolas where x2 has

a large coefficient certainly look much “steeper” than parabolas with a small coefficient when examined

over the same domain, as shown in the graphs below.

But when one of the parabolas is scaled appropriately, these parabolas are identical:

435 www.ck12.org

This fact about parabolas can be seen in the first argument simply from the fact that all parabolas are

generated from a line and a point not on that line. This configuration of generating objects, a line and

a point, is always the same shape. Any other line and point looks exactly the same—simply zoom in or

out until the line and point are the same distance from one another. So the shapes that any two such

configurations generate must also be the same shape.

In the second argument, there were two factors that might affect the shape of the parabola. The first is

the distance between the cutting plane and the apex of the cone. But cones have the same proportions at

any scale, so no matter what this distance, the picture can be reduced or enlarged, affecting this distance

but not the shape of the cone or plane. So this parameter does not actually change the shape of the conic

section that results. The other factor is the shape of the actual cone. This is its steepness, defined by the

angle at the apex, or equivalently by the ratio between the radius and the height at any point. This is a

bit trickier. It’s not at all obvious that short, squat cones and tall, skinny cones would produce parabolas

of the same shape.

www.ck12.org 436

According to what we found, any parabola produced by slicing any cone resulted in an equation of this

form:

y = ax2

We want to show that if we generate two such parabolas, that they actually have the same shape. So

suppose we use two cone constructions and come up with these parabolas: y = a1x2 and y = a2x2. We

want to show there is some scale factor, call it f , that shrinks or enlarges y = a1x2 into y = a2x2. To keep

a shape the same, the scale factor needs to affect both the x− and y−variables. So we need to find an f

such that ( f y) = a1( f x)2 is equivalent to y = a2x2. The first equation can be written y = (a1 f )x2, which is

equivalent to the second equation when a1 f = a2, or when f = a2a1 . Such an f always exists for non-negativenumbers a1 and a2. So the parabolas are indeed the same shape. If a is less than zero, then the parabola

can be reflected vertically to produce a parabola of the same shape and with positive coefficient a.

Review Questions

9. What other classes of shapes have this property that all members of the class are similar to each

other?

10. Explain why not all ellipses are similar. While enlarging or shrinking doesn’t work to make two

ellipses identical, how can you change the view of two ellipses that have different shapes so that they

look the same?

Review Answers

9. A few examples are: circles, squares, finite sections of one-sided cones of the same angle.

10. The eccentricity of ellipses defines the shape, so when the eccentricity is different for two ellipses, the

ellipses are not similar to one another. Viewing one of the ellipses at an angle, however, changes the

perceived eccentricity of that ellipse, and the angle can be chosen to match the perceived eccentricity

to the eccentricity of the other ellipse, producing an image that is similar to the other ellipse.

437 www.ck12.org

Applications

“Burning Mirrors”

Diocles (∼ 240 − 180 BCE) was a mathematician from Ancient Greece about whom we know very little.

However, we know enough from a few scant documents that he thought about an important application

of parabolas. It comes from what is sometimes called the “optical property” of parabolas. Remember the

optical property of ellipses: lines from one focus “bounce off” the side of the ellipse to hit the other focus.

For parabolas, since parabolas have only one focus, the directrix plays a role. For the parabola, the optical

property is that lines perpendicular to the directrix “bounce off” the parabola and converge at the focus.

Or, alternatively, lines from the focus “bounce off” off the parabola and continue perpendicular to the

directrix. As with the ellipse, “bouncing off” means that the two lines meet the parabola at equal angles

to the tangent.

In the above diagram, the optical property states that α β. The proof is similar to the proof of the

optical property of ellipses. In the above diagram P is the focus and Q is a point on the parabola. Let

R′ be the point on the directrix that is obtained by extending PQ. Then PR′, the straight line, is clearly

the shortest distance between P and R′ that passes through the tangent line. Let R be on the line lying

directly above Q such that QR = QR′. The R can be thought of as R′, reflected across the tangent line.

Then α γ (vertical angles) and γ β (reflected angles), and so α β (transitive property).

The optical property has some interesting applications. Diocles described one potential application in his

document “On Burning Mirrors”. He envisioned a parabolic-shaped mirror (basically a parabola rotated

about its line of symmetry) which would collect light from the sun and focus it on the focal point, creating

enough of a concentration of light to start a fire at that point. Some claim that Archimedes attempted to

make such a contraption with copper plates to fight the Romans in Syracuse.

Figure 8.3

www.ck12.org 438

Review Questions

11. If nothing was used to deflect light before it entered the mirror, where would the sun have to be in

relationship to you and the place you want to start a fire? Why is this a constraint? Design a way

to circumvent this constraint.

12. You live in Ancient Greece and are defending your city against Roman invaders. Design a “burning

mirror” that you plan to use to destroy an army that is approaching at a distance of three miles.

Review Answers

11. The fire-locale must lie on the segment between you and the sun. This is a problem because to start

a ground fire, you would have to wait until evening when the sun is not as bright. A lens or mirror

that changes the angle of the suns rays could help you work around this constraint.

12. Answers will vary. The distance from the focus to the vertex should be 3 miles.

Headlights

The optical property is also responsible for parabola-shaped unidirectional lights, such as car headlights.

If a bulb is placed at the focus of a parabolic mirror, the light rays reflect off the mirror parallel to each

other, making a focused beam of light.

Figure 8.4

Review Questions

13. In the above diagram of a car headlight, the lens directs the beams of light downwards, to keep them

out of the eyes of oncoming drivers. But if that was the only purpose of the lens, alternatively the

lens could be omitted and the headlight could just be angled down slightly. But there is another

purpose to the lens. What is it?

Review Answers

13. The lens also expands the array of light which is why it is called “dispersed light.” Without the lens,

the headlight would only illuminate a strip the width of the headlight itself, which would not be very

useful for driving.

439 www.ck12.org

Cassegrain Telescopes

Satellite telescopes take advantage of the optical property of parabolas to collect as much light from a

distant star as possible. The dish of the satellite below is parabolic in shape and reflects light to the point

in the middle.

Figure 8.5

This image at this point is then focused with a lens into the telescope as shown in the diagram below.

(from:http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/File:Telescope_cassegrain_principe.png) The

Figure 8.6

Technology

As with ellipses, you can examine the graphs of parabolas on a graphing calculator or computer program.

But as with ellipses, there is a much more low-technology tool that can draw a parabola. It is a generalized

version of the circle-drawing compass. Below is a model of a conic section producing compass drawn by

Leonardo da Vinci. Like a compass for making circles, this tool assists a pencil in swiveling about a vertex.

Unlike a compass, the pencil is held loosely in a shaft so that it can slide up and down, and the fixed side

is held at a constant angle. As this angle changes, different conic sections result. This essentially turns the

pencil shaft into the cone and the paper into the cutting plane.

Review Questions

14. Describe how the above compass should be set up to produce a parabola.

www.ck12.org 440

Figure 8.7

Review Answers

14. The pencil should be parallel to the paper at its most extended point.

Vocabulary

Parabola A conic section resulting from intersecting a cone with a plane that is parallel to one of the

lines in the cone.

Focus The point to which all points on a parabola are the same distance as they are to a line, called the

directrix.

Directrix A line to which all points on a parabola are the same distance as they are to a point called the

focus.

8.4 Hyperbolas

Learning Objectives

• Understand what results when a cone is intersected by a plane that intersects both sides of the cone.

• Understand the focal-directrix property for hyperbolas.

• Recognize and work with equations for hyperbolas.

• Understand how a hyperbola can be described in terms of its asymptotes and foci.

• Understand the equivalence of different definitions of hyperbolas.

Two-part Conic Sections

The final way of cutting a cone with a plane appears at first to be much messier. Not only does it result

in an infinite shape, but there are two pieces that aren’t even connected! When the plane slices through

two parts of the cone, the two infinite “U”-shaped parts are together called a hyperbola.

441 www.ck12.org

In this section we will see that this sprawling shape actually has some beautiful properties that make it as

noble as its cousins.

The Focal Property

Even though this shape seems much harder to conceive of than an ellipse, the hyperbola has a defining

focal property that is as simple as the ellipse’s. Remember, an ellipse has two foci and the shape can be

defined as the set of points in a plane whose distances to these two foci have a fixed sum.

Hyperbolas also have two foci, and they can be defined as the set of points in a plane whose distances to

these two points have the same difference. So in the picture below, for every point P on the hyperbola,

|d2 − d1| = C for some constant C.

www.ck12.org 442

Review Questions

1. The hyperbola is infinite in size. In mathematics this is called unbounded, which means no circle,

no matter how large, can enclose the shape. Explain why a focal property involving a difference

results in an unbounded shape, while a focal property involving a sum results in a bounded shape.

Review Answers

1. Answer should include the following concept: In the case of an ellipse, we had two distances summing

to a constant. Since the distances are both positive then there is a limit to the size of the numbers.

In the case of hyperbolas, two very large positive numbers can have a much smaller difference.

To prove the focal property of hyperbolas, we examine Dandelin’s sphere construction. Unlike the con-

struction for ellipses, which used two spheres on one side of the cone, and the sphere construction for

parabolas, which used one sphere on one side of the cone, this construction uses two spheres, one on each

side of the cone. As with the ellipse construction, each sphere touches the plane at one of the foci of the

hyperbola. And as with the argument for the elliptical focal property, the argument uses the fact that

tangents from a common point to a sphere are equal.

In the above diagram, suppose P is an arbitrary point on the hyperbola. We would like to examine the

difference PF2 − PF1. Let C1 be the point on the upper sphere that lies on the line between P and the

vertex of the cone. Let C2 be the point on the upper sphere when this line is extended (so P, C1, and

443 www.ck12.org

C2 are all on the same line and PC1 + C1C2 = PC2 and the cone By the common tangent property,

PF1 = PC1 and PF2 = PC2 for some points C1 and C2 on the circles where the spheres meet the cone. So

PF2−PF1 = PC2−PC1 = (PC1+C1C2)−PC1 = C1C2. But C1C2 is the distance along the cone between the

two circles of tangency and is constant regardless of the choice of C1 and C2. So the difference PF2 − PF1

is constant.

Equations for Hyperbolas

To derive the equation for a hyperbola, we can’t do exactly what we did for ellipses. Remember, when we

first derived the equations for ellipses, we were defining them as “stretched out circles.” Hyperbolas aren’t

as obviously a simple dilation of a shape as basic as a circle. Instead, we’ll use the focal property to derive

their equation. This was what we said could be done for ellipses when I said “simply read the proof of the

focal property backwards.” To derive the equation form of hyperbolas from the focal property, I’ll actually

show you the steps in the correct order.

Suppose we have a curve (actually a pair of curves), satisfying the focal property for hyperbolas. Let’s

orient the hyperbola so that the two foci are on the y−axis, and equidistant from the origin. In the diagram

below the foci are labeled with the points (0, c), and (0,−c).

The focal property states that the difference in distances between an arbitrary point P = (x, y) on the

hyperbola and (0, c), and (0,−c) is a constant. In particular, we know that this constant can be computed

from any point on the hyperbola, for instance the point on the y−axis marked (0, a). The distance between

(0, a) and (0,−c) is a + c and the distance between (0, a) and (0, c) is c − a. The difference between these

two quantities is (c+ a)− (c− a) = 2a. So 2a, the distance between the two y−intercepts of the hyperbola,

is the constant in the focal property for the hyperbola. Using this distance formula and the focal property,

we have:

www.ck12.org 444

√

(x − 0)2 + (y − (−c))2 −

√

(x − 0)2 + (y − c)2 = 2a

x2 + (y + c)2 − 2

√

x2 + (y + c)2

√

x2 + (y − c)2 + x2 + (y − c)2 = 4a2

2x2 + (y + c)2 + (y − c)2 − 4a2 = 2

√

x2 + (y + c)2

√

x2 + (y − c)2

(2x2 + 2y2 + 2c2 − 4a2)2 = 4(x2 + (y + c)2)(x2 + (y − c)2)

4x4 + 8x2y2 + 8c2x2 + 8c2y2 + 4y4 − 16a2x2 + 4c4 − 16a2c2 − 16a2y2 + 16a4 = 4x4 + 4x2(y + c)2 + 4x2(y − c)2 + 4(y + c)2(y − c)2

4x4 + 8x2y2 + 8c2x2 + 8c2y2 + 4y4 − 16a2x2 + 4c4 − 16a2c2 − 16a2y2 + 16a4 = 4x4 + 4x2(y + c)2 + 4x2(y − c)2 + 4(y2 − c2)2

4x4 + 8x2y2 + 8c2x2 + 8c2y2 + 4y4 − 16a2x2 + 4c4 − 16a2c2 − 16a2y2 + 16a4 = 4x4 + 8x2y2 + 8c2x2 + 4y4 − 8c2y2 + 4c4

16c2y2 − 16a2x2 − 16a2c2 − 16a2y2 + 16a4 = 0

c2y2 − a2x2 − a2c2 − a2y2 + a4 = 0

c2y2 − a2y2 − a2x2 = a2c2 − a4

y2(c2 − a2) − x2(a2) = a2(c2 − a2)

y2

a2

− x

2

c2 − a2 = 1

Like the collapse we witnessed when investigating the focal property for ellipses, this equation became

pretty simple. We can even make it simpler. For any positive number b and a, there exists a c such that

b2 = c2 − a2. Thus the general form for a hyperbola that open upwards and downwards and whose foci lie

on the y−axis is:

y2

a2

− x

2

b2

= 1

Switching x and y we have hyperbolas that open rightwards and leftwards and whose foci lie on the x−axis.

x2

a2

− y

2

b2

= 1

These equations have so far been hyperbolas that are centered about the origin. For a hyperbola that is

centered around the point (h, k) we have the shifted equations:

(y − k)2

a2

− (x − h)

2

b2

= 1

for a hyperbola opening up and down, and

(x − h)2

a2

− (y − k)

2

b2

= 1

For a hyperbola opening left and right.

Example 1

Show that the following equation is a hyperbola. Graph it, and show its foci.

144x2 − 576x − 25y2 − 150y − 3249 = 0

Solution: The positive leading coefficient for the x2 term and the negative leading coefficient for the y2

term indicate that this is a hyperbola that is horizontally oriented. Grouping and completing the square,

we have:

445 www.ck12.org

144(x2 − 4x) − 25(y2 + 6y) = 3249

144(x2 − 4x + 4) − 25(y2 + 6y + 9) = 3249 + 576 − 225

144(x − 2)2 − 25(y + 3)2 = 3600

(x − 2)2

52

− (y + 3)

2

122

= 1

So our hyperbola is centered at (2,-3). Its vertices are 5 units to the right and left of (2,-3), or at the points

(7,-3) and (-3,-3). It opens to the right and left from these vertices. It’s foci are c units to the left and

right of (2,-3), where c =

√

a2 + b2 =

√

52 + 122 = 13. So it’s foci are at (15,-3) and (-11,-3). Plotting a

few points near (7,-3) and (-3,-3), the graph looks like:

Review Questions

2. Explain why for any positive number b and a, there exists a c such that b2 = c2 − a2.

3. Graph the following hyperbola and mark its foci: 16x2 + 64x − 9y2 + 90y − 305 = 0

4. Graph the following hyperbola and mark its foci: 9y2 + 18y − x2 + 4x − 4 = 0

5. Graph the following hyperbola and mark its foci: 25x2 + 150x − 4y2 + 24y + 89 = 0

6. Find the equation for the following hyperbola:

www.ck12.org 446

Review Answers

2. Let c =

√

a2 + b2. Since a2 +b2 is always positive for positive a and b, this number is always defined.

Geometrically, let c be the hypotenuse of a right triangle with side lengths a and b.

3.

447 www.ck12.org

4.

5.

6. (x−4)24 −

(y+2)2

45 = 1

Asymptotes

In addition to their focal property, hyperbolas also have another interesting geometric property. Unlike a

parabola, a hyperbola becomes infinitesimally close to a certain line as the x− or y−coordinates approach

infinity. Such a line is called an asymptote.

Before we try to prove this property of hyperbolas, we have to figure out what we mean by “infinitesimally

close.” Here we mean two things: 1) The further you go along the curve, the closer you get to the asymptote,

and 2) If you name a distance, no matter how small, eventually the curve will be that close to the asymptote.

Or, using the language of limits, as we go further from the vertex of the hyperbola the limit of the distance

www.ck12.org 448

between the hyperbola and the asymptote is 0.

So now we need to prove such a line (or lines) exist for the hyperbola. It turns out there are two of them,

and that they cross at the point at which the hyperbola is centered:

It also turns out that for a hyperbola of the form x2a2 −

y2

b2 = 1, the asymptotes are the lines y = ba x and

y = −ba x. (for a hyperbola of the form

y2

a2 −

x2

b2 = 1 the asymptotes are the lines y = ab x and y = −ab x. For a

shifted hyperbola, the asymptotes shift accordingly.)

To prove that the hyperbola actually gets infinitesimally close to these lines as it goes to infinity, let’s focus

on the point P on the upper right leg of the hyperbola in the picture below.

Now consider the point P′, the point on the asymptote lying directly above P. If we can show that P

and P′ become infinitesimally close, then that’s good enough (this subtlety will be explored in the next

exercise.) Well, the point P is on the hyperbola x2a2 −

y2

b2 = 1, so if it’s x−value is x, it’s y− value can be

found by solving for y in the equation. So

x2

a2

− 1 = y

2

b2

y2 = b

2

a2

x2 − b2

y =

√

b2

a2

x2 − b2

This expression simplifies further, but we’ll leave it for now and work on P′. Since P′ lies directly above

P, x is also the x− coordinate of P′. Similarly as with P, we can find the y−coordinate from the equation of

the asymptote. Since y = ba x is the equation of the asymptote, we have ba x as the y−coordinate of P′. So

P =

(

x,

√

b2

a2 x

2 − b2

)

, and P′ =

(

x, ba x

)

. Since these two points are vertically aligned, the distance between

them points is simply the difference between the y−coordinate:

Distance between P and P′ = ba x −

√

b2

a2 x

2 − b2

449 www.ck12.org

= b

a

x −

√

b2

a2

x2 − b

2

a2

a2

= b

a

x −

√

b2

a2

(x2 − a2)

= b

a

x − b

a

√

(x2 − a2)

= b

a

(

x −

√

(x2 − a2)

)

So the distance is a constant multiplied by a quantity that depends on x. What happens to this quantity

when x approaches infinity? This kind of question involves working with limits in a way you will study

soon. For now, we can use a nice geometric picture to see what happens. In the picture below, we see that

a, x, and

√

(x2 − a2) can be thought of as side-lengths of a right triangle, where x is the hypotenuse. This

can be verified with the Pythagorean Theorem.

In this picture, what happens to difference in lengths between the side of length x and the side of length

√

(x2 − a2) when x approaches infinity and a remains fixed? The two side lengths become closer in length,

so their difference approaches zero.

Going back to the previous diagram where we defined P and P′, this means that P and P′ become infinites-

imally close as x approaches infinity.

This same argument can be repeated to show that the other three legs of the hyperbola approach their

respective asymptotes, and to show that the same holds in vertically-oriented and/or shifted parabolas.

Example: Graph the following hyperbola, drawing its foci and asymptotes and using them to create a

better drawing: 9x2 − 36x − 4y2 − 16y − 16 = 0.

Solution: First, we put the hyperbola into the standard form:

9(x2 − 4x) − 4(y2 + 4y) = 16

9(x2 − 4x + 4) − 4(y2 + 4y + 4) = 36

(x − 2)2

4

− (y + 2)

2

9

= 1

So a = 2, b = 3 and c = √4 + 9 =

√

13. The hyperbola is horizontally oriented, centered at the point (2,-

2), with foci at

(

2 +

√

13,−2

)

and

(

2 −

√

13,−2

)

. After taking shifting into consideration, the asymptotes

are the lines: y + 2 = 32(x − 2) and y + 2 = −32(x − 2). So graphing the vertices and a few points on either

side, we see the hyperbola looks something like this:

www.ck12.org 450

Review Questions

7. In the diagram above, which was used in the proof that hyperbolas have asymptotes, why is it true

that if P and P′ become infinitesimally close, that this implies the hyperbola and the line become

infinitesimally close. (HINT: what exactly do we mean by the “closeness” of a point on a hyperbola

and a line?)

8. Graph the following hyperbola, drawing its foci and asymptotes and using them to create a better

drawing: 16x2 − 96x − 9y2 − 36y − 84 = 0.

9. Graph the following hyperbola, drawing its foci and asymptotes and using them to create a better

drawing: y2 − 14y − 25x2 − 200x − 376 = 0.

10. Find the equation for a hyperbola with asymptotes of slopes 512 and − 512 , and foci at points (2,11)

and (2,1).

11. A hyperbolas with perpendicular asymptotes is called perpendicular. What does the equation of

a perpendicular hyperbola look like?

Review Answers

7. The distance between a point and a line is the shortest segment between the point and a point on

the line. We have shown that some distance—not necessarily the shortest—between P and a point

on the asymptote becomes infinitesimally smaller. This means that the shortest distance between P

and the asymptote must also become shorter.

451 www.ck12.org

8.

9.

10. (y−6)225 −

(x−2)2

144 = 1

11. The slopes of perpendicular lines are negative reciprocals of each other. This means that ab = ba ,

which, for positive a and b means a = b.

Applications

Vexing Questions from Ancient Greece

This application of hyperbolas is the reason Menaechmus, one of the first serious thinkers about conic

sections, got into them in the first place.

It is thought that conic sections first attracted the attention of the Ancient Greeks when Menaechmus used

two conics to find a solution to another famous Greek problem. A famous class of Greek problems involves

constructing a length with the simplest tools possible. One of these problems is often referred to as the

problem of “doubling a cube.” The problem is to make a cube that is twice the volume of a given cube.

www.ck12.org 452

This, of course, does not simply mean making a cube whose sides are double in length. This would produce

a cube with eight times the volume. If the first cube has side length one unit then it has volume 13 = 1.

In order for a cube to have double that volume, 2, it must have a side length of 3

√

2. So the problem boils

down to producing a segment whose length is 3

√

2. Once this is done, the cube can be constructed out of

segments of this length.

So Menaechmus was working on constructing a segment of length 3

√

2. Now you are probably thinking,

“Easy, just plug 3

√

2 into your calculator.” But Menaechmus didn’t have a calculator into which he could

type 2∧(1/3). An even more important point is that even if he did have such a calculator, this wouldn’t

solve the problem in a way Menaechmus would have been pleased with. He was trying to use the simplest

technology possible, and a calculator—even if he had one—wouldn’t fit this bill. Plus, a calculator merely

finds an estimate of this number, and the Greeks aimed to find a mathematical situation in which the exact

number would be generated.

The very simplest tools the Greeks considered for making these kinds of constructions were an idealized

compass and straightedge. Unknown to the Greeks at the time, a compass and straightedge don’t do the

job for this length, though they didn’t know it at the time—it wasn’t discovered until 1837, when Pierre

Laurent Wantzel demonstrated that this construction is impossible.

According to some historians (Heath [footnote]), Menaechmus did find a solution to the problem and he

used conic sections to do so. Before his time, the problem had already been reduced to finding a specific

set of “mean proportionals”, or a chain of numbers with equivalent subsequent ratios. In particular, to

find numbers x and y such that 1 is to x as x is to y as y is to 2, or in fraction form:

1

x

= x

y

= y

2

How does this chain of proportions help find the number 3

√

2? Well, looking at the first equality and cross-

multiplying, we have y = x2. Looking at the second equality, we have y2 = 2x. Using the first equation to

substitute x2 for y in the second equation, we have (x2)2 = 2x, which reduces to x3 = 2, the solution of

which is 3

√

2.

But solving the above chain of ratios is also equivalent to finding the intersection of the parabola y = x2

and the hyperbola xy = 2. You’ll examine why this is true in an upcoming review questions.

But wait! Hold the presses! Did I say the hyperbola xy = 2 ? But that doesn’t look like the form of

any of the hyperbolas we have looked at! This is because it is oriented with its foci on a diagonal, rather

than horizontally or vertically. In the next section we will look at how rotating conic sections from their

standard positions affects their forms. For now, you can check that xy = 2 indeed looks like a hyperbola

by plugging in a few points near the origin—which you will do in the exercises below.

Review Questions

12. Draw a sketch of xy = 2 by plotting a few points near the origin.

13. What are the asymptotes of the hyperbola xy = 2 ? What are the foci?

14. Explain why solving the mean proportional 1x = xy =

y

2 is equivalent to finding the intersection of the

parabola y = x2 and the hyperbola xy = 2.

15. In the language of “compass and straightedge,” though Menaechmus’ construction can’t be done with

a traditional compass, it can be done with the generalized compass discussed in the previous section.

453 www.ck12.org

Explain how this tool could be used to “double” an existing cube.

Review Answers

12.

13. The asymptotes are the x− and y−axes. The foci are (2,2) and (-2,-2) (these are relatively hard to

find, but it is relatively easy to show they are the foci once they are found.)

14. These two equations are obtained by looking at the first equality and cross multiplying, as well as

setting the first term equal to the third term and cross multiplying. These two equalities hold exactly

the same amount of information as the chain of equalities.

15. Using a compass and straightedge, a coordinate grid with unit lengths can be drawn. See http://

en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Compass_and_straightedge_constructions for more on using a compass

and straightedge to make geometric constructions. Upon this, the two shapes can be drawn using

the generalized compass as discussed in the last session. The distance between the y−axis and the

intersection point is of length 3

√

2.

Vocabulary

Hyperbola A conic section where the cutting plane intersects both sides of the cone, resulting in two

infinite “U”-shapes curves.

Unbounded A shape which is so large that no circle, no matter how large, can enclose the shape.

Asymptote A line which a curve approaches as the curve and the line approach infinity, eventually

becoming closer than any given positive number.

Perpendicular Hyperbola A hyperbola where the asymptotes are perpendicular.

8.5 General Algebraic Forms

Learning Objectives

• Understand how the cross sections of a cone relate to degree two polynomial equations.

• Understand what happens to the algebraic forms of conic sections when they are neither horizontally

or vertically oriented.

• Recognize the algebraic form of different types of conic sections.

www.ck12.org 454

The Cross Sections of the Cone Are Degree Two Polynomial

Equations

Let’s examine all the equations of the conic sections we’ve studied in this chapter.

Ellipses: x2a2 +

y2

b2 = 1, where a and b are any positive numbers (the circle is the specific case when a = b).

Parabolas: y = ax2 or x = ay2 where a is any non-zero number.

Hyperbolas: x2a2 −

y2

b2 = 1 or

y2

a2 −

x2

b2 = 1, where a and b are any positive numbers.

All these equations have in common that they are degree-2 polynomials, meaning the highest exponent of

any variable—or sum of exponents of products of variables—is two. So for example, here are some degree

two polynomial equations in a more general form:

2x2 + 5y2 − 3y + 4 = 0

x2 − 3y2 + x − y + 3 = 0

10x2 − y − 5 = 0

xy = 2

Some of these probably already look like conic sections to you. For example, in the first equation, we can

complete the square to remove the −3y term and we will see that we have an ellipse. In the second equation

we can complete the square twice to remove both the x and −y terms and we will have a hyperbola. This

is a hyperbola, not an ellipse, because the coefficient of the x2 and y2 terms have opposite signs.

The third equation is a parabola since there is an x2 term and y term but not a y2 term. Do you see how

you can solve for y, putting the equation in the standard form for a vertically oriented parabola?

But what about the fourth equation? Like the others, it is a degree-2 polynomial, since the exponents of

the x and y term sum to 2. But the fourth equation looks nothing like any of the forms for conic sections

that we’ve examined so far. Nonetheless, as we saw in the last section, xy = 2 appears to be a hyperbola

with foci (2,2) and (-2,-2). The reason it doesn’t fit either of the standard forms for hyperbolas is because

it is diagonally oriented, rather than horizontally or vertically oriented (do you see how its two foci lie on

a diagonal line, rather than a horizontal or vertical line?)

In order to see how such differently-oriented conic sections fit into our standard forms, we need to rotate

them so that they are either horizontally or vertically oriented.

Rotation of Conics

Remember in the section on parabolas we discussed rotating objects in the plane. In that section we showed

that if we take a point P = (x, y) and rotate it θ degrees, it changes the x−coordinate to x′ cos(θ)− y′ sin(θ)

and the y−coordinate changes to x′ sin(θ) + y′ cos(θ). (Note: in that section, because we were looking at

a plane embedded in space, we happened to be looking at the xz−plane. We also we’re using the “prime”

symbols x′ and y′. Also, in the particular case of that section we were rotating the cone clockwise. It

is more standard to rotate counter-clockwise, so the signs on the sine functions have changed. So you

can simply substitute x′ for x and y′ for z into the formulas in that section, switch the signs on the sine

functions, and come up with these rotation rules for the xy−plane.)

Now suppose we have an equation of degree two polynomials, such as the xy = 2 example discussed above.

In order to put it into the more recognizable form of a ellipse, parabola, or a hyperbola, we need to rotate

it in such a way so that rotated version has no xy term. So we need to find an appropriate angle θ such

that changing the x−coordinate to x′ cos(θ)− y′ sin(θ) and the y−coordinate to x′ sin(θ)+ y′ cos(θ) results in

455 www.ck12.org

an equation with no xy term. We need to investigate what happens to a degree-two polynomial equation.

Such an equation can be written in the form:

Ax2 + By2 +Cxy + Dx + Ey + F = 0

If C = 0, such as in the first three examples at the beginning of this section, we are done, as there is no

xy term and we already know how to classify these into conics. If C , 0, we need to rotate the curve so

that we have an equation with no xy term. When x is replaced by x′ cos(θ) − y′ sin(θ) and y is replaced by

x′ sin(θ) + y′ cos(θ), only the first three terms of this equation are in danger of producing an xy term. To

see if we can determine if an appropriate angle θ can always be found, let’s substitute our new variables in

for x and y into the first three terms of the equation:

A(x′ cos(θ) − y′ sin(θ))2 + B(x′ sin(θ) + y′ cos(θ))2 +C(x′ cos(θ) − y′ sin(θ))(x′ sin(θ) + y′ cos(θ))

Then, let’s multiply this expression out, but only examine the terms that are a multiple of x′y′, since that

is what we’re trying to eliminate.

−2Ax′y′ cos(θ) sin(θ) + 2Bx′y′ cos(θ) sin(θ) +Cx′y′(cos2(θ) − sin2(θ))

This reduces to:

(−2A cos(θ) sin(θ) + 2B cos(θ) sin(θ)) +C(cos2(θ) − sin2(θ)))x′y′

So we are interested in whether or not there is an angle θ such that the above coefficient of x′y′ is zero:

(−2A cos(θ) sin(θ) + 2B cos(θ) sin(θ)) +C(cos2(θ) − sin2(θ)) = 0

C(cos2(θ) − sin2(θ)) = (2A cos(θ) sin(θ) − 2B cos(θ) sin(θ))

C(cos2(θ) − sin2(θ)) = 2(A − B)(cos(θ) sin(θ))

Separating the θ terms from the A, B, and C terms, we have:

2 cos(θ) sin(θ)

cos2(θ) − sin2(θ) =

C

A − B

But remember the double angle formulas sin(2θ) = 2 cos(θ) sin(θ) and cos(2θ) = cos2(θ)−sin2(θ) (see http:

//authors.ck12.org/wiki/index.php/Trigonometric_Identities#Double-Angle_Identities for more

on the double angles). This means that we need to find an angle such that:

sin(2θ)

cos(2θ) =

C

A − B

or:

tan(2θ) = C

A − B

Can we find such an angle? Well remember the graph of tangent (see http://authors.ck12.org/wiki/

index.php/Circular_Functions#y_.3D_tan.28x.29.2C_The_Tangent_Graph for more on the tangent

graph). It spans all values, so no matter what C, A, and B equal, we can find the appropriate tangent

value. The only time this expression gives us trouble is if the denominator is zero, or A = B. But in this

case there’s an easy solution that you will find in the exercise below.

www.ck12.org 456

For the other cases, you can use the inverse tan function on your calculator or computer program to find

out the value of 2θ, and then divide by 2 to find the value of θ.

Example: Rotate the following conic section so that it is oriented either horizontally or vertically, and then

analyze the result:

79x2 + 37y2 + 42

√

3xy +

(

−200

√

3 − 8

)

x +

(

8

√

3 − 200

)

y + 4 = 0

Solution: To find how much to rotate this conic we need to solve for θ in the equation tan(2θ) = CA−B . We

have C = 42

√

3, A = 79, and B = 37, so we have:

tan(2θ) = 42

√

3

79 − 37

tan(2θ) =

√

3

The angle that solves this equation is θ = pi6 (or 30◦).

So we replace x with x′ cos(30) − y′ sin(30) =

√

3

2 x

′ − 12y′, and y with x′ sin(30) + y′ cos(30) = 12 x′ +

√

3

2 y

′,

giving us:

79

√

3

2

x′ − 1

2

y′

2

+ 37

1

2

x′ +

√

3

2

y′

2

+ 42

√

3

√

3

2

x′ − 1

2

y′

1

2

x′ +

√

3

2

y′

+

(

−200

√

3 − 8

)

√

3

2

x′ − 1

2

y′

+

(

8

√

3 − 200

)

1

2

x′ +

√

3

2

y′

+ 4 = 0

Multiplying through by 4 we have:

79

(√

3x′ − y′

)2

+ 37

(

x′ +

√

3y′

)2

+ 42

√

3

(√

3x′ − y′

) (

x′ +

√

3y′

)

+

(

−200

√

3 − 8

) (

2

√

3x′ − 2y′

)

+

(

8

√

3 − 200

) (

2x′ + 2

√

3y′

)

+ 16 = 0

Multiplying out we have:

237(x′)2 − 158

√

3x′y′ + 79(y′)2 + 37(x′)2 + 74

√

3x′y′ + 111(y′)2 + 126(x′)2 + 84

√

3x′y′ − 126(y′)2

− 1200x′ − 16

√

3x′ + 400

√

3y′ + 16y′ + 16

√

3x′ − 400x′ + 48y′ − 400

√

3y′ + 16 = 0

Which simplifies to:

400(x′)2 + 64(y′)2 − 1600x′ + 64y′ + 16 = 0

Which, divided by 16 is:

25(x′)2 + 4(y′)2 − 100x′ + 4y′ + 1 = 0

Grouping the x′ and y′ terms and completing the squares, we have:

25((x′)2 − 4x′ + 4) − 100 + 4

(

(y′)2 + y′ + 1

4

)

− 1 + 1 = 0

25((x′)2 − 2)2 + 4

(

(y′)2 + 1

2

)2

= 100

((x′)2 − 2)2

4

+

(

(y′)2 + 12

)2

25

= 1

We recognize this as an ellipse, centered at the point

(

2,−12

)

.

457 www.ck12.org

Review Questions

1. What’s the easy solution to the above problem when A = B?

2. Use the above answer or a calculator or computer program to determine how much you would have

to rotate the following conic to eliminate the xy term and orient it either horizontally or vertically:

x2 + y2 + 6x − 3y + 10xy + 100 = 0.

3. Use the above answer or a calculator or computer program to determine how much you would have

to rotate the following conic to eliminate the xy term and orient it either horizontally or vertically:

5x2 − 3x + 4xy + 21 = 0.

4. Rotate the following conic section so that it is oriented either horizontally or vertically, and then

analyze the result: 3x2 + 3y2 +

(

4

√

2 + 2

)

xy + 4

√

2x + 4

√

2y − 4 = 0

Review Answers

1. θ = pi2

2. θ = pi2

3. θ ≈ 31.72◦

4. To figure out the angle of rotation, since A = B we have θ = pi4 (or 45◦). After shifting the equation

by this amount, we have a relation, 4x2 +8x− y2 +8y− 4 = 0. Completing the square, this results in

a shifted hyperbola: (x+1)21 −

(y−2)2

4 = 1.

General Algebraic Forms

How can we look at a degree-2 polynomial equation and determine which conic section it depicts?

Ax2 + By2 +Cxy + Dx + Ey + F = 0

When C = 0 we have already discussed how to determine which conic section the equation refers to. In

summary, if A and B are both positive, the conic section is an ellipse. This is also true of A and B are

both negative, as the entire equation can be multiplied by -1 without changing the solution set. If A and

B differ in sign, the equation is a hyperbola, and if A or B equals zero the equation is a parabola.

There are a few new, more general, rules I will show you that give more information about the case when

C , 0 and hence the conic section needs to be rotated to achieve horizontal or vertical orientation.

If C2 < 4AB, the equation is an ellipse (note when C = 0 this holds whenever A and B are the same sign,

which is consistent with our simpler rule stated above.)

If C2 > 4AB, the equation is an hyperbola (note when C = 0 this holds whenever A and B are the opposite

sign, which is consistent with our simpler rule stated above.)

If C2 = 4AB, the equation is a parabola (note when C = 0, either A or B equals zero, which is consistent

with our simpler rule stated above.)

Review Questions

5. State what type of conic section is represented by the following equation: 5x2+6y2+2x−5y+ xy = 0.

6. State what type of conic section is represented by the following equation: x2 + 3y − 20xy + 20 = 0.

7. The rules above do not account for “degenerate” conic sections, that is the conic section that looks

like an X made by the intersection of a plane containing the line at the center of the cone. Explain

the conditions on the coefficients that lead to the degenerate conic sections.

www.ck12.org 458

Review Answers

5. Ellipse

6. Hyperbola

7. C = 0, and either A = 0 or B = 0 (or both).

Image Sources

(1) http://upload.wikimedia.org/wikipedia/commons/d/d8/Focke_Garten_0004.jpg. Creative

Commons Attribution 2.5.

(2) http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/File:Leonardo_parabolic_compass.JPG. Public Domain.

(3) http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/File:Parabolic_reflection_1.svg. GNU-FDL.

(4) http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/File:Cassegrain_telescope.png. GNU-FDL.

(5) http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/File:DSN_Antenna_details.jpg. Public Domain.

(6) http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/File:Headlight_lens_optics_schematic.png.

GNU-FDL.

(7) http://upload.wikimedia.org/wikipedia/commons/8/87/Kepler-first-law.png. CC by SA

3.0.

459 www.ck12.org